人教版八年级英语上册复习提纲+英语上册导学案(全册)

人教版八年级英语上册复习提纲+英语上册导学案(全册)

人教版八年级英语 上册复习提纲+英语上册导学案(全册)‎ ‎ 人教版八年级英语上册各单元短语句子 Unit1 Where did you go on vacation?‎ go on vacation去度假 stay at home待在家里 go to the mountains去爬山 go to the beach去海滩 visit museums 参观博物馆 go to summer camp去参观夏令营 quite a few相当多 study for为……而学习 go out出去 most of the time大部分时间 taste good尝起来很好吃 have a good time玩得高兴 of course当然 feel like给……的感觉；感受到 go shopping去购物 in the past在过去 walk around四处走走 because of因为 one bowl of… 一碗…… the next day第二天 drink tea喝茶 find out找出；查明 go on继续 take photos照相 something important重要的事 up and down上上下下 come up出来 惯用法：‎ ‎1. buy sth for ab./ buy sb. sth 为某人买某物 2. taste + adj. 尝起来……‎ ‎3. nothing ….but + V.(原形) 除了……之外什么都没有 4. seem +‎ 187‎ ‎ (to be) + adj 看起来 ‎5. arrive in + 大地方 / arrive at + 小地方 到达某地 6. decide to do sth. 决定做某事 ‎7. try doing sth. 尝试做某事 / try to do sth. 尽力做某事 8. enjoy doing sth. 喜欢做某事 ‎9. want to do sth. 想去做某事 10. start doing sth. 开始做某事 ‎11. stop doing sth. 停止做某事 12. look + adj 看起来 ‎13. dislike doing sth. 不喜欢做某事 14. Why not do sth. 为什么不做…….呢？‎ ‎15. so + adj + that + 从句 如此……以至于…… 16.tell sb. (not) to do sth. 告诉某人（不要） 做某事 ‎17. keep doing sth. 继续做某事 ‎18. forget to do sth. 忘记去做某事 / forget doing sth 忘记做过某事 词语辨析：‎ 1. anywhere 与 somewhere 两者都是不定副词。‎ anywhere 在任何地方 ， 常用于否定句和疑问句中。somewhere 在某处，到某处，常用于肯定句。2. seem + 形容词 看起来….. seem + to do sth. 似乎、好像做某事 I seems / seemed + 从句 看起来好像…；似乎…. It seems that no one believe you. ‎ 187‎ seem like ….好像，似乎….. 3. decide to do sth.决定做某事 decide + 疑问词 + 动词不定式 He can not decide when to leave.‎ ‎4. start doing sth = start to do sth. 开始，可与begin 互换 。He started doing his homework. ‎ 但以下几种情况不能用begin .‎ 1) 创办，开办： He started a new bllkshop last month.‎ 2) 机器开动： I can’t start my car.‎ 3) 出发，动身： I will start tomorrow morning.‎ ‎5. over 介词，多于，超过，在…以上（表示数目、程度）= more than My father is over 40 years old.‎ 在…之上，与物体垂直且不接触，与 under 相反。 There is a map over the blackboard.‎ 超过： I hear the news over the radio. ‎ 遍及： I want to travel all over the world.‎ ‎6. too many 太多，后接可数名词复数： too much 太多，修饰不可数名词，修饰动词作状语。 ‎ much too 太，修饰形容词或副词。 ‎ 分辨三者的口诀： too much, much too, 用法区别看后头： much 后接不可数， too 后修饰形或副。‎ too many 要记住，后面名词必复数。‎ ‎7. because of 介词短语，因为，由于，后接名词、代词或动名词，不能接句子。‎ 187‎ because 连词，因为，引导状语从句，表示直接明确的原因或理由。‎ Unit2 How often do you exercise?‎ help with housework帮助做家务 on weekends在周末 how often多久一次 hardly ever几乎从不 once a week每周一次 twice a month每月两次 every day每天 be free有空 go to the movies去看电影 use the Internet用互联网 swing dance摇摆舞 play tennis打网球 stay up late熬夜；睡得很晚 at least至少 have dance and piano lessons上舞蹈课和钢琴课 go to bed early早点睡觉 play sports进行体育活动 be good for对……有好处 go camping去野营 not…at all一点儿也不…… in one’s free time在某人的业余时间 the most popular最受欢迎的 such as比如；诸如 old habits die hard积习难改 go to the dentist去看牙医 morn than多于；超过 less than少于 help sb. with sth.帮助某人做某事 How about…? ......怎么样？/ ……好不好？‎ want sb. to do sth.想让某人做某事 How m 187‎ any+可数名词复数+一般疑问句？ ……有多少……?‎ 主语+find+that从句. ……发现…… spend time with sb.和某人一起度过时光 It’s+ adj.+ to do sth. 做某事的……的。 ask sb. about sth.向某人询问某事 by doing sth. 通过做某事 What’s your favorite……?你最喜爱的……是什么？‎ the best way to do sth.做某事的最好方式 词语辨析：‎ ‎1. how often 多久一次，用来提问动作发生的频率。回答用：once，twice, three times 等词语。‎ how long 多长，用来询问多长时间，也可询问某物有多长。‎ how for 多远， 用来询问距离，指路程的远近。free 空闲的，有空的， 反义词为 busy. be free 有空，闲着，相当于 have time.‎ I’ll be free next week. = I’ll have time next week. ‎ 还可作“免费的、自由的”解。be free to do sth. 自由地做某事。‎ The tickets are free. You’re free to go or to stay.‎ 1. How come？ 怎么会？ 怎么回事？表示某件事情很奇怪，有点想不通；可单独使用，也可引导一个问句， 相当于疑问句 why, 但 how come 开头的特殊疑问句使用的仍然是陈述语序。‎ How come Tom didn’t come to the party? = Why didn’t Tom come to the party?‎ 187‎ 1. stay up late 指“熬夜到很晚，迟睡”。 Don’t stay up late next time. ‎ stay up 指“熬夜，不睡觉”。 He stayed up all night to write his story.‎ 2. go to bed 强调“上床睡觉”的动作及过程，但人不一定睡着。I went to bed at eleven last night.‎ go to sleep 强调“入睡，睡着，进入梦乡”。 She was so tired that she went to sleep soon.‎ 3. find + 宾语 +名词, 发现 ： We have found him (to be) a good boy.‎ find + 宾语 + 形容词， 发现： He found the room dirty.‎ find + 宾语 + 现在分词， 发现 ： I found her standing at the door.‎ 4. percent 百分数， 基数词 + percent： percent 没有复数形式，作主语时，根据所修饰的名词来判断谓语的单复数。 Forty percent of the students in our class are girls. Thirty percent of time passed.‎ 5. more than 超过，多于，不仅仅， 相当于 over. 在句型转换中考查两者的同义替换。反义词组为：less than. I lived in Shanghai for more than / over ten years.‎ ‎9. afraid 形容词， 担心的，害怕的，在句中作表语，不用在名词前作定语。‎ 187‎ be afraid of sb / sth 害怕某人 / 某事； be afraid of doing sth. 害怕做某事。‎ ‎10. sometimes , sometime, some times , some time 的区别：‎ sometimes 频度副词， 有时。表示动作发生的不经常性，多与一般现在时连用，可位于句首、句中或句末。‎ sometime 副词，某个时候。 表示不确切或不具体的时间，常用于过去时或将来时，对它用疑问词when.‎ I will go to Shanghai sometime next week. ------When will you go to Shanghai next week?‎ some times 名词词组， 几次，几倍。其中time 是可数名词，对它提问用how many times.‎ some time 名词短语， 一段时间. 表示“一段时间”时，句中谓语动词常为延续性动词，提问时用 How long.‎ Unit3 I’m more outgoing than my sister.‎ more outgoing更外向 as…as…与……一样…… the singing competition唱歌比赛 be similar to与……相像的/类似的 the same as和……相同；与……一致 be different from与……不同 care about关心；介意 be like a mirror像一面镜子 the most important最重要的 as long as只要；既然 bring out使显现；使表现出 get 187‎ ‎ better grades取得更好的成绩 reach for伸手取 in fact事实上；实际上 make friends交朋友 the other其他的 touch one’s heart感动某人 be talented in music有音乐天赋 be good at擅长…… be good with善于与……相处 have fun doing sth.享受做某事的乐趣 be good at doing sth擅长做某事 make sb. do sth.让某人做某事 want to do sth.想要做某事 as+adj./adv.的原级+as 与……一样…… ‎ It’s+ adj.+for sb. to do sth. 对某人来说，做某事……的。‎ 形容词和副词的比较级、最高级 ‎ 大多数形容词和副词有三个等级：1）原级（不作比较），修饰词very,so,too,pretty,really；2）比较级，表示“较……”或“更……”的意思（两者之间进行比较）, 标志词than,A or B,of the two, 修饰词much,a lot,a little；3）最高级，表示“最……”的意思（三者或三者以上作比较），形容词最高级前面一般要加定冠词the，后面可带in（of）短语来什么比较的范围。‎ as…(原级)as与……一样…… not as/so…as不如 Liming is as tall as Jim. Jack runs as fast as Tom.‎ 187‎ Lily is not as/so tall as Lucy. =Lily is shorter than Lucy.‎ 词语辨析：‎ laugh v. & n. 笑（与at连用）嘲笑 though conj. 虽然；纵然；即使；尽管 = although 注意：不能受汉语的影响，在though引导的从句后使用but。如：‎ Though he was poor，but he was happy.（误）‎ though adv.. 不过，可是，然而，常用于句末，用逗号隔开。‎ Unit4 What’s the best movie theater?‎ movie theater电影院 close to…离……近 clothes store服装店 in town在镇上 so far到目前为止 10 minutes by bus坐公共汽车10分钟的路程 talent show才艺表演 in common共同；共有 around the world世界各地；全世界 more and more……越来越……‎ and so on等等 all kinds of……各种各样的 be up to是……的职责；由……决定 not everybody并不是每个人 make up编造（故事、谎言等） play a role in…在……方面发挥作用/有影响 for example例如 take…seriously认真对待 give sb. sth.给某人某物 come true（梦想、希望）实现；达到 187‎ Can I ask you some…?我能问你一些……吗？‎ How do you like…?你认为……怎么样？‎ Thanks for doing sth.因做某事而感谢。‎ What do you think of…?你认为……怎么样?‎ much+ adj./adv.的比较级 ……得多 watch sb. do sth.观看某人做某事 play a role in doing sth.发挥做某事是作用/在做某事方面扮演重要的角色 one of+可数名词的复数 ……之一 练习 用所给词的最高级填空。‎ good cheap popular comfortably bad 1. Dumpling House is _____________ restaurant in the city. You can get a big plate of dumplings for only five yuan.‎ 2. Spring Park is ________________ place in the city on weekends. Many families go there with their young children. Lots of old people like to take walks there , too.‎ 3. You can rest _______________ at Flower Hotel. Their rooms are clean and big.‎ 4. ‎109.9 FM plays _______________music . The songs are always boring and too loud.‎ 5. PEPＨigh School is ________________ in this town. They have big 187‎ ‎ classrooms, fantastic teachers and an excellent sports center.‎ 用括号里的词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1. We went to the __________(bad) restaurant in town last night. The menu had only 10dishes and the service was not good at all.‎ ‎2. Blue Moon is ______________(good), but Miler’s is _____________(good ) in town.‎ ‎3. The Big Screen is _________________(expensive) than most cinemas, but Cinema City is ____________(expensive).‎ ‎4. Movie City has the __________ (bad) service, but we can sit the_______________ (comfortably)there.‎ ‎5. Johnny Dep acted the _________________(good) in that movie. He’s much ____________(good) than other actors at finding the ________________(interesting) role.‎ Unit5 Do you want to watch a game show?‎ think of认为 learn from从……获得；向……学习 find out查明；弄清楚 talk show谈话节目 game show游戏节目 soap opera肥皂剧 go on发生 watch a movie看电影 a pair of一双；一对 try one’s best尽某人最大努力 as famous as与……一样有名 have a discussion about就……讨论 one day有一天 such as例如 dress up打扮；梳理 ‎ 187‎ ‎ take sb.’s place代替；替换 do a good job干得好 something enjoyable令人愉快的东西 interesting information有趣的资料 one of……之一 look like看起来像 around the world全世界 a symbol of……的象征 let sb. do sth.让某人做某事 plan to do sth.计划/打算做某事 hope to do sth.希望做某事 happen to do sth.碰巧做某事 expect to do sth.盼望做某事 How about doing…?做……怎么样？‎ be ready to do sth.乐于做某事 try one’s best to do sth.尽力做某事 语法点 ‎1.the other, the others, other, others,another 辨析 the other 表示特指两个或者两部份中的另一个或另一部分，可直接单数名词或复数名词。表示两个中的一个……另一个……时，常用one …the other…。例：‎ the others 特指某一范围内的其他的（人或物），是the other的复数形式，相当于the other+复数名词。the other + 复数名词 = any other + 名词单数。例：‎ other 作代词或形容词，可修饰可数名词单数或复数。例：‎ We learn Chinese, Maths, English and other subjects.‎ others 作代词，泛指“其他的人或物”。 例：‎ 187‎ Some students are doing homework,others are talking loudly.‎ another 泛指同类事物中的三者或三者以上的“另一个”，只能代替或修饰单数可数名词。例：‎ I don’t like this one. Please show me another one. ‎ ‎3.find out 查明，弄清楚，find 找到 ‎ Please find out when Mrs Green will go to Beijing.‎ ‎4. go on 发生，与 take place 同义 I wonder what was going on. ‎ 1. happen v.发生，一般指偶然发生，主语为事，不能为人。‎ Sth + happens to sb. A traffic accident happened to his elder brother yesterday.‎ Sth + happens + 地点/时间，意为：某地/某时发生了某事 An accident happened on Park Street.‎ happen v，表示“碰巧”，主语可以是人，后常跟动词不定式to,表示“碰巧……”.‎ Sb + happens to do sth.‎ I happened to see my uncle on the street.‎ ‎* take place 意为“发生，举行，举办”，一般指非偶然性事件的“发生”，即这种事件的发生一定有某种原因或事先的安排。例：‎ Great changes have taken place in China.‎ The meeting will take place next Friday.‎ 2. expect v. 期待，盼望，预期，后常接四种结构：‎ 187‎ ‎1)expect + 名词/代词，期待某事/某人，预计……可能发生。‎ I’m expecting Li Lin’s letter.‎ ‎2)expect to do sth. 预计做某事 Lily expects to come back next week.‎ ‎3)expect sb. to do sth.‎ I expect my mother to come back early.‎ ‎4)expect + 从句 预计……‎ I expected that I’ll come back next Monday.‎ ‎7. serious a. 严肃的，认真的。 He is a serious man.‎ be serious about sb/sth. 对某人/某事当真 Peter is serious about Jenny. He wants to get married to her.‎ be serious about doing sth. 对某事当真 ____He’s serious about selling his house.‎ ‎ ‎ 练习 I’m going to buy a computer this month.‎ ‎---Let’s discuss the plan, shall we? ----Not now. I ______ to an interview.‎ A. go B. went C. am going D. was going ‎ ‎------Jack is busy packing luggage. ---Yes. He _________for America on vacation.‎ 187‎ A. leaves B. left C. is leaving D. has been away Unit6 I’m going to study computer science.‎ grow up成长；长大 every day每天 be sure about对……有把握 make sure确信；务必 send…to…把……送到…… be able to能 the meaning of……的意思 different kinds of不同种类的 write down写下；记下 have to do with关于；与……有关系 take up开始做；学着做 hardly ever几乎不；很少 too…to…太……而不能……/太……以至于不能 be going to+动词原形 打算做某事 practice doing练习做某事 keep on doing sth.不断地做某事 learn to do sth.学会做某事 finish doing sth.做完某事 promise to do sth.许诺去做某事 help sb. to do sth.帮助某人做某事 remember to do sth.记住做某事 agree to do sth.同意做某事 love to do sth.喜爱做某事 want to do sth.想要做某事 ‎ 1） be going to + 动词原形——表示将来的打算、计划或安排。常与表示将来的tomorrow, next year等时间状语或when 187‎ ‎ 引导的时间状语从句连用。各种句式变换都借助be 动词完成，be随主语有am, is, are 的变换，going to 后接动词原形。‎ 肯定句： 主语 + be going to + 动词原形 + 其他。He is going to take the bus there.‎ 否定句： 主语 + be not going to + 动词原形 + 其他 I’m not going to see my friends this weekend.‎ 一般疑问句： Be + 主语 + going to + 动词原形 + 其他 肯定回答： Yes, 主语 + be. 否定回答： No, 主语 + be not.‎ Are you going to see your friends this weekend? Yes ,I am. / No, I’m not.‎ 特殊疑问句： 疑问词 + be + 主语 + going to + 动词原形 + 其他？‎ What is he going to do this weekend? When are you going to see your friends?‎ ‎2) 如果表示计划去某地，可直接用 be going to + 地点 We are going to Beijing for a holiday.‎ ‎3) 表示位置移动的动词，如go , come, leave 等常用进行时表示将来。‎ The bus is coming. My aunt is leaving for Beijing next week.‎ ‎4) be going to 与 will 的区别：‎ 187‎ ① 对未来事情的预测用“ will + 动词原形”表达，will 没有人称和数的变化，变否定句要在will 后面加not, 也可用will 后面加 not,或者缩略式won’t, 变一般疑问句将will 提至 句首。‎ Will planes be large in the future? Yes, they will. / No, they won’t.‎ ②will 常表示说话人相信或希望要发生的事情，而be going to 指某事肯定发生，常表示事情很快就要发生。 I believe Lucy will be a great doctor.‎ ③ 陈述将来的某个事实用will. ‎ I will ten years old next year.‎ ④表示现在巨大将来要做的事情用 will.‎ I’m tired I will go to bed. ‎ ⑤ 表示意愿用will.‎ I’ll tell you the truth.‎ ⑥ 表示计划、打算要做的事情用 be going to, 而不用 will.‎ Unit7 Will people have robots?‎ on computer在电脑上 on paper在纸上 live to do 200 years old活动200岁 free time空闲时间 in danger处于危险之中 on the earth在地球上 play a part in sth.参与某事 space station太空站 187‎ look for寻找 computer programmer电脑编程员 in the future在未来 hundreds of许多；成百上千 the same…as…与……一样 over and over again多次；反复地 get bored感到厌烦的 wake up醒来 fall down倒塌 will+动词原形 将要做……‎ fewer/more+可数名词复数 更少/更多……‎ less/more+不可数名词 更少/更多……‎ have to do sth.不得不做某事 agree with sb.同意某人的意见 such+名词（词组） 如此……‎ play a part in doing sth. 参与做某事 There will be + 主语+其他 将会有……‎ There is/are +sb./sth.+doing sth.有……正在做某事 make sb. do sth. help sb. with sth.帮助某人做某事 try to do sth. 尽力做某事 It’s+ adj.+for sb. to do sth. 对某人来说，做某事……的。‎ 词语辨析：‎ ‎1. every 与 each 的区别：‎ every 用来表整体，each 用来表个别。each 最低需是两，every 最低需是三。every adj.‎ 187‎ every 作主用单数，each 可单也可复，作主、作定用单数，其他情况用复数。 each adj./ pron.‎ Every teacher knows her. ‎ There are lots of trees on each side of the road.‎ Each of the road has a dictionary.‎ ‎2. on the earth 在地球上，作地点状语，位于句首或句末。 on earth 究竟，到底。用于疑问句或副词后，加强语气。‎ All the living things on the earth depend on the sun. / What on earth do you mean?‎ ‎3. human, 指包括男人女人孩子的“人，人类”，有别于动物，自然景物，机器等的特殊群体，也可指具体的人。 ‎ person, 无性别之分，常用于数目不太大，而且数目比较精确的场合。‎ people, 泛指“人们”，表示复数概念。‎ man,前不带冠词而且单独使用时，指“男人”，a man 可指“一个人/ 一个男人”，复数形式为men.‎ He was the only human on the island. ‎ There are only three persons in the room.‎ There are many people there.‎ Man is stronger than woman.‎ ‎4. seem 连系动词，好像，似乎，看来。有下面几种用法：‎ seem + 名词 看起来。He seems a nice man.‎ 187‎ seem like 好像，似乎。 It seemed like a good idea at the time.‎ seem to do sth. 似乎/看起来/好像做某事。 I seem to have left my book at home.‎ It seems/seemed that 看起来好像…, 似乎…. He was very happy.‎ seem to be + 形容词/名词 = seem + 形容词/名词。 She seems to be happy.= She seems happy.‎ ‎5. probably ad. maybe 相当于 perhaps. 也许，大概，可能。作状语.‎ probably 用于句中，可能性最大。 He will probably come tomorrow.‎ maybe/perhaps 用于句首。 Maybe/Perhaps you are right.‎ 1. during / for / in 介词，在……期间。说到某事是在某一段时间之间发生的用during; 说到某事持续多久则用for; 说到某事具体发生的时间用in.‎ We visited many places of interest during the summer holiday.‎ I’ve been here for two weeks.‎ They usually leave school in July.‎ 一般将来时结构：‎ 肯定式： 主语 + will/shall + 动词原形 + 其他 will 用于各种人称，shall 用于第一人称。‎ 187‎ ‎ 主语 + be going to + 动词原形 + 其他 be 随人称、数和时间的变化而变换。‎ 否定式： 在will/shall/be 后面加 not. will not = won’t .‎ 一般疑问句： 将will/shall/be 提到主语前面。‎ There be 句型的一般将来时：‎ There will be + 主语 + 其他 ，意为 ：将会有。一般疑问句形式为： Will there be + 主语 + 其他。‎ 肯定回答是： Yes, there will. 否定回答是： No, there won’t.‎ 否定形式是：There won’t be + 主语 + 其他， 将不会有……‎ 特殊疑问句是: 疑问词/ 词组 + 一般疑问句？ When will there be a nice basketball match?‎ 练习 Traveling to space is no longer just a dream. Russia______the first hotel in space in the near future. A. builds B. will build C. built D. has built There ______ a football match on CCTV-5 at nine tomorrow evening.‎ A. will have B. is going to be C . is having In 50 years there _______more robots in people’s homes.‎ A. were B. will have C. will be D. have 187‎ ‎--Will people live to be 300 years old? ---_________.‎ A. No, they aren’t B. No, they won’t C. No, they don’t D. No, they can’t They ______any classes next week. A. will have B. won’t have C. have D. had 用more, less,fewer 填空。‎ 1. In the future, there will be ________fresh water because there will be _______pollution in the sea.‎ 2. In 100 years, there will be ______cars because there will be _______people in the cities.‎ 3. There will be ________job for people because ________ robots will do the same jobs as people.‎ 4. I think there will be ________cities because people will build________buildings in the country.‎ 5. In 50 years, people will have _______ free time because there will be ________things to do.‎ Unit8 How do you make a banana milk shake?‎ milk shake奶昔 turn on接通（电流、煤气、水等）；打开 pour…into…把……倒入……‎ a cup of yogurt一杯酸奶 a good idea好主意 on Saturday在星期六 cut up切碎 187‎ put…into…把……放入…… one more thing还有一件事 a piece of一片/张/段/首……‎ at this time在这时 a few一些；几个 fill… with…用……把……装满 cover…with…用……覆盖…… one by one一个接一个；逐个；依次 a long time很长时间 how many+可数名词复数 多少…… how much+不可数名词 多少……‎ It’s time (for sb.)+to do sth. 到（某人）做某事的时间了 First…Next…Then…Finally 首先……接下来……然后…….最后……‎ want + to do sth.想要做某事 forget+to do sth.忘记去做某事 how + to do sth.如何做某事 need+to do sth.需要做某事 make+宾语+形容词 使……怎样 let sb. +do sth.让某人做某事 词语辨析：‎ 1. turn on 打开，接通（电源，气，水），反义词是turn off. turn up/turn down 调高/低音量。‎ 2. pour…into… 将…倒入/灌入… into 是：进入… in 是：在…内。‎ 在put, throw, break, lay, fall 等动词之后，既可用in，也可用into。但in可作副词，into不能。‎ 187‎ He put all the books in/into the bag. Come in!‎ ‎3. 有关make 的短语： make the bed 铺床 make tea 沏茶 make trouble 惹麻烦 make money 赚钱 make a decision 做决定 make a telephone call 打电话 make a visit 拜访 make a mistake 犯错误 make a noise 弄出噪音 make a living 谋生 make sure 务必 ‎4. one more thing = another one thing 基数词 + more + 名词 = another + 基数词 + 名词 ‎5. fill with 用…填充… be filled with = be full of 充满….‎ The boy filled the bottle with sand. / The bag was full of clothes.‎ ‎6. cover…with… 用…把…覆盖 be covered with 被…所覆盖。 cover n. 封面，盖子。‎ Ann covered her face with her hands. / The cover of the magazine is nice.‎ ‎7. It’s time (for sb) to do sth. 到某人做某事的时候了。‎ It’s time for sth. 到做某事的时候了 Unit9 Can you come to my party?‎ on Saturday afternoon在周六下午 prepare for为……做准备 go to the doctor去看医生 187‎ have the flu患感冒 help my parents帮助我的父母 come to the party来参加聚会 another time其他时间 last fall去年秋天 go to the party去聚会 hang out常去某处；泡在某处 the day after tomorrow后天 the day before yesterday前天 have a piano lesson上钢琴课 look after照看；照顾 accept an invitaton接受邀请 turn down an invitation拒绝邀请 take a trip去旅行 at the end of this month这个月末 look forward to盼望；期待 the opening of… ……的开幕式/落成典礼 reply in writing书面回复 go to the concert去听音乐会 not…until直到……才 meet my friend会见我的朋友 visit grandparents拜访祖父母 study for a test为考试学习 have to不得不 too much homework太多作业 do homework做家庭作业 go to the movies去看电影 after school放学后 on the weekend在周末 ‎ invite sb. to do sth.邀请某人做某事 ‎ 187‎ what引导的感叹句结构：What+a/an+adj.+可数名词单数（+主语+谓语）！‎ What+adj.+名词复数/不可数名词（+主语+谓语）！‎ help sb.（to）do sth.帮助某人做某事 be sad to do sth.做某事很悲伤 see sb. do sth. see sb.doing sth.‎ the best way to do sth.做某事最好的方式 have a surprise party for sb.为某人举办一个惊喜派对 look forward to doing sth.期盼做某事 reply to sth./sb.答复某事/某人 What’s today?今天是什么日子？ What’s the date today? What day is it today?‎ 词语辨析：‎ 1. prepare意为“准备”，强调准备的动作与过程。宾语是这一动作的承受者。其后也可接双宾语，还可接不定式。  prepare for sth. 为…准备好。for的宾语不是动作的承受者，而是表示准备的目的，即所要应付的情况。  / prepare to do sth 准备做某事。 ‎ prepare 强调准备的动作与过程。宾语是这一动作的承受者。其后也可接双宾语，还可接不定式。‎ get/be ready意为“准备好”，强调准备的结果。常见结构有：①be ready(for sth．)②get sth. ready ③be ready(for sth)④be get ready to 187‎ ‎ do(准备干某事，乐于干某事)‎ 1. surprised 形容词，感到意外的，主语是人be surprised to do sth 对做某事感到意外 surprising 形容词，令人惊讶的，主语是物 The news was surpring.‎ surprise 名词，惊奇、惊讶 to one’s surprise 动词，使惊奇，使感到意外 It surprise sb to do sth.‎ 2. look forward to 期待，盼望，to 是介词，后跟名词，代词或动名词作宾语。‎ hear from sb. 收到某人的来信 = receive a letter from sb.‎ hear of = hear about 听说 3. make it 在约定的时间内到达，能够来 = arrive in time; Glad you could make it.‎ 商量确定的时间，表示将来某项计划的安排，后接时间状语。 Let’s make it at seven o’clock on Tuesday.‎ 成功办成某事 = succeed After years of hard work, he finally made it.‎ 4. reply 回答，指用口头或书面形式回答，不及物动词 reply to sb/sth. 对…..作出回答。‎ 作及物动词，意为 回答，回答说。作名词，意为：答道，回信，答复，后跟介词 to .‎ answer 187‎ ‎ 是最普通的用语，包括口头，书面或行动的回答，可作及物和不及物动词。‎ 情态动词can表示邀请 Unit10 If you go to the party,you’ll have a great time!‎ stay at home待在家里 take the bus乘公共汽车 tomorrow night明天晚上 have a class party进行班级聚会 half the class一半的同学 make some food做些食物 order food订购食物 have a class meeting开班会 ‎ at the party在聚会上 potato chips炸土豆片，炸薯条 in the end最后 make mistakes犯错误 go to the party去参加聚会 have a great/good 玩得开心 give sb. some advice给某人提一些建议 go to college上大学 make（a lot of）money赚（许多）钱 travel around the world环游世界 get an education得到教育 work hard努力工作 a soccer player一名足球运动员 keep…to oneself保守秘密 talk with sb.与某人交谈 in life 在生活中 be angry at/about sth.因某事生气 be angry with sb.生某人的气 in the future在将来 run away逃避；逃跑 the first step第一步 in half分成两半 solve a problem解决问题 school clean-up学校大扫除 ‎ 187‎ ask sb. to do sth.要求某人做某事 give sb. sth.给某人某物 ‎ tell sb. to do sth.告诉某人做某事 too…to do sth.太……而不能做某事 be afraid to do sth.害怕做某事 advise sb. to do sth.劝告某人做某事 It’s best (not) to do sth.最好（不）做某事 need to do sth.需要做某事 练习 用所给词的正确形式填空：‎ Dear Su Mei, ‎ I don’t _______(know) what to _________(do) about going to Mike’s birthday party tomorrow night. My parents_________(think) I should study for my English exam next week. If I _______(go) to the party, they____(be) upset. Mike________(tell)us to wear nice clothes, but I don’t ________(have) any. If I ________(wear) jeans, I_______(look) the worst. Also, I’m not sure how to_______(go) to the party. if I______(walk), it___________(take) me too long. If I _______(take) a taxi, it __________(be) too expensive. Can you give me some advice, please?‎ Tina 全册导学案 187‎ 班级 ‎ 姓名 ‎ Unit 1 Where did you go on vacation?‎ Section A 1a—1c 内容：unit1 Where did you go on vacation? 课时： 1课时 英语 组 编写人： 审核人： 审批人；‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【学习目标】‎ ‎1、学会谈论过去发生的事件—学习一般过去时的用法 ‎2、掌握规则动词的变换规则 ‎3、熟记一些常用的不规则动词 ‎ ‎【学习重点、难点】 ‎ ‎1.复习一般过去时态的构成及用法；‎ ‎2.进一步学习一般过去时态针对地点的提问及回答； ‎ ‎【学法指导】 ‎ ‎1、能向小组成员用英语介绍生活中的日常活动，如：stay at home , go to the beach, do my home work, watch TV, visit my uncle, go to New York, etc.‎ ‎2、运用一般过去时谈论过去的一天或一次旅行。‎ ‎3.不规则动词过去式的归类记忆 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 一、 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ StepA、试一试你能写出下列各词的过去式吗？‎ stay_________    do_________     stop_________play_________      ‎ ‎  is_________    go_______ buy_______ have _______‎ like_________ visit_________         are_________    carry_________‎ StepB、快乐译一译 stay at home_________      go to summer camp_________‎ go to New York city______  go to the mountains_________‎ visit my uncle_________    go to the beach_________‎ visit museums _______ ‎ Step C、考考你的迁移能力 ‎1. Lucy usually______to school early. But today she ______to school late. (go) ‎ ‎2一What___________you__________(do) on your vacation last year?‎ ‎--–We___________(play) on the beach. ‎ ‎3.I______ (call) you just now. But there_______ (be) no answer.‎ ‎4.Where __________you(study) at home las night? 一No, I__________(help)my mother__________(clean) the room. ‎ ‎5. The students of Class One go to see the old woman __________ (one) a month.‎ Step D、 answer the questions:‎ How was your summer vacation ?‎ Where did you go on vacation? ‎ Who did you go there with ?‎ 187‎ What did you do there ? ‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ Step 1c ‎ 师生、生生操练 Where did you go on vacation? I went to New York City.‎ Did you go out with anyone? No, No one was here. Everyone was on vacation.‎ Did you buy anything special? Yes, I bought something for my father.‎ How was the food? Everything tasted really good.‎ Did everyone have a good time? Oh，yes. Everything was excellent.‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ Step 1a Reciting ‎1.Read the phrases and know their meanings.‎ stay at home_________      go to summer camp_________‎ go to New York city______  go to the mountains_________‎ visit my uncle_________    go to the beach_________‎ visit museums _______ ‎ ‎2.finish the task:match the activities with the pictures.‎ ‎3.check the answers.‎ ‎4. students read and remember the phrases.‎ Step 1b Listening ‎1.students read the names.‎ ‎2. students guess their activities.‎ ‎3. finish the task:‎ ‎4. check the answers.‎ ‎5. students read and know the mmeaning of this passage.‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ I、语法：一般过去时态的运用 ‎1.带有确定的过去时间状语时，要用过去时 如： two days ago…、 last year ‎ in the old days just now when I was 8 years old yesterday ‎ Did you have a party yesterday？‎ ‎2 表示过去连续发生的动作时，要用过去时 这种情况下，往往没有表示过去的时间状语，而通过上下文来表示。‎ The boy opened his eyes for a moment，looked at the captain，and then died.‎ 那男孩把眼睛张开了一会儿，看看船长，然后就去世了。‎ ‎3 表示过去一段时间内经常或反复的动作 常与 always，‎ never 等连用。‎ Mrs. Peter always carried an umbrella.彼得太太过去老是带着一把伞。‎ 及时练习：用be动词的适当形式填空 ‎　　   ①I _______ at school just now.‎ ② He ________ at the camp last week.‎ ‎　　   ③ We ________ students two years ago.‎ 187‎ ‎　　   ④They ________ on the farm a moment ago.‎ ‎　　   ⑤Yang Ling ________ eleven years old last year.‎ ‎　　   ⑥ There _______ an apple on the plate yesterday.‎ ‎　　   ⑦There _______ some milk in the fridge on Sunday.‎ ‎　　   ⑧The mobile phone _____ on the sofa yesterday evening.‎ II、词语运用 ‎—Where did he go on vacation?他去哪儿度假的？‎ ‎ —He stayed at home.他呆在家里。‎ stay at home“呆在家里”是一固定短语，类似的还有：‎ stay in bed“卧床”，‎ be at home“在家”，‎ be at school“在上学”，‎ be at work“在工作”等等。‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ I. 用动词的适当形式填空：‎ ‎1.Tom and Mary ___________ (come) to China last month.‎ ‎2.Mike _____(not go) to bed until 12 o’clock last night. So I_____(get ) up late.‎ ‎3.Mary __________ (read) English yesterday morning.‎ ‎4.There _________ (be) no one here a moment ago.‎ ‎5.I ___________ (call) Mike this morning.‎ ‎6.I listened but ___________ (hear) nothing.‎ ‎7.Tom ___________ (begin) to learn Chinese last year.‎ ‎8.Last week we _________ (pick) many apples on the farm. ‎ ‎9.My mother ________________ (not do) housework yesterday.‎ ‎10.She watches TV every evening. But she ______ (not watch) TV last night.‎ 用括号内动词的正确形式填空                         Last year Mr. Smith _____ (go ) to China and Japan. He _____ (have) a ‎ wonderful time. He _____ (do) a lot of different things and _____ (talk) to ‎ a great number of different people. He _____ (eat) Chinese and Japanese ‎ food and _____ (visit) a lot of interesting places. When he _____ (go) back ‎ to England, he _____ (be) very tired.                        ‎ ‎【总结反思】‎ ‎ ‎ Unit 1 Where did you go on vacation?‎ Section A 2a—2c ‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1、一般过去时的特殊疑问句及答语。‎ Where did you/he/she/they go on vacation?‎ She went to the beach. ‎ ‎【学习重点、难点】 ‎ 重点疑点：一般过去时的用法，利用情景思维在理解句意的基础上理解词汇的用法，记忆重点词汇，句型和语法内容。‎ ‎【学法指导】 ‎ 187‎ ‎1、在谈论过去发生的事件时，动词应用              ， ‎ ‎2、一般问句记两点，一句首加           ，二动词变           。 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 一、 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ I 写出下列动词的过去式。‎ ‎ （1）draw ___________ （2）swim _____________‎ ‎ （3）study __________ （4）bring _____________‎ ‎ （5）begin __________ （6）learn ______________‎ ‎ （7）get ____________ （8）sleep _____________‎ ‎ （9）lie（躺）_______ （10）enjoy ____________‎ II、按要求变换句型：‎ ‎ 1. I saw a lot of children ____________ on the playground.（正在打篮球）‎ ‎ 2. Yesterday we went to the park. We had a great time there.（改成近义句）‎ ‎ Yesterday we went to the park. We _________ _________ there.‎ ‎ 3. I paid 20 yuan for the new book. （改成近义句）‎ ‎ I _______ __________ _________ ______ the new book.‎ ‎ 4. My family and I visited some places of interest.（变成疑问句）‎ ‎ _____________________________________________‎ ‎ 5. We did our homework.（变成否定句）‎ ‎ _______________________________________________‎ III、快乐译一译 go with someone_________     go out with someone _______ ‎ go to New York city______  buy something special_________‎ meet someone interesting_________    study for________‎ do something interesting _________‎ go to central park________ ‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ A、猜一猜 Where did I go on vacation? 请运用你学过的所有活动的名称。‎ 同学们可这样猜：Did you go to….             ?‎ B、列下你去过的一些地方，询问同伴是否去过完成下列表格。‎ Name Did you…… Yes, I did No, I didn’t ‎       ‎ ‎       ‎ ‎       ‎ C、看以上信息，向同学们汇报同伴去过或没去过的地方。‎ D 引导学生做如下练习 Grace ,where did you go last vacation ?‎ I went to the New York City.‎ Oh ,really. Did you go with anyone ?‎ Yes ,I went there with my mother.‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ Step 2a listening 187‎ Look at the pictrue, which people went on vacation?‎ Who are they ?where did they go ?‎ Finish the task.‎ Check the answers.‎ Step 2b listening Look at the form, read the words and know their meanings.‎ ‎ go with someone_________     go out with someone _______ ‎ go to New York city______  buy something special_________‎ meet someone interesting_________    study for________‎ do something interesting _________‎ go to central park________ ‎ what did people do on their vacation?‎ Finish the task.‎ Check the answers.‎ Step 2C reading Students listen and repeat the conversation,and know the Chinese.‎ Students read the conversation aloud.‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ 下面是Anna去海滩度假的情况表，请根据表的内容回答问题。‎ Place Weather Activity Food Sun Beach Sunny Have a swim Seafood A: Hi, Tina! 1 ? B: Fine, thanks.‎ ‎ A: Where did you go, Tina? B: 2 .‎ ‎ A How was the weather there? B. 3 .‎ ‎ A: What did you do there? B: 4 .‎ ‎ A: Did you have any fish? B: 5 ‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ I单项选择。‎ ‎ 1. I found a small boy _________ in the corner.‎ ‎ A. cries B. to cry C. cried D. crying ‎ 2. We had great fun _________ in the water.‎ ‎ A. playing B. plays C. played D. to play ‎ 3. I didn’t have any money for a taxi ______ I walked back to the hotel.‎ ‎ A. but B. or C. so D. and ‎ 4. We had Sichuan food _________ dinner.‎ ‎ A. at B. for C. in D. with ‎ 5. He often helps me _________ English.‎ ‎ A. study B. studying C. studied D. studies ‎ 6. Wednesday is the _________ day of the week.‎ ‎ A. third B. fourth C. second D. fifth ‎ 7. Peter _________ olives.‎ 187‎ ‎ A. like B. don’t like C. doesn’t likes D. doesn’t like ‎ 8. ―How _________ the weather? ―It was sunny.‎ ‎ A. is B. are C. was D. were ‎ 9. ―There is a new supermarket, isn’t there? ―_________.‎ ‎ A. Yes, it is B. Yes, they are C. Yes, there is D. Yes, there are ‎ 10. _________ I go to school by bike.‎ ‎ A. On every day B. Everyday C. On everyday D. Every day ‎ II、选择答语 ‎( )1. How was your vacation?‎ ‎ ( )2. How was the weather yesterday?‎ ‎ ( )3. How did you spend the weekend?‎ ‎ ( )4. How are your parents?‎ ‎ ( )5. How is the work going?‎ ‎ ( )6. How much are the vegetables?‎ ‎ ( )7. How can I get there?‎ ‎ ( )8. How many people are there on Tian’an Men Square?‎ A. It was great.‎ B. Three dollars.‎ C. I think there are about twenty thousand people. ‎ D. Very humid and hot.‎ E. I went to the beach with my parents.‎ F. You can take a No. 24 bus.‎ G. It is going very well.‎ H. Fine. Thank you.‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ Unit 1 Where did you go on vacation?‎ Section A 2d ‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1、学习掌握有关复合不定代词和副词的用法；‎ ‎2、继续学习Where的特殊疑问句及回答； ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ ‎1、学习掌握有关复合不定代词和副词的用法；‎ ‎2、运用Where的特殊疑问句及回答编写对话 ‎ ‎【学法指导】 ‎ 读对话---理解对话---编写对话----实际运用 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 一、导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ 一）、熟记下列短语并翻译 187‎ ‎1. somewhere interesting __________2. feed some hens __________‎ ‎3. buy something for my father___________ 4.照相__________‎ ‎5. seem to be bored __________ 6. Go out with someone___________ ‎ ‎7. buy something special __________ 8 写日记__________‎ ‎9.大部分的猪_______________________ ‎ ‎10.去度假____________________‎ 二）、一般过去时态检测 Dear bill,‎ How was your vacation? Did you do _________ interesting? Did ________ in the family go with you? I went to a friend’s farm in the countryside with my family. _________was great. We fed some hens and saw some baby pigs. They were so cute! The only problem was that there was ______ much to do in the evening but read. Still ___________ seemed to be bored. Byefor now! Mark 三）、引导学生做如下练习 Grace ,where did you go last vacation ?‎ I went to the New York City.‎ Oh ,really. Did you go with anyone ?‎ Yes ,I went there with my mother.‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ Task1：小组成员看图画，猜测人物去过的地方及感受。‎ Task2：小组自学课文的生词并尝试听写部分生词。‎ Task3：小组长带领组员正确朗读课文，注意语音语调。‎ Task3：小组长带领组员翻译课文，并勾画短语。‎ Long time no see be on vacaton ‎ Go to …with my family ‎ ‎ Go somewhere interesting ‎ Huangguoshu waterfall ‎ Quite a few read and relax ‎ Do something special ‎ Most of the time ‎ Stay at home stay at home to V ‎ Last month last year ‎ Task4: 小组成员分角色朗读对话。并在全班表演对话。‎ Task5: 背诵对话。‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ 英语中的动词分类 要学好English，理解掌握动词的意义和作用非常重要。‎ 首先，动词有第三人称单数、原形、过去式、过去分词、现在分词、不定式等不同的形式变化，用法上各司其职。另外动词家族通常也划分成四个类别。‎ ‎ （1）行为动词。多表示动作、行为，有及物与不及物动词（vt与vi）之分，其作用特征是能够独立充当谓语。如：‎ ‎ We played happily. （vi）They are playing tennis.（vt）‎ ‎（2）连系动词。表 示事物的特征、状态变化的过程等。可组成一类句子，名叫“主+系+表”，可将其归为三类。‎ 187‎ ‎ ①表示状态的，如be（是），seem, stay, keep等。如：‎ ‎ We are in Grade 7.‎ ‎ ②表示对事物的分析过程，可译为“……起来”。像feel, look, sound（听起来），smell（闻起来），taste（尝起来）等。如：‎ ‎ The meat tastes good.‎ ‎ ③表示变化的，有“变得”之意。如：become, turn, grow, get, go, come等。如：Soon the man grew angry.‎ ‎（3）助动词。常用的有do, be, have/ has, will/ shall等词，它们无词义，要依靠主要动词，在句中起的作用是：‎ ‎ ①帮助构成疑问句。如：Does he live in a big city?‎ ‎ ②帮助构成否定关系。如：We do not go to school on Sunday.‎ ‎ ③表示时态关系。如： We are studying English.‎ ‎ ④表示语态关系。如：The e-mail was written by him.‎ ‎（4）情态动词。这类动词另有一定的词义，但也要依赖于主要的动词而存在，它们没有人称及数的变化，它们是can, may, must, need, ought to, dare, had better等。如： As a student, I must work hard.‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ 合成不定代词和不定副词的构成及其用法 1. 构成：由some, any, no, every分别加上-body, -thing, -one构成的不定代词叫做合成不定代词；加上-where构成副词。‎ 2. 用法：‎ ‎（1）合成不定代词在句中可以作主语，宾语或表语等。‎ Nobody will listen to him.‎ ‎ He wants something to eat.‎ ‎（2）不定代词作主语时，谓语动词要用单数。‎ There is nothing wrong with the TV.‎ Everybody likes to be free.‎ ‎（3）some-不定代词，通常用于肯定句中；any-不定代词则多用于否定句、疑问句和条件状语从句中。但some-可用于表请求、邀请、预料对方会作肯定回答时的疑问句中。‎ Someone called on her last week.‎ There isn’t anyone else there.‎ Is anybody over there?‎ Could you give me something to eat?‎ ‎（4）形容词修饰不定代词时，通常要放在不定代词之后。‎ There is something wrong with your eyes.‎ ‎（5）somewhere, anywhere, nowhere, everywhere用作副词。‎ Trees turn green and flowers come out everywhere.‎ 肯定句 somebody=someone 某人 something 某物 somewhere 某地 否定句 not any=no anybody= anyone anything anywhere 否定意义 ‎（没有）‎ nobody= no one nothing ‎/^/‎ nowhere 187‎ ‎ ‎ everybody=everyone 每人 everything 每样东西 everywhere 每个地方 （ 到处）‎ 巩固练习：用不定代词或不定副词填空：‎ ‎1. I can’t hear anything = I can hear _________.‎ ‎2. There is __________ on the floor. Please pick it up.‎ ‎3. Did _____ go to play basketball with you ?‎ ‎4. I phoned you last night, but ________ answered it.‎ ‎5. I don’t think ___________ telephoned.‎ ‎6. Why don’t you ask _________ to help you ?‎ ‎7. If you want __________ , please let me know.‎ ‎8. Shall we get _________ to drink ?‎ ‎9. Don’t worry. There’s ______ wrong with your ears.‎ ‎10. There’s __________ in the box. It’s empty.‎ ‎11. Maybe __________ put my pencil _________. I can’t find it ___________.‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ 用所给词的正确形式填空。‎ ‎ 1. Did you have fun __________（talk）with me?‎ ‎ 2. My mother usually goes __________（shop）on Saturday afternoon.‎ ‎ 3. She __________ __________ （not have）any time for the housework yesterday.‎ ‎ 4. All my __________（teacher）are friendly to us __________（student）.‎ ‎ 5. Look at the sky. Can you find the bird __________（fly）there?‎ ‎ 6. Listen! It __________ __________（rain）again.‎ ‎ 7. Is it time for us __________ __________（have）an exam?‎ Thursday July 28th ‎ Today I’ll go 1 our hometown. We 2 a great time here, in Hainan Province（省）. The 3 was a little hot. Every day I 4 to the beaches to play in the water. It made me 5 a bit cool. I also 6 Wanquan River（万泉河）. It was amazing.‎ ‎ Five days ago, I went to Sanya by 7 . Although it 8 crowded, my bus trip was full of joy. I 9 myself in the beautiful scenery（风光） 10 the bus. There were many visitor visiting “Tianya Haijiao”, I spent all day there.‎ ‎（ ）1. A. on B. back C. back to D. to ‎（ ）2. A. have B. had C. were D. spent ‎（ ）3. A. weather B. water C. sky D. food ‎（ ）4. A. go B. walk C. walks D. went ‎（ ）5. A. feel B. was C. have D. to fell ‎（ ）6. A. swam B. played C. visited D. looked ‎（ ）7. A. plane B. train C. bike D. bus ‎（ ）8. A. is B. was C. were D. had ‎（ ）9. A. lost B. spent C. enjoyed D. thought ‎（ ）10. A. in B. on C. outside D. with 187‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ Unit 1 Where did you go on vacation?‎ Section A 3a—3c ‎ ‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1、词汇：不定代词 ‎2、学习巩固复合不定代词的用法 ‎ ‎【学习重点、难点】 ‎ 复合不定代词的用法 ‎ ‎【学法指导】 ‎ ‎1、复习someanyevryno的用法 ‎2、学习复合不定代词的用法 ‎ ‎【教学过程】 ‎ 一、导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ 小组学习本页上的单词 ‎1、拼读单词；2、记忆单词含义；3、成员单词朗读过关抽查 something ['sʌmθɪŋ] 　 pron.某事物； ‎ nothing(=not…anything) ['nʌθɪŋ] pron.没有什么 n.没有 ‎ myself[maɪ'self] pron.我自己 everyone ['evriwʌn] pron.每人；人人 ‎ yourself [jɔː'self] pron.你自己；你亲自 hen [hen] n.母鸡；雌禽 　 ‎ bored [bɔːd] adj.无聊的；厌烦的；郁闷的 pig n.猪 ‎ diary ['daɪəri] n.日记；日记簿(keep a diary)‎ seem [siːm] vi.似乎；好像 ‎ someone ['sʌmwʌn] pron.某人；有人 quite a few相当多；不少（后接可数名词） ‎ of course [əv kɔːs] 当然　‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ 小组学习下列语法句子：‎ Where did you go on vacation? I went to New York City.‎ Did you go out with anyone? No, No one was here. Everyone was on vacation.‎ Did you buy anything special? Yes, I bought something for my father.‎ How was the food? Everything tasted really good.‎ Did everyone have a good time? Oh，yes. Everything was excellent.‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ Step 3a ‎ ‎1 .read the eords in the box,and know their meanings 187‎ ‎2.read the conversation and finish the task.‎ ‎3.check the answers.‎ ‎4.read the conversation aloud by the students.‎ ‎5.underline some phrases:‎ Something funinterestingboring How did you like it?‎ Of course . buy sth. for ‎ Something I like he likeswe do you eat Step 3b ‎1 .read the words in the box,and know their meanings ‎2.read the passage and finish the task.‎ ‎3.check the answers.‎ ‎4.read the passage aloud by the students.‎ ‎5.underline some phrases:‎ 家中某个人 ‎ 朋友的农场 在乡村 喂鸡 看见仔猪 ‎ 似乎 再见 有很多要做的事情 Step 3c ‎1 .read the words in the box,and know their meanings ‎2.make conversations in pairs.‎ ‎3.act out the conversations.‎ ‎4. underline some phrases:‎ ‎5.词语辨析：‎ ‎1)、anywhere 与 somewhere 两者都是不定副词。‎ anywhere 在任何地方 ， 常用于否定句和疑问句中。I can’t find it anywhere.‎ somewhere 在某处，到某处，常用于肯定句。 I lost my key somewhere near here.‎ ‎2). seem + 形容词 看起来….. You seem happy today.‎ seem + to do sth. 似乎、好像做某事 I seem to have a cold ‎ I seems / seemed + 从句 看起来好像…；似乎…. It seems that no one believe you. ‎ seem like ….好像，似乎….. It seems like a god idea. ‎ ‎3)、too many 太多，后接可数名词复数： Mother bought too many eggs yesterday.‎ too much 太多，修饰不可数名词，修饰动词作状语。 ‎ We have too much work to do. Don’t talk too much.‎ much too 太，修饰形容词或副词。 ‎ The hat is much too big for me. You’re walking much too fast.‎ 分辨三者的口诀： too much, much too, 用法区别看后头： much 后接不可数， too 后修饰形或副。‎ too many 要记住，后面名词必复数。‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ 复合不定代词用法大盘点 187‎ 复合不定代词是由some-，any-，no-，every-加上-one，-body，-thing等所组成的不定代词。复合不定代词包括 something, somebody, someone, anything, anybody, anyone, nothing, nobody, no one, everything, everybody, everyone 等十二个。这些复合代词具有名词性质，在句中可用作主语、宾语或表语，但不能用作定语。使用时注意以下几点：‎ 一、复合不定代词的指代对象 ‎1、含-body和-one的复合代词只用来指人，含-body的复合不定代词与含-one的复合不定代词在功能和意义上完全相同，可以互换。只是用-body时显得较通俗些，多用于口语中，用-one时显得较文雅些，更常见于正式场合及书面语中。如：‎ Someone/Somebody is crying in the next room.有人在隔壁房间哭。‎ No one/Nobody is stupid. 没有谁是愚蠢的。‎ ‎2、含-thing的复合不定代词只用来指事物。如：‎ Are you going to buy anything?你会去买东西吗？‎ I can hear nothing but your vioce. 我只听到了你的声音。‎ 二、复合不定代词的数 ‎1、复合不定代词都具有单数的含义，因此通常被看成是单数第三人称。当它们充当句子的主语时，其后的谓语动词用单数形式。如：‎ Is everyone here today? 今天，大家都到齐了吗？‎ Nothing is difficult if you put your heart into it. 世上无难事，只怕有心人。‎ ‎2、当要对一群人讲话时，可使用以复合不定代词作主语的祈使句，句中的动词用原形。如：‎ Nobody move！= Don’ anybody move！ 都别动！‎ Everyone lie down! 统统趴下！‎ 三、复合不定代词的定语 复合不定代词的定语必须后置，即放在复合不定代词的后面。如：‎ Can you tell something interesting? 你能讲些有趣的事情吗？‎ Is there anybody important here? 这儿有大人物吗？‎ Would you like something to eat? 要来些吃的东西吗？‎ 四、含some-和any-的复合不定代词间的用法区别 由some-和any-所构成的复合不定代词（即something和anything；someone和anyone；somebody和anybody）之间的区别跟some和any的区别一样。‎ ‎1、something，someone，somebody通常用于肯定句中，而anything，anyone，anybody一般用于否定句，疑问句或条件状语从句中。如： ‎ He found something strange but interesting.他发现了一些奇怪但却有趣的事情。‎ Do you have anything to say ？你有话要说吗？‎ I can’t meet anybody  on the island. 在岛上，我没遇见任何人。‎ ‎2、在表示请求、邀请、提建议等带有委婉语气的疑问句，和希望得到对方肯定答复的疑问句，以及表示反问的问句中，也用something，someone，somebody等复合不定代词。如:‎ Would you like something to eat？要些吃的东西吗？‎ Isn’t there something wrong with you? 难道你没问题吗？‎ 及时练：用anyone ,something, anything, everything, nothing, everyone , no one 填空。‎ ‎1. Linda: Did you do ____________ fun on your bacation, Alice?‎ Alice: Yes, I did. I went to Sanya.‎ Linda: How did you like it?‎ Alice: Well, it was my first time there, so __________ was really interesting.‎ 187‎ Linda: Did you go with ___________?‎ Alice: Yes, I did. I went with my sister.‎ Linda: Did you go shopping?‎ Alice: Of course! I bought _________ for my parents. But __________ for myself.‎ Linda: Why didn’t you buy __________for yourself.‎ Alice: I didn’t really see___________ I liked.‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ 用所给动词的正确形式填空。‎ Last August, our class_________(do) something very special on our school trip. We __________(go) to mount Tai. We_________(start) our trip at 12:00 at night. Everyone in our class_________(take) a bag with some food and water. After three hours, someone looked at the map and _________(find) out we __________(be ,not) anywhere near the top. My legs ________(be) so tired that I wanted to stop. My classmates_________(tell) me to keep going, so I _________(go) on. At 5:00 a.m., we got to the top! Everyone _________(jump) up and down in excitement. Twenty minutes later, the sun ________(start) to come up. It was so beautiful that we ________(forget) about the last five hours!‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ Unit 1 Where did you go on vacation?‎ Section B 1a—1e ‎ ‎【学习目标】‎ ‎1、学习掌握有关评价事物的形容词：delicious, expensine,inexpensive, crowded.‎ ‎2、能运用be+形容词来评价事物，如：The people were friendly.‎ ‎3、熟练地谈论表示过去发生的事件——学习一般过去时的用法. ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ ‎1、能运用be+形容词来评价事物，如：The people were friendly.‎ ‎2、熟练地谈论表示过去发生的事件——学习一般过去时的用法 ‎ ‎【学法指导】‎ ‎1、联系刚过去的暑假，通过对话表演方式大胆张口，敢于用英语进行交际。‎ ‎2、听力策略：A、回忆在练习对话中所用到的形容词。‎ B、必须在听力之前掌握一定量的形容词。 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 一、 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ ‎1、朗读2d课文，复习对话 ‎2、用方框中所给词填空。‎ ‎.relaxing, interesting, boring, fantastic, ‎ ‎ unfriendly, beautiful, awful, pretty ‎1.---How was the film?--- It was ________, I don’t like it.‎ ‎2.---How was your trip?‎ 187‎ ‎ --- It was _________ and I had a good time.‎ ‎3.       The story is ________, I like it very much.‎ ‎4.       The people on the island(岛) are _________ to us.‎ ‎5.       She wears a __________ coat.‎ ‎6.       The food in this restaurant is _____, I wouldn’t like to eat it.‎ ‎7.--- How were the beaches?‎ ‎ --- They were _________, I went there on vacation last month.‎ ‎8.--- How it it going?--- It ‘s ________ good.‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ StepA ‎1、利用头脑风暴，说出学过的描述性形容词。‎ ‎2、介绍描述性形容词的用法。‎ ‎3、把所学过的形容词进行罗列并板书在黑板上并分成两大类 ‎4、朗读1a中的形容词并造句。 ‎ ‎5、完成1b的任务，将1a中的形容词分类。‎ Step B listening ‎1、朗读1c、1d中的句子，明确其含义。‎ ‎2、听磁带，完成1c、1d的任务 ‎3、检查答案。‎ ‎4、听磁带跟读听力材料。‎ ‎5、学生自读听力材料。‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ 用疑问词填空 ‎1、A：　　　　　　      was the weather?‎ B：It was sunny.‎ ‎2、A： 　　　　     did you go on vacation?‎ B：I went to Beijing.‎ ‎3、A　　　　　　      did you do on vacation?‎ B：I played teenis on vacation.‎ ‎4、A：　　　　　　      did you go?‎ B：I went there on Monday.‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ What did these people think of their vacations? 这些人对他们的假期有什么看法？‎ 此句用于询问某人对某次活动，某事情或某物的看法。句型为“What…think of…?”‎ 可以与“How … do/does/did sb. like…?”互换。其中“think of”意为“认为”。本句可变为 How ________ these people __________ their vacation?‎ ‎ ‎ 引申练习 A 187‎ A: 36 B: I went to Hangzhou, China.‎ A: Oh, great. 37 B: It was great. I had a good time.‎ A: 38 ‎ B: It was very warm. You don’t need to take much heavy clothing.‎ A: 39 B: They were great, and not expensive.‎ A: Did you enjoy the food there?‎ B: Yes, They were great, delicious and cheap.‎ B A: What did you do on vacation? B: 40 ‎ A: Xi’an? What did you do there? B: 41 ‎ A: Great! Did you have fun? B: Yes, Very much. 42 ‎ A: I visited Xinjiang. B: 43 ‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ ‎ Form sentences.组句 (请注意大小写和标点符号)。‎ ‎1.did,where,you,go,on vacation ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎2.went,the mountains,I,to ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎3.New York City,they,went to ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎4.Vera,like,vacation,her,did ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎5.playing,we,great,had,fun,in the waves ‎ ‎ Last week，the teacher told us that there were many old things in the museum. So we decided to go and see them. Yesterday we went there on foot because the museum was not far from our school，and the weather was warm. The sun was shining. We walked down Zhong shan Road and turned left at the second crossing (十字路口). We found it on the left. It was between a bookshop and a library.‎ ‎ Many people were there， but most of them were students. When the guide explained (讲解)， we listened carefully. There we learned a lot.‎ 根据短文内容，判断句子正(T)误(F)‎ ‎( )1. The teacher told them about the museum yesterday.‎ ‎( )2. It was a sunny day when they went to visit the museum.‎ ‎( )3. They went to the museum on foot.‎ ‎( )4. The museum was far from their school.‎ ‎( )5. Most of the visitors were students.‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ 187‎ Unit 1 Where did you go on vacation?‎ Section B 2a—2e ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1、掌握本课的生词、短语、句型 ‎2、理解本课的主旨大意 ‎3、对本课的内容进行归纳、对话改写、及仿写。 ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ ‎1、学会用过去式写旅游日记。‎ ‎2、掌握本课的生词、短语、句型 ‎3、对本课的内容进行归纳、对话改写、及仿写。 ‎ ‎【学法指导】 ‎ 1、 仔细阅读课文---理解课文大意----重点句子理解----完成相关任务。 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 一、导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ A依照例句写句子 ‎ 例句:He went to the Central Park. ‎ 1) He didn’t go to the Central Park. ‎ 2) Did he go to the Central Park? Yes，he did. /No，he didn’t. ‎ ‎1、I went somewhere interesting. ‎ 否定：______________________________________‎ 一般疑问句并回答_________________________________________________‎ ‎____________________________‎ ‎2、She bought something for her father. ‎ 否定：______________________________________‎ 一般疑问句并回答_________________________________________________‎ ‎____________________________‎ ‎3、We fed some hens and saw some baby pigs. ‎ 否定：______________________________________‎ 一般疑问句并回答_________________________________________________‎ ‎____________________________‎ ‎4、He took a bag with food and water. ‎ 否定：______________________________________‎ 一般疑问句并回答_________________________________________________‎ ‎____________________________‎ ‎5、They forgot about the last five hours. ‎ 否定：______________________________________‎ 一般疑问句并回答_________________________________________________‎ ‎____________________________‎ B discussing What do people usually do on vacation?‎ 187‎ What activities do you find enjoyable?‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ Task1：听2b磁带，体会语音、语调、句群停顿，理解段落的汉语意义。‎ Task2：小组合作，较好的事物画圈，不好的事物画下划线。‎ Task3：小组讨论核对答案。‎ Task4：仔细阅读课文，小组讨论并回答下列问题。‎ ‎1.How was the weather on July 15th / July16th ?‎ ‎2.Where did she go on July 15th / July16th /?‎ ‎3.What did she do on the 2 days?‎ ‎4.How were her 2 days on the vacation?‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ ‎1、仔细阅读2b课文，注意模仿语音、语调、句群停顿 ‎2、仔细阅读2b课文，勾画记忆课文短语 1. fFeel likefeel like doing ‎ 2. Chinese train from 1ooyears ago 3. in the past 4. wait for 5. because of ‎5. arrive in + 大地方 / arrive at + 小地方 到达某地 ‎6. decide to do sth. 决定做某事 ‎7. try doing sth. 尝试做某事 / try to do sth. 尽力做某事 ‎8. enjoy doing sth. 喜欢做某事 ‎9. want to do sth. 想去做某事 ‎10. start doing sth. 开始做某事 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ 仔细阅读课文，完成2c ‎1、仔细阅读2b课文，注意模仿语音、语调、句群停顿 ‎2、在原文中找出2c的句子 ‎3、根据要求完成2c ‎4、检查答案 ‎5、拓展 ‎1）Decide 在此处为实意动词，意为“决定”，常构成短语decide to do sth. 相当于decide on doing sth.和make a decision to do sth.:决定做某事.它的否定为：decide not to do sth.‎ ‎ 2）start doing sth = start to do sth. 开始，可与begin 互换 。He started doing his homework. ‎ 但以下几种情况不能用begin .‎ 创办，开办： He started a new bllkshop last month.‎ 机器开动： I can’t start my car.‎ 出发，动身： I will start tomorrow morning.‎ ‎3）because of 介词短语，因为，由于，后接名词、代词或动名词，不能接句子。‎ He can’t take a walk because of the rain.‎ because 连词，因为，引导状语从句，表示直接明确的原因或理由。‎ I don’t buy the shirt because it was too expensive.‎ ‎6、练习 187‎ ‎（ ）1. There _____ a football match on TV yesterday evening.‎ A. have B. had C. is D. was ‎ ‎（ ）2. --Where did you _____ on your vacation?‎ ‎ --We _____ to New York City.‎ A. go, went B. went, go C. goes, went D. go, go ‎（ ）3. He ____ someone playing Kongfu on the square yesterday afternoon.‎ A. see B. saw C. sees D. to see ‎（ ）4. How about ____ some dumplings?‎ A. make B. making C. made D. to make ‎ ‎（ ）5. He _______ to New York two hours ago.‎ A. flied B. flies C. flew D. flying ‎（ ）6. --Where did you go ______ vacation last year?‎ ‎ --I went to the zoo to see animals. They are cute.‎ A. at B. for C. on D. with ‎ ‎（ ）7. She had much fun ______ on the playground.‎ A. plays B. played C. play D. playing ‎ ‎（ ）8. Jim decided ______ to the Mount Wutai last month.‎ A. go B. to go C. going D. went ‎ ‎（ ）9. ---_____ was your vacation?--- It ______ fantastic.‎ A. How, was B. What, were C. What, was D. How, were 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ 仔细阅读课文2b，完成2d2e ‎1、仔细阅读2b课文，注意模仿语音、语调、句群停顿 ‎2、对原文仔细认真理解 ‎3、根据要求完成2 d ‎4、检查2 d答案 ‎5、大声朗读2d，尽量做到快速、流利，语音、语调、句群停顿正确。‎ ‎6、对原文仔细认真理解后进行简写2e。‎ ‎7、检查2e答案 ‎ ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ Unit 1 Where did you go on vacation?‎ Section B 3a—selfcheck ‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1、正确使用描述性形容词描述过去的旅游经历。‎ ‎2、正确运用一般过去时态的特殊疑问句:where how who what ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ ‎1、正确使用描述性形容词描述过去的旅游经历。‎ ‎2、正确运用一般过去时态的特殊疑问句:where how who what ‎ 187‎ ‎【学法指导】 ‎ 阅读课文---理解课文-----讨论课文----仿写课文----表达经历过的事情 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 一、导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ I、连线并朗读句子。 ‎ ‎ 1. She went A. stayed at school.‎ ‎ 2. They didn’t B. any money for bus.‎ ‎ 3. We cleaned C. to summer camp.‎ ‎ 4. The students D. go to New York City.‎ ‎ 5. Bill didn’t have E. the streets.‎ ‎ 6. He was F. very tired.‎ II、用所给词的适当形式填空。‎ A: Where did you ________ (go) on vacation.‎ B: I ________ (go) to New York City.‎ A: Oh, really? ________ you go to Central Park?‎ B: Yes, _________ _________ . It _________ (be) really nice.‎ A: What about _________(your), Kevin?‎ C: I went to the beach.‎ A: Oh, that _______ (be) nice. _______(do) you play volleyball?‎ C: No, ________(me) didn’t.‎ A: Well, did you ________ (swim) ?‎ B: Yes, I ________(do). The water ________ (be) really warm III、用括号内词的适当形式填空：‎ ‎1. She _________(not visit) her aunt last weekend. She ________ (stay) at home and _________(do) some cleaning. 2. When _____ you _________(write) this song? I ______(write) it last year. 3. Carol___________(study) for the math test and __________(practice) English last night. 4. :________ Mr. Li __________(do) the project on Monday morning?‎ ‎ :Yes, he _________. 5. :How _________(be) Jim's weekend? :It _________(be not) bad.‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ ‎1、写成下列动词的过去式（个别动词可以查工具书）：‎ ‎1、play __________2.ask___________ 3. like ___________ ‎ ‎4、jump__________ 5.help________ 6.study __________ ‎ ‎7. am/is __________ 8.are ________9. do ___________ ‎ ‎10、have _________ 11. put _______12.cut ___________ ‎ ‎13. read _______14 get ___________ 15. sit ____________ ‎ ‎16. eat __________17. buy __________ 18. go ___________ ‎ ‎19. let __________20.run ___________ 21. see ___________ ‎ ‎22. say ___________ 23.begin ________ ‎ ‎24、come _________ 25.forget _________ ‎ ‎2、自学3a 仔细观察三幅图画，用描述性形容词说出图画给你的感受；‎ 187‎ 朗读左下框的描述性形容词，并明确其含义；‎ 朗读文段并选词填空；‎ 检查答案；‎ 再次大声朗读文段。‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ 小组学习3b：‎ 联系自己的暑假旅游实际，成员互相对8个问题进行提问与回答；‎ 完整写出自己的回答，注意时态正确；‎ 加上连接词使这8个句子成为一段文章 加上标题。工整抄写在3c处。‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ Where did you go on vacation? I went to New York City.‎ Did you go out with anyone? No, No one was here. Everyone was on vacation.‎ Did you buy anything special? Yes, I bought something for my father.‎ How was the food? Everything tasted really good.‎ Did everyone have a good time? Oh，yes. Everything was excellent.‎ 基本句式 ‎ ‎1.她为她最好的朋友买了些东西吗? ‎ ‎ _________she ________ __________ for her _________ _________?‎ ‎2.我妈妈和我决定去坐火车。 ‎ ‎ My mother and I _________ _________ _________ _________ _________ ‎ ‎3.上周一，天气又热又潮。 ‎ ‎ The weather _________ _________ _________ _________ last Monday .‎ ‎4.这个城市从山顶上看很棒。 ‎ ‎ The city _________ _________ from _________ _________ _________ _________ _________.‎ ‎5.一小时后，我们停下来喝了些茶。 ‎ ‎ One _________ _________ , we _________ and _________ some tea.‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ I组句。（注意大小写和标点符号）‎ ‎1.       your, vacation, how, was ‎_________________________________________________?‎ ‎2.       with, family, my, I, to, went, Tokyo ‎__________________________________________________.‎ ‎3.       you, what, did, there, do ‎___________________________________________________?‎ ‎4.       went, to, we, a lot of, museums ‎_____________________________________________________.‎ ‎5.       the people, friendly, were, really ‎______________________________________________________.‎ ‎6.       love, she, food, Japanese ‎______________________________________________________.‎ 187‎ II、用所给词的正确形式填空：‎ It was sunny and hot all day on Monday. We went to a beautiful beach. We _________(have) great fun _________ (play) in the water. In the afternoon, we went __________(shop), but the shops __________(be) crowded，so we didn’t enjoy it. On Tuesday, we went to a museum. I found a boy __________(cry) in the corner. He was lost and I helped him _________(find) his father. This _________(make ) me__________(feel) happy. I didn’t have money for a taxi, so I walked back to the hotel. On Wednesday, the weather ____________(be) cool, so we decided __________(play) tennis. It was really fun. ‎ ‎ III、完成selfcheck ‎  ‎ ‎【总结反思】‎ ‎ ‎ 班级 ‎ 姓名 ‎ ‎【课题】 Unit2 How often do you exercise? Section A 1a-1c （1）（1课时）‎ 泸 县 五 中 自 主 探 究 学 案 内容：unit1 How often do you exercise? 课时： 1课时 英语 组 编写人： 审核人： 审批人； ‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1.识记周末活动的词汇和6个频度副词（always, usually, often , sometimes , hardly ever ,never）。‎ ‎2.运用周末活动的词汇、频度副词及一般现在时简单谈论周末活动情况。‎ ‎【重点，难点】 ‎ ‎1.对6个频度副词细微差异的理解及使用。 ‎ ‎2.弄清一般现在时在不同人称下动词形式及提问的变化。‎ ‎【导学指导】 ‎ 知识链接：‎ 问：什么情况下使用一般现在时？‎ 答：简单讲，当动作经常、反复发生，表达习惯、爱好、客观规律和现在的状态 时需使用一般现在时。‎ 问：一般现在时的基本结构是什么？‎ ‎ 动词原形（当主语不是第三人称单数）‎ 答：主语+‎ ‎ 动词的第三人称单数形式（当主语是第三人称单数时）‎ 问：什么是动词的第三人称单数？什么又是主语的第三人称单数？‎ 答：变一个动词为其第三人称单数和变一个名词为其复数形式的规则大致一致，具体情况如下表：‎ ‎1.直接加“s”。‎ ‎2.以辅音字母加“y”结尾的动词，去“y”变“i”加“es”。‎ ‎3.以“s、x、sh、ch”结尾的加“es”。‎ ‎4.特殊记。‎ love—loves take—takes study—studies fly—flies try—tries fix—fixes teach—teaches wash—washes go—goes；do—does；have—has 而主语的第三人称单数形式是指除了“you(你)、I（我）”以外的所有单个的人或物或者不可数的事物。‎ 自主互助学习 一、自学：‎ ‎1.仔细观察课本第一页图片，根据所给例子填写下列空格。‎ 187‎ 例:Picture a(图a): shop ‎ What is the girl in Picture a doing?‎ 187‎ She is shopping. ‎ Picture b:_______ a book What is the girl in Picture b doing?‎ ‎ ______________________________‎ Picture c:________ ‎ ‎________________________________?‎ ‎________________________________.‎ Picture d:________ ______‎ ‎________________________________?‎ ‎________________________________.‎ Picture e:________ _______‎ ‎_______________________________?‎ ‎________________________________.‎ 187‎ ‎2.根据汉语提示，完成下列其他weekend activity (周末活动)短语 。‎ 去购物_______________; 去钓鱼_______________; 去徒步旅行_______________;去看电影______________;去踩滑板_______________;去滑冰________________;去游泳__________________; 打篮球__________________; 弹钢琴______________;看望外祖父母__________________；为考试学习______________; 帮父母做家务__________。‎ 二、展示交流 ‎1.小组内交流自主互助学习成果。‎ ‎2.老师以男女或大组等形式通过问答形式交流自学1;通过提问式与学生交流自学2。（自主互助学习当中的1和2）‎ 三、合作探究 ‎1.将下列频度副词与其对应的汉语意思及星级数匹配在一起。‎ ‎ hardly ever 经常 ★★★★★‎ ‎ usually 通常 ★★★★‎ ‎ sometimes 总是 ★★★ ‎ ‎ never 有时候 ★★‎ ‎ always 从不，决不 ★‎ ‎ often 几乎不 ☆（no star）‎ ‎2.小组交流学习成果并讨论下列按频率高低顺序排列的表达是否正确(正确写Ｔ，错误写Ｆ)？若不正确，给出正确表达。‎ always＞often＞usually＞sometimes＞hardly ever＞never．＿＿＿＿‎ ‎______＞＿＿＿＿＿＿＞＿＿＿＿＿＞＿＿＿＿＿＿＞＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＞＿＿＿＿．‎ ‎３．师生交流学习、讨论结果。‎ ‎4．熟读、识记频度副词。老师可指定6位同学代表6个不同的词，并要求他们在黑板前站成一排，要求学生“点名”，后打乱顺序要求学生快速“点名”。也可给6位学生6个词的卡片，要求下边学生猜词。‎ ‎5．学生弄清1b题意后，老师播放录音。（在学生读题过程中，老师务必要根据实际情况提供帮助。）‎ ‎【课堂练习】‎ 一、英汉互译。‎ 看书________________; 锻炼身体__________________; 去踩滑板________________;总是_______________; 通常____________________; 经常______________________; on weekends_________; how often_______________; hardly ever _________;sometimes___________; never____________________; go to the movies_______________;‎ 二、根据Model Conversation, 与搭挡make conversation(制作对话)。‎ Model Conversation: ‎ They go shopping ‎★★★★★‎ Liu Xiang ‎ exercise ‎★★★★‎ Mr. Zhang visit his parents ‎★★★‎ his son study for a test ‎★★‎ Lin Dan play basketball ‎★‎ Tiger Woods study for a test ‎☆‎ A:What do they do on weekends?‎ B:They always go shopping.‎ ‎【要点归纳】‎ 187‎ ‎1．一般现在时的使用。‎ ‎2．Weekend activity 短语和频度副词。‎ ‎【拓展练习】‎ ‎1. I often ___________(exercise) ,but my sister never ____________(exercise).(用正确形式填空)‎ ‎2. I exercise three times a day.(变为否定句) I __________ _________ three times a day ‎3. She exercises twice a week.(变为一般疑问句)__________ _________exercise twice a week?‎ ‎4. I play the trumpet on weekends.(用he改写句子)‎ He ________ ________ _________ on weekends?‎ ‎【总结反思】‎ ‎【课题】 Unit2 How often do you exercise Section A 2a-2c? （2）（1课时）‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1.识记更多活动的词汇和具体频度副词短语，如：once a week（一个星期一次）。‎ ‎2.运用更多活动的词汇、6个频度副词、不同的具体频度副词短语及一般现在时谈论生活学习中从事什么（what）活动及其频率（how often）。‎ ‎【重点，难点】 ‎ ‎1.据自身情况灵活使用两种不同类型的副词。 ‎ ‎2.据课文中所给具体频度副词短语创造新的具体频度副词短语。‎ ‎3.弄清一般现在时在不同人称下动词形式及提问的变化。‎ ‎【导学指导】 ‎ 温故知新：‎ ‎1.口译上节课所学的相关周末活动词汇及两种频度副词（可请一位学生提问其对应汉语，其他同学回答）。‎ ‎2.朗读上一篇导学案中的词汇练习中的词汇。‎ 知识链接：‎ 一、将一个句子变为否定句的三个步骤：1、在要求变为否定句的句子中寻找be动词am、is、are、was、were，若有其中某个的话，在其后边加not即可（也可将其两个词缩写：is not=isn’t；are not=aren’t；was not=wasn’t； were not=weren’t）。2、若在要求变为否定句的句子中找不到am、is、are、was、were，就在其中寻找情态动词can、may、must、should、will、would、could、shall等，若有其中某个的话，就在其后加not即可（也可根据需要将其缩写：can not=can’t,must not=mustn’t, will not=won’t）。3、若在要求变为否定句的句子也找不到情态动词，就借助助动词do、does、did，第三人称单数借助does，不是第三人称单数借助do，一般过去时借助did，并在其后加not（分别可缩写成don’t、doesn’t、didn’t）后边的动词打回原形。‎ 例1：He is a teacher.(变否定句)He is not a teacher. 或He isn’t a teacher.‎ 例2：They can dance.（变否定句）They can not dance.或They can’t dance.‎ 例3：Jim likes pets. (变否定句)Jim does not like pets.或Jim doesn’t like pets.注意：例3中likes→like，即动词由第三人称单数形式打回为动词原形。‎ 二、将一个句子变为一般疑问句也有三个步骤，且类似变否定句的规则。即：将找到的be动词或情态动词提到句首，末尾加问号，若没有be动词或情态动词，同样的方法借助do、does、did，并将其提到句首，动词打回原形，末尾加问号。注意：遇到some变any，并根据语境更改相应的人称和物主代词。请将例1、例2、例3变为一般疑问句：‎ 例1_______________________.例2__________________________.例3______________________.‎ 187‎ 三、特殊疑问句的变法：通常对划线部分提问的过程就是变这个句子为特殊疑问句的过程。基本结构：特殊疑问词 + 一般疑问句 原则上划什么就用什么特殊疑问词。例如：划时间就用when，划原因就用why，划方式就用how，划频率就用how often。‎ 例4：She exercises twice a week.(对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ How often does she exercise? ‎ ‎ 特殊疑问词 一般疑问句 练习：Jim likes pets.(对划线部分提问)_______ ________ Jim like?‎ 自主学习：‎ 浏览2a、2c图表，翻译下列词语。‎ ‎1.具体频度副词短语：一个星期一次______________ ; 一个月两次___________ ;每天________;一个月三次____________________; 一个星期五次____________;‎ ‎2.相关活动的词语：锻炼身体__________; 去看电影____________; 买东西__________________;‎ 上网，网上冲浪____________________; 看电视____________; 看英语书____________________;最喜爱的节目____________________; 动物世界_________________。‎ 听力。‎ ‎1.浏览2a、2b题目，弄清题意。（老师核对前可前后桌讨论学习结果）‎ ‎2.听录音，按要求完成2a、2b。‎ ‎3.前后桌核对答案；老师核对答案并根据需要重复录音。‎ 三、对话练习。‎ ‎1.浏览2c题目要求，弄清题意。（前后桌讨论所学题意；老师核对）‎ ‎2.据自己情况使用频度副词填写表格。‎ ‎3.朗读右边Model Conversation（对话范例）‎ ‎4.Pair Work（两人据所填信息制作对话）。‎ ‎5.Pair Work Show(展示对话)。‎ ‎【课堂练习】‎ 一、口译“自主学习一”所列词汇。‎ 二、用所给词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1.Do you know Zhang Yining？Her ______（one）name is Yining and she surfs the Internet ______(one) a week.‎ ‎2.If we read English books ______(two) a week, we can learn English well.‎ ‎3-How often _______(do) your sister exercise?‎ ‎-Every day.‎ ‎-What about your brother?‎ ‎-He ________(exercise) four times a week.‎ ‎4. –Can you understand me?‎ ‎-Sorry, I ____ (hard)hear you clearly(清楚地).‎ ‎【要点归纳】‎ ‎ 能使用what、how、频度副词和相关活动词汇谈论自己所从事不同活动的种类和频率。‎ ‎【拓展练习】 ‎ ‎1.He watches TV twice a week .(画线提问)_____ _____ _____ he watch TV? ‎ ‎2. Jack does his homework every day .(改为否定句)‎ Jack _____ _____ his homework every day .‎ ‎3.He is talking to his father .(用usually改写句子)He _______ _____ to his father. ‎ 187‎ ‎4. My father often reads newspaper after supper .(画线提问)‎ ‎_____ _____ _____ father often ______ after supper? ‎ ‎【总结反思】‎ ‎【课题】 Unit2 How often do you exercise?Section A 3a-4 （3）（1课时）‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1.识记并准确运用all、most、some和no四个词。‎ ‎2.学会利用图表快速获取信息，提升阅读和说的能力。‎ ‎3.识记并学会使用承上启下的词语和句子以提升写作的水平。‎ ‎【重点，难点】 ‎ 灵活使用、创造承上启下的句子以提升写作水平。 ‎ ‎【导学指导】 ‎ 温故知新：‎ ‎1.共同罗列两种频度副词。‎ ‎2.大声朗读Grammar Focus的句子。‎ 知识链接：‎ ‎1.某些表示方向、地点的副词或介词短语in 、out 、up 、down 、there 、here、 in front of等位于句首且主语是名词时句子需要完全倒装，若主语是代词，句子部分倒装 如：Here comes the bus.（名词） (完全倒装). 正常句序：The bus comes here.‎ There he（代词）comes. (部分倒装) 正常句序： He comes here. ‎ ‎2.练习：Here _____(be) the result. Here _____ (be) the results.‎ ‎3.思考：倒装句中谓语动词的数的变化要注意什么？‎ 自主学习：‎ ‎1.浏览课本第3页中3右边绿色小图表，并利用当中对all, most, some和no的界定和左边图表所给信息填写下边文章中的横线。（老师利用横线1所给词解释如何利用两个表格信息填写完横线1。）‎ ‎2.前后桌讨论自学结果。‎ ‎3.老师核对答案并针对学生提出的疑问给予帮助。‎ ‎4.只看图表信息用英语依次描述不同活动的情况。如：第2列第2格中的“15%”根据图表描述成：Some students exercise every day. 其它格依此类推。（老师根据情况做必要说明）‎ ‎5.全班一起只看图表信息用英语描述这个调查结果。‎ ‎6.阅读图表下边文章并划出上述描述中没有说过的短语或句子。‎ ‎7.同老师核对答案。‎ ‎8.回答文章中多用了这些句子或短语的好处是什么。‎ ‎9.翻译并朗读下列词组：‎ 这里是……的结果________________; 一个星期三到四次_____________________;是非常积极的______________________;说到，至于___________________;对于……的结果 ____________________。‎ ‎【课堂练习】‎ 使用自主学习中9所罗列的短语及下列表格中的信息描述下边的调查结果。‎ Panjiang High school: Activity survey 187‎ Activity Once or Twice a Week Four or Five Times a Week.‎ Every Day Surf the Internet ‎95％‎ ‎5％‎ ‎0％‎ Play badminton (打羽毛球)‎ ‎20％‎ ‎75％‎ ‎5％‎ Eat vegetables ‎40％‎ ‎60％‎ ‎0％‎ ‎【要点归纳】‎ All, most, some 和no的使用；使用哪些词可以让一篇文章中不同的信息连贯自然且条理清楚；倒装中谓语动词的数的变化需注意什么及相关act不同词的使用。‎ ‎【拓展练习】 ‎ 一、根据句意和首字母提示完成下列句子。‎ ‎1. Sandy doesn't like badminton, so she s______ plays badminton.‎ ‎2. You should not a______ eat noodles for supper. You should try other food.‎ ‎3. Eddie is very lazy and he never e______‎ ‎4. 51％-99％ means m_______; 1％-50％ means s______; 0％ means n_____; 100％ means a______ ‎ ‎5 . ____ (many) of the students in the class are boys, only a few are girls.‎ ‎6.We must be ________(activity) in the sports meeting.‎ ‎7. They go shopping_____ (two) a week.‎ ‎8. I like the p___________ on CCTV-5‎ ‎9. We should do eye e________ every day 二、用所给词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1. If (如果)you are an _______(act) person and take part in（参加）lots of school _________(act), you can learn_______(act)lessons and be an _________(act) or _______(act) when you are older.‎ ‎2. In front of the door ________(stand) a child.‎ ‎3.He brushes his teeth ______ (two) a day.‎ ‎4.This movie is very ______（interest）‎ 三、选择填空。‎ ‎1.—How often do you exercise? —______.‎ A. Sometimes B. Three hours C. At three o'clock D. In two hours ‎2. Tom likes to play______ football but Jim likes to play______ piano.‎ A. a, a B. the, he C. the,/ D./,the ‎3.—______ does your mother go for a walk？ —Every afternoon.‎ A、How long B、How often C、How much D、How many ‎4.— Would you like some bread? —______, I'm full.（饱了）‎ A. No, thanks. B. Yes, please. C. No, I don't like it. D. Yes, I would.‎ ‎【总结反思】‎ ‎【课题】 Unit2 How often do you exercise? Section B 1a-2c（4）（1课时）‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1.识记并准确运用课文中相关饮食的词。‎ ‎2.学会询问和回答别人饮食、锻炼的频率、休息的时间及选择不同频率的理由。‎ ‎3.提升自己的听力能力。‎ ‎【重点，难点】 ‎ 187‎ 重点：识记相关饮食的词汇；谈论饮食、锻炼的频率、休息时间。 ‎ 难点：提升自己听力的策略；选择不同频率的理由。‎ ‎【导学指导】 ‎ 温故知新：‎ ‎1.共同罗列两种频度副词及准确理解 all, most, some, no。‎ ‎2.再次做课时3中所设置的课堂练习。‎ 知识链接：‎ ‎1. Eating too much is unhealthy, I mean eating too much isn’t healthy. Therefore, we should eat healthily to help us keep in good health. 熟读、背诵此句并思考完成下边的题。‎ ‎2.将下列单词和相应的词性及词义匹配起来。 ‎ 单词 词义 词性 health 不健康的 名词 healthy 健康 形容词 unhealthy 健康的 副词 unhealthily 健康地 形容词 healthily 不健康地 副词 ‎3.用所给词的正确形式填空。‎ Look at that boy! He is still very ___________(health) although he never eats junk food.‎ Smoking is harmful(有害的) to your __________(health).‎ 自主学习：‎ 自学（1a-1b）。‎ ‎1.前后桌用英语谈论彼此锻炼的频率并比较谁是the healthiest（最健康的）。 ‎ ‎2.前后桌讨论结果。同时思考除了锻炼，还有什么对身体的健康有好处.。‎ ‎3.浏览Page 4 1a的图片和单词，并将其字母与图片匹配起来。‎ ‎4.前后桌讨论学习结果并大声朗读这些词汇。然后用drink、/ 、eat填空。‎ ‎ _________ junk food; __________milk; _________fruit; _________vegetables; ______ sleep; ___________coffee.‎ ‎6.浏览Page 4上1b的对话，填写下边的短语：‎ 喝牛奶__________;每天_________;想要某人做某事____________;对……有好处______________。‎ ‎7.小组依据所给对话使用1a中其它词汇制作对话。‎ For example：-How many hours do you sleep?‎ ‎ -I sleep 6 hours every day.‎ ‎ -Why do you sleep only 6 hours?‎ ‎ -Because my parents and teachers want me to study more hours to get good grades(取得好成绩).‎ ‎8.举手争取赢得机会展示自己小组的对话。‎ 二、听力（2a-2b）‎ ‎1.自学2a、2b题目并小组讨论学习结果。‎ ‎2.依据题目要求，小组讨论应如何才能高效率地获取听力信息并完成题目要求。‎ ‎3.认真听取其它小组和老师好的意见并按要求快速准备听力。‎ ‎4.听录音。‎ ‎5.小组讨论答案并根据需要请求老师再放听力及给出解答。‎ 三、Role Play（表演）‎ 187‎ ‎1.思考采访者和被采访者在采访中应该注意的事项。‎ ‎2.认真练习并争取机会表演。‎ ‎【课堂练习】‎ 一、根据首字母提示，补全单词。‎ ‎1. Vegetable is good for your h________.‎ ‎2. Fruits can help you keep h________.‎ ‎3. May never does sports. She is kind of u________‎ ‎4. If you want to be h______, you should eat fruits and vegetables.‎ 二、选择填空。‎ ‎1. Eating a lot of vegetables and fruits is good _______ our health.‎ A. at B. for C. of D.with.‎ ‎2. She always eats junk food and never exercises , so she is very __________.‎ A. health B. healthy C. unhealthy D. healthily ‎【要点归纳】‎ ‎ 口译以上所列重要短语；注意他们的使用规则及在听听力时该用的策略。‎ ‎【拓展练习】 ‎ 一、用所给词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1. You must eat more vegetables and keep ______（health）.‎ ‎2. My mom wants me______（drink）milk every day.‎ ‎3. Daniel usually______ (have)meat and vegetables for dinner.‎ ‎4.How long______ he ______（read）English every night?‎ 二、句型转换 ‎1 I sleep 8 hours every night. (画线提问) ‎ ‎ _____ _____ _____ do you sleep every night? ‎ ‎2 He watches TV twice a week .(画线提问)‎ ‎ _____ _____ _____ he watch TV? ‎ ‎3 Jack does his homework every day .(改为否定句) ‎ Jack _____ _____ his homework every day .‎ ‎【总结反思】‎ ‎【课题】 Unit2 How often do you exercise? Section B 3-4（5）（1课时）‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1.识记并准确运用与健康的生活方式相关的词汇。‎ ‎2.读懂Katrina的信并学习她表述自己健康生活方式的技巧。‎ ‎3.运用与健康生活方式相关的词汇及Katrina表述自己健康生活方式的技巧来写关于自己生活习惯的英语文章。‎ ‎【重点，难点】 ‎ 重点：识记相关健康生活方式的词汇及理解掌握same、different的使用。 ‎ 难点：发现并灵活运用Katrina的写作技巧。‎ ‎【导学指导】 ‎ 温故知新：‎ ‎1.回忆上课时SectionB2a中的听力内容并说出为什么Katrina拥有健康的生活方式。‎ ‎2.思考怎样做才能保持健康。‎ 187‎ 知识链接：‎ He has the same haircut(发型) and clothes as his brother’s, so they look the same .But there are still many differences between them.. For example, His hobby is different from hers 熟读并背诵此句。思考“same”与“different”两个词的使用。‎ 自主学习：‎ 自学（3a）。‎ ‎1.浏览Page5上3a部分，完成下列词组练习。‎ 相当健康______________;每天 ____________;饮食习惯 _______________;试图做某事_________;吃大量的蔬菜_____________________; 喝牛奶___________;喝咖啡__________;当然__________;垃圾食品___________;一个星期两到三次_______________________;照顾、重视_______________;健康的生活方式___________________;帮助某人做某事______________; 取得好成绩___________;学得更好________________；与… …一样 _______________;与… …不同_____________________;一些不同点，不同的地方________________。‎ ‎2.师生讨论结果并朗读它们。‎ ‎3.带着5个问题认真阅读文章并找到问题的答案。‎ I’m pretty healthy ‎1..‎ So you see, I look after my healt And my healthy lifestyle helps me get good grades.新$课$标$第$一$网 Good food and exercise help me to study better.‎ ‎（身体健康的好处）‎ ‎2.My eating habits are pretty good ‎3.‎ ‎4.师生讨论答案 ‎ ‎5.思考Katrina是如何阐述她是相当健康这一事实的并完成上一页所列图表。‎ ‎6.师生讨论图表内容 二、.依据图表提示复述3a中的文章。‎ ‎【课堂练习】‎ 一、完成Page5中3b。注意although的使用：和其他关联词一样，英语中用了虽然，就不用但是，用了因为，就不用所以。‎ 二、你健康吗? 效仿3a写一段话介绍你自己的习惯。请首先在下列图表中按提示写出提纲。可根据实际情况增减。‎ 主题句 论据1‎ 意义 论据2‎ 187‎ 论据3‎ 论据4‎ ‎【要点归纳】‎ ‎ 口译相关身体健康的课文中的所有词汇；回顾“same”与“different”的使用；写作的技巧。‎ ‎【拓展练习】 ‎ 一、根据首字母提示及句意填写单词。‎ ‎1 My e_______ habits are pretty good.‎ ‎2 There are many d_________ between the twins.‎ ‎3 What’s the r______ of the soccer match?‎ ‎4 Jack t_____ to get good grades in the exams.‎ ‎5 She is happy a_______ she is very poor 二、用所给词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1 She often helps me____ (do) some housework.‎ ‎2 The boy is trying _______(run) very fast.‎ ‎3 There are many ________ (difference) kinds of books in the shop.‎ ‎4 We should eat a lot of vegetables ______(keep) healthy.‎ ‎5.His ________(eat) habit is different from ________(you).‎ 三、选择填空。‎ ‎1.Look at that girl！Her skirt is the same _____mine, but Her shoes are different _____mine.‎ A. at ;for B. from; as. C. in; to D. as; from ‎2.I think she is kind of _______, because she _________ exercises and eats too much junk food.‎ A. healthy; hard B. unhealth; hardly C. healthily; hard D. unhealthy; hardly ‎3.______ I have a healthy habit, ______ I’m not very healthy.‎ A. Although; but B. But; although C. Although; / D. /; /.‎ ‎【总结反思】‎ ‎【课题】Unit3 I’m more outgoing than my sister. Section A 1a-1c（1）（1课时）‎ 内容：Unit3 I’m more outgoing than my sister.课时： 1课时 英语 组 编写人： 审核人： 审批人； ‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1.学会形容词和副词比较级的规则变法。‎ ‎2.识记描述人外貌的词组。‎ ‎3.学会使用比较级来做比较。‎ ‎【重点，难点】 ‎ ‎ 识记形容词和副词比较级变法的多条规则；使用比较级来描述人的外貌。‎ ‎【导学指导】‎ 温故知新 ‎ 写出下列词的反义词并大声朗读它们。‎ 187‎ big__________; beautiful___________; short__________; easy___________; white________________; ‎ happy________; good____________; cool____________; expensive_________________; old____________;‎ heavy________; hot _____________.‎ 知识链接 表示外貌的易弄错的词：留长发— have long hair; 属于中等身材—be of medium build; 属于中等身高—be of medium height。如：她中等身材，留着长发。—She is of medium build and has long hair.‎ 自主互助学习 ‎1.仔细观看图片，并将方框中的单词与图片匹配起来。你可以使用单词表来帮助你。‎ ‎ ‎ ‎_________________ ________________ ________________ ___________________‎ ‎ ‎‎2.26m ‎__________________ ________________ ___________________ __________________‎ 187‎ heavy; athletic; smart; calm; funny; outgoing;‎ wild; quiet; serious; thin;‎ ‎1.88m ‎ ‎ ‎________________ ___________________‎ ‎ 2.大声朗读以上单词并根据1a要求完成单词连线。‎ ‎ 3. 阅读课本93页至94页1至2中的内容后，将下列单词变其为它们的比较级。‎ quiet__________; calm___________; smart____________; wild___________; funny____________;‎ thin___________; outgoing___________________; athletic________________; heavy___________;‎ serious____________________; long______________; short____________; tall_______; good____;‎ ‎2.26m ‎1.88m far____________; little__________; many/much__________; well________.‎ ‎4.‎ Liu Xiang is tall.‎ Yao Ming is taller.‎ Yao Ming is taller than Liu Xiang.‎ A +…+ 形容词/副词的比较级+than+B A与B相比更……。‎ ‎ ‎ 187‎ ‎ ‎ Han Hong is __________(heavy) than Zhang Ziyi./Zhang Ziyi is _______(thin) than Han Hong.‎ Li Yong is _______________(outgoing) than Shui Junyi.‎ My car is 4.5m long, his car is 5m, so My car is _________than his car. And his car is _____than my car.‎ ‎ 5.认真观察课本31页中的图片，将三对双胞胎的名字写到下列横线上。‎ ‎ ___________/____________ ____________/____________ ___________/_____________‎ ‎ 6.听录音，完成1b。‎ ‎ 7.核对答案，要求老师反复播放你不清楚的地方。‎ ‎【课堂练习】‎ 请先找到适合的词描述各张图片，然后与同学对下列四组图片进行比较。‎ ‎ 1 ‎ ‎ 2 ‎ ‎ 3 ‎ ‎ 4 ‎ ‎【要点归纳】‎ ‎ 形容词、副词比较级的变法；比较级的使用。‎ ‎【拓展练习】‎ My father has _______(short) hair than my mother. My mother has _______(long)hair than my father. But my father is ________(heavy) than my mother and ___________(outgoing)than 187‎ ‎ her.(填空)‎ ‎【总结反思】‎ ‎【课题】Unit3 I’m more outgoing than my sister. Section A 2a-2c（2）（1课时）‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1.熟悉形容词和副词比较级的规则变法。‎ ‎2.识记描述人外貌、性格的词组。‎ ‎3.通过使用比较级来丰富听和说的能力。‎ ‎【重点，难点】 ‎ ‎ 识记并熟悉形容词、副词的多种规则变化； 在听和说的过程中熟练使用比较级。‎ ‎【导学指导】‎ 温故知新 ‎ ‎1.写出下列词的比较级并大声朗读它们。‎ big__________; beautiful___________; short__________; easy___________; white_____________; ‎ happy________; good____________; cool____________; expensive__________; old____________;‎ heavy________; hot _____________.‎ ‎2.回忆昨天所学，并再次仔细观看图片，并将方框中的单词与图片匹配起来，然后再写出它们的比较级。‎ ‎ ‎ Outgoing/ more outgoing ________________ ________________ ___________________‎ ‎ ‎ 187‎ ‎ ‎ ‎__________________ ________________ ___________________ __________________‎ heavy; athletic; smart; calm; funny; outgoing;‎ wild; quiet; serious; thin;‎ ‎ ‎meet work live look keep wear ‎ ‎ more less fewer take ‎________________ ___________________‎ ‎3.回忆昨天所学，翻译下列词组。‎ 留长发_________________; 属于中等身材_________________; 留短发___________________;属于中等身高_________________________。‎ 知识链接 比较下边两组句子，看看它们之间有什么不同的地方。‎ ‎1. Zhang Xi is taller than Wang Han.(Zhang Xi:1.6m; Wang Han:1.61) ‎ Zhang Xi is a little taller than Wang Han.‎ ‎ 2. Li Shi is heavier than Lu Xing. (Li Shi:48kg; Lu Xing: 84kg)‎ ‎ Li Shi is much heavier than Lu Xing.‎ 根据对比，我们可以知道：第一组中的第二个句子比第一个句子多了一个__________;第二组中的第二个句子比第一个句子多了一个_________。两组中的第一个句子只是让听者知道Zhang Xi 比Wang Han高，但高多少就不得而知了。而第二个句子交代了高一点点，这样，听者很快就会明白两者之间身高的差别很小。所以，我们在使用比较级的过程中可以在形容词或副词前边使用a little, much/a lot, even这些词来补充比较的程度，最终达到语言表达的准确。‎ 自主互助学习 ‎1.弄清2a题意，在课本上完成2a。‎ ‎2.听录音，核对答案并大声朗读它们。‎ ‎3.弄清2b题意，听录音，并按题意要求完成2b。‎ ‎4.核对答案，并及时对不确定的地方向老师提出反复播放的要求。‎ ‎5.左列同学看32页，右列同学迅速翻到83页，彼此确保2c中的信息不被对方看到。‎ 187‎ ‎6.弄清***号的意思后，彼此按照右侧的问题提示，通过向对方提问的方式完成各自图表中的格，完成后，对照两页的信息，看看哪组搭档最有默契？‎ ‎【课堂练习】‎ 用所给词的正确形式填空。‎ ‎1. My father is much __________(tall) and ___________(heavy) than my mother, but my mother is _______________(outgoing) and __________(smart) than him.‎ ‎2. As we know, Zhao Benshan is a lot _________(funny) than Shui Junyi.‎ ‎3. I think China has _________(large) population than India.‎ ‎4. Who is ___________________(athletic), Liu Xiang or Shi Dongpeng?‎ ‎5. Taking the subway to school is much _________(cheap) than taking the taxi to school.‎ ‎【拓展练习】‎ 翻译下列句子。 ‎ ‎1.我留着比我哥哥更长的头发__________________________________________________________.‎ ‎2.她属于中等身材，但和我相比，还是重了那么一点点。____________________________________‎ ‎___________________________________________________________________________________.‎ ‎3.我们数学老师喜欢安静的学生，但我们英语老师喜欢外向的学生。__________________________ ‎ ‎___________________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎4.他比他的妻子大5岁。______________________________________________________________.‎ ‎5.Non-smokers are much healthier than smokers.____________________________________________.‎ ‎【总结反思】‎ ‎【课题】Unit4 I’m more outgoing than my sister. Section A 3a-4（3）（1课时）‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1.进一步熟悉形容词和副词比较级的规则变法。‎ ‎2.学会使用比较级及“as…as, the same as ,be different from, look the same, look like”来做比较。‎ ‎【重点，难点】 ‎ ‎“as…as”用于比较的使用方法；灵活交叉使用“as…as”等词及比较级来进行比较。‎ ‎【导学指导】‎ 温故知新 ‎ ‎1.写出下列词的比较级。‎ big__________; beautiful___________; short__________; easy___________; white_____________; happy________;good____________;cool___________;heavy__________;hot_____________.;light_______; athletic__________________;smart_____________;expensive___________________;old____________;calm_______;funny____________;‎ 187‎ outgoing_________________;wild__________;quiet____________;thin_____; serious__________________;‎ 知识链接 ‎“both”的使用：We both love China. ‎ We both enjoy going to parties.‎ We are both from Sweden.‎ We are both more outgoing than our parents.‎ Both Lily and Jim takes the car to school. ‎ 根据上边的例句，你可以总结both的用法，然后完成下列各题。‎ 我们两个都吃鱼。___________________________________________________________________.‎ 他们两个都是外向的。_______________________________________________________________.‎ 姚明和易建联两个都正在NBA打球。__________________________________________________.‎ ‎____________________________________________________________________________________ ‎ 自主互助学习 阅读3a中的内容及3b中的对话后，完成下列各题。‎ ‎1.翻译下列词组。‎ 为…而感谢某人_________________; 双胞胎妹妹______________; 双胞胎哥哥____________; 正如你所看到的那样______________; 在一些方面 _____________; 看起来一样_____________; 看起来不同____________; 超过、多于____________;一些共有的东西 ______________________; 和…一样擅长…____________________________; 更外向一点___________________________________;与… 一样_______________; 我们两个都_____________; 她最喜爱的科目________________。‎ ‎2.完成3a的要求，注意 “T”, “F”及“DK”代表的意思。‎ ‎3.小组讨论各自答案并同老师核对最后正确答案。‎ 二、.考考你的观察力。认真阅读3a文章，找到下列句子的同义句。‎ ‎1. Liu Li and Liu Ying have some things in common.‎ ‎ ______ _______ _______, Liu Li and Liu Ying ______ ______ ______.‎ ‎2. Liu Li isn’t as good at sports as Liu Ying.‎ ‎ Liu Ying is ________ ____________ than Liu Li.‎ ‎3. Liu Ying talks more than Liu Li.‎ ‎ Liu Ying is _________ _________ than Liu Li.‎ ‎4. Liu Ying loves P.E best.‎ ‎ Liu Ying’s __________ _________ is P.E.‎ 三、根据3b中的对话制作对话。你可和搭档相互介绍你们自己同你们好友的相同点和不同点，注意使用3a中的用于比较的词。‎ 四、争取机会向你的师生介绍你们同你们好友的相同和不同点。‎ ‎【课堂练习】‎ 选择题。‎ ‎1.Here _____ a photo of Jay Chou. A. are B. is C. have D. has.‎ ‎2.Look at those twins! _____ many ways , they look the same. A For B. About C. In D. By ‎3.My father has the same hobbies _____ my grandfather. A. with B. for C. from D. as 187‎ ‎4.As you can see, I am _______ more athletic than my partner. A. many B. a lot of C. little D. much ‎5.I don’t like my math teacher, because he is _________ than my French teacher.‎ A. seriouser B. more serious C. much serious D. most serious ‎6.They _________all over the United States last year. However, we have never been to the USA.‎ A. both travel B. all travel C. travel both D. both traveled.‎ ‎7. _______he is from England, but he isn’t as good at speaking English as I am.‎ A. Although B. Because C. So D./‎ ‎8. Their sweaters are as ________as mine.‎ ‎ A. more expensive B. expensiver C. expensive D. most expensive.‎ ‎【要点归纳】‎ ‎ 口译重要词组；“both”“as…as”及“same、different”及比较级的区别。‎ ‎【拓展练习】‎ 翻译下列词组。‎ ‎1.在一些方面，我们看起来一样；在一些方面，我们看起来不同。‎ ‎__________________________________________________________________________________.‎ ‎2.哥哥比妹妹重一点点。‎ ‎__________________________________________________________________________________.‎ ‎3.我和王选一样擅长科学。‎ ‎__________________________________________________________________________________.‎ ‎4.我们两个都喜欢踢足球。‎ ‎__________________________________________________________________________________.‎ ‎5.陈醒的双胞胎哥哥留着比他更长的头发。‎ ‎__________________________________________________________________________________.‎ ‎【总结反思】‎ ‎【课题】Unit3 I’m more outgoing than my sister. Section B 1a-2c（4）（1课时）‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1.识记、运用描述好朋友标准的词句。‎ ‎2.听磁带，进一步熟悉比较级的用法并学会运用听力中所使用的对比方法。‎ ‎3.提高自己的听力技巧。‎ ‎【重点，难点】 ‎ ‎ 识记并运用描述好朋友标准的词句；将听力中使用的对比方法移为己用。‎ ‎【导学指导】‎ 温故知新 ‎ 187‎ 一、写出下列词的比较级。‎ outgoing____________; athletic______________; wild___________; serious______________________; ‎ beautiful________________; quiet_________; calm__________; popular_______________________; good___________; well___________; cool___________; important______________; heavy_____________;‎ thin_________; fat___________; hot____________。‎ 二、选择正确答案。‎ ‎1.I work as ______as my sister, so we both get good grades.‎ A. harder B. hardest C. hard D. hardly ‎2.I have the same hairstyle ______ his, but my hobby is different ______ his.‎ A. as, from B. from, as C. for , from. D. with, from ‎3.Their book is ________ than mine.‎ A. very interesting B. more interesting C. most interesting D. interester 知识链接 一、请选择正确的词组翻译填空。‎ 对…有好处；擅长于…；善于与某人打交道；对某人和善；‎ be good for___________; be good to sb._________________ be good with sb.__________________; be good at____________; do well in_______________。‎ 二、根据上边所学词组，完成下列问题。‎ ‎1.She is good _____children, so we think she should be a teacher.‎ ‎2.We both get good grades because we are both good ______ school work.‎ ‎3.If we are good ______others we can build a society of hamony.‎ ‎4.Her cousin can do better _____math than her.‎ ‎5.Don’t smoke any more! It isn’t good ______ your health.‎ 自主互助学习 阅读1a中的内容及1b中的对话后，完成下列各题。‎ ‎1.翻译下列词组。‎ have cool clothes_______________; be popular in school_______________; like to do the same things as me_______________________; be good at______________; make sb. Laugh________________;‎ ‎2.使用1a中的词句，按下边对话提示制作对话。‎ A：I think a good friend should have cool clothes. What about you?‎ B: In my opinion, a good friend should like to do the same things as me. I don’t think a good friend should have cool clothes.‎ C: For me, a good friend should …. I think it’s unnecessary for a good friend to be good at school-‎ work..‎ ‎3.展示你们的对话。‎ 二、阅读2a、2b题目，完成下列要求。‎ ‎1.弄清题意并小组讨论如何做才能提升自己的听力。‎ ‎2.听磁带，完成听力。注意使用你们讨论所得的听力技巧。‎ ‎3.同老师同学核对答案。‎ 三、根据2a图表中所填的信息，对话对比HollyMaria同他们朋友之间相同和不同的地方。‎ 四、展示你们的对话。‎ 187‎ ‎【课堂练习】‎ 选择题。‎ ‎1.I don’t like to read books in the sunshine because it’s not good _______my eyes.‎ A. at B. for C. with D. to ‎2.Liu Li always makes us _______happy. So we all like to spend time with her.‎ A. feels B. felt C, feel D. fell ‎3.Her science and English are a little better ______ Lucy’s.‎ A. at B. in C. than D. of ‎4.They ______the Internet next Wednesday.‎ A. surfing B. surf C. are surfing D. will surfs ‎5.Exercising more can help us keep in good ______. ‎ A. healthy B. healthly C. healthily D health ‎6.In order to protect our earth, we should use the bus _____and drive our cars _____.‎ A. more, less B. less, more C. much, little D. more, fewer.‎ ‎7._____ you can see, our school is larger than your school.‎ A,. What B. When C. As D. How ‎8.Her physics ______ better than any other students’‎ A. is B. are C. do D. does.‎ ‎【要点归纳】‎ ‎ 回忆表述好朋友标准的词句；总结一下这节课所学到到的听力技巧。‎ ‎【拓展练习】‎ 改错。‎ ‎1.Look at the boy! He has as longer hair as his sister.___________________‎ ‎2.They like both staying up to watch the games of the World Cup in South Arica._____________‎ ‎3.Although he played very well, but his national team failed to win the Cup.___________‎ ‎4.If you are well in English, you can work as a reporter or a tour guide when you are older.__________‎ ‎5.She is very popular than any other her classmates because she is friendly to others.______________‎ ‎【总结反思】‎ ‎【课题】Unit3I’m more outgoing than my sister. Section B 3a-4（5）（1课时）‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1.学会使用比较级和其他用于比较的词撰写文章介绍自己交友的原则及自己和好友的相同点和不同点。‎ ‎2.学会撰写招聘广告及通过比较选择适合招聘的最佳人选。‎ ‎【重点，难点】 ‎ ‎ 将比较级灵活地运用到文章或谈话中去。‎ 温故知新 ‎ 选择填空。‎ ‎1.Lu Xian has more foreign friends than Wang Ban __________.‎ A. is B. have C. was D. does.‎ ‎2.I think the Chinese are _________than the Japanese.‎ 187‎ A friendlier B. more friendly C. friendlyer D. more friendlier.‎ ‎3.Their grandparents ________ at home on weekends.‎ A are all B. are both C. all are D. both are.‎ ‎4. Are you good _____ spending time with kids? We need a teacher.‎ A. as B. in C. at D for ‎5.This summer is much _______ than last summer.‎ A. too hot B. hot C. hotter D. hottest.‎ 知识链接 ‎“it”做形式主语和形式宾语。‎ Getting on well with your classmates is very important for you.仔细观察这个句子，你可以发现，划线部分是这个句子的主语。英语也是一门非常美的语言，为了避免头重脚轻，让这个句子均衡，主语可用it来取代，把真正的主语使用to+动词原形放到句子后边。具体如下：‎ It is very important for you to get on well with your classmates.‎ I find it a little difficult for me to get on well with my classmates. 在这个句子中，你可以发现，划线部分是做了这个句子的宾语。而it仅仅是它的形式宾语。其目的跟上边的的句子是一个道理。请根据上边所讲，完成下列问题。‎ ‎1.It is a little tired for us ________ to watch the soccer games held in South Africa.‎ A. stay up B. to stay up C. staying up D. stays up ‎2.Our parents think _____ impossible for me to get good grades in the coming final exam.‎ A. / B. it C. I D. me ‎3. Getting up early is good for our health.(同义句)‎ ‎_______ is good for our health_______ ________ ________early.‎ 自主互助学习 阅读3a中的内容，完成下列各题。‎ ‎1.翻译下列词组。‎ 持相反的看法 ______________________; 拥有与我相像的朋友__________________________;‎ 大多数孩子_________________; 一些不同点________________; 在…方面打败某人__________;在友谊中_______________; 更外向的________________。‎ ‎2.核对你们自学的结果并大声朗读它们。‎ ‎3.按3a要求划出描述人外貌性格的词，注意它们的原级和比较级。‎ 二、阅读3a，完成下列问题。‎ ‎1.Who likes to have friends who are different from him or her?‎ A. James Green B. Huang Lei C. Mary Smith D. Larry.‎ ‎2.Yang Li is ________ than James Smith.‎ A. smarter B. quieter C. taller D. more outgoing ‎3.Huang Lei thinks it’s _____ to be the same.‎ A. necessary B. important C. unnecessary D. different ‎4.Larry always beats Huang Lei in ______.‎ A. basketball B. baseball C. tennis D. soccer.‎ ‎5.Who have opposite views according to the passage?‎ A. James Green and Mary Smith B. James Green and Huang Lei ‎ C. Yuan Li and Larry D. Carol and Mary Smith ‎【课堂练习】‎ 187‎ 一、周琼是方欣最要好的朋友，请你以方欣的身份，按照下列图表提示，撰写文章对比你们相同和不同的地方。注意使用比较级及“the same as、a little、much、as…as、both、different”等用于比较的词。‎ Name Height(高度)‎ Weight(体重)‎ Outgoing Athletic English(分)‎ Fang Xin ‎1.7m ‎58kg ‎★★‎ ‎★★★‎ ‎109‎ Zhou Qiong ‎1.7m ‎59kg ‎★★★★‎ ‎★‎ ‎115‎ I like to have friends who are like me._________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Fang Xin_____‎ 二、阅读4中的招聘广告，注意招聘广告的格式并写一个招聘其它工种的招聘广告。‎ ‎【要点归纳】‎ 比较级及用于比较的其他词在写作中的运用；招聘广告的格式。‎ ‎【拓展练习】‎ 用所给词的正确形式填空。‎ ‎1.Her pen pal likes to do the same things as she _________(do).‎ ‎2.Could you please tell me four _________(different) between the two pictures.‎ ‎3.I don’t think she is _______(well) at playing badminton.‎ ‎4.Those aliens enjoy__________(fly) in the UFO.‎ ‎5.There are much more buildings on both _______(side) of this street than before.‎ ‎6.Liu Xiang is as ________as Wang Junxia.(athlete)‎ ‎【总结反思】‎ Unit 4 what’s the best movie theater?‎ Section A 1a—1c ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1．单词及短语：comfortable，seat，screen，close，theater，‎ ‎2．学会并能掌握形容词、副词最高级的构成方法和用法（难点） ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】‎ 学会并能掌握形容词、副词最高级的构成方法和用法（难点） ‎ ‎【学法指导】 ‎ ‎1、浏览信息2、作比较3、合作学习 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 导入（启发探究 3分钟） ‎ 187‎ ‎1我们曾在Unit3学过形容词比较级的构成及其用法，试着完成下面的练习 ‎①Who is (athletic)，Lily or Lucy?‎ ‎②Peter is （funny）than any other boy in his class.‎ ‎2. 归纳总结 ‎①A比B更……：A+be+形容词比较级+the+B.‎ ‎②A和B一样： （as……as）‎ ‎③A是两者中更……的一个： ‎ ‎④越……越……： ‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ ‎1、学习单词：拼读、记忆、听写 theater ['θɪətə] n.剧场；电影院；戏院 comfortable ['kʌmftəbl] adj.舒适的；充裕的 seat [siːt] n.座位；　 screen [skriːn] n.屏幕；银幕　‎ close [kləʊs] v.关；合拢；不开放；停业　 ‎ ‎2、查资料完成 comfortable: adj.‎ ‎①The car is ___________（comfortable）than that one.‎ ‎②Which theater has ___________（comfortable）seats in town?‎ ‎③Look! He is sitting ___________in the chair.‎ ‎3. seat: n. sit: vi.‎ ‎①Please take your ___________here. =Please ___________here.‎ ‎②This theater has the most comfortable ___________.‎ ‎4. screen: n.‎ Please ___________（看）the screen. It has a picture on it.‎ ‎5. close:‎ ‎①vt. 关闭。Do you mind me ___________the door? —Not at all.‎ Please ___________your eyes when you do eye exercises.‎ ‎②closed: adj. Who opened the window? I remember I left it ___________.‎ We cant’ do shopping now. Look, the shop is ___________.‎ ‎③close: adj. 近的，接近的，亲密的。‎ My home is ___________ ___________ the river. （离……近，同义词为___________）‎ You should go to bed. It’s close ___________ midnight.‎ I have a close friend. （近义词best）‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ ‎1. 完成1a discuss:‎ do you like to go to the movies?‎ who is your favorite movie star?‎ why do you like him / her? ‎ what kind of movies do you like best?‎ where do you want to go ,cinema、radio station or theater?why if there are many movie theaters, which movie theaters do you want to go to?‎ what’s important or not important for a cinema? let’s see 1a. how do you choose what movie theater to go to? write the things in the box under "important" or "not important".‎ 187‎ 想想译译 comfortable seats big screens cheap ‎ 友好的服务 新电影 close to home ‎ in a fun part of town popular ‎ 如果你去电影院看电影，你认为上面列举的这些，哪些对你来说显得重要，哪些不重要？请试着完成1a，也可以增加一些内容。‎ 用has 或 is填空 it ______comfortable seats it ______friendly service ‎ it ______cheap it ______close to home ‎ it ______popular it ______ in a fun part of town ‎ it ______good quality ‎2. 完成1b listening Qualities Movie theaters It has the biggest screens. ‎ It's the most popular. ‎ It's the closest to home. Town Cinema It has the shortest waiting time. ‎ It has the best sound. ‎ It has the most comfortable seats. ‎ ‎2、完成听力时时你发现了the biggest，the best，the most comfortable ‎ 等，它们叫做形容词的 ‎ 最高级形式的构成 ‎ (1)单音节词和部分双音节词在原级后加-est构成，具体情况如下：‎ ‎ ①单音节词及部分双音节词在词尾后加-est。‎ ‎ great--greatest clever--cleverest ‎ ②以e结尾的单词，在词尾后加．st。‎ nice--nicest fine--finest ‎ ③以辅音字母’y结尾的单词，把y变为i，再加-est。‎ ‎ happy--happiest heavy--heaviest ‎ ④重读闭音节单词末尾只有一个辅音字母的单词，双写最后的辅音字母，再加-est。‎ ‎ hot--hottest big--biggest ‎ (2)绝大多数双音节和多音节形容词前面加most构成最高级。‎ ‎ important--most important interesting---most interesting ‎ beautiful--most beautiful popular--most popular ‎ difficult---most difficult creative--most creative ‎ boring--most boring expensive--most expensive ‎ (3)不规则变化 ‎ ‎ 少数形容词(和副词)的比较级及最高级变化不规则，我们要熟记。‎ ‎ good／well-~better---*best bad／ill／badly-~worse--*worst ‎ many／much-+more--+most little---less---~least ‎ ， farther--*farthest ‎ further_—furthest ‎3. 学习1c对话.‎ 187‎ 谈论你最喜欢的影院 ‎ A: Do you want to go to the movies? B: Sure.‎ ‎ A: What's the best movie theater? B: Town Cinema. It's the cheapest.‎ ‎ A: But I think Screen City has the most comfortable seats.‎ which cinema has friendlier service, town cinema or screen city?‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ 形容词最高级的用法:‎ ‎　　　　形容词最高级用于两个以上的人和物进行比较, 其结构形式为:‎ ‎　　　　主语+谓语(系动词)+the+形容词最高级+名词+表示范围的短语或从句。‎ ‎　She is             student      her class. 　她是班上最好的学生。‎ ‎　Shanghai is one of                  cities      China. 上海是中国最大城市之一。‎ ‎　This is              apple I have ever met. 　这是我见到的最大的苹果。‎ Tom is              boy in his basketball team. 　汤姆是他们篮球队中个子最高的孩子。‎ ‎( ) 1 Who jumped ____of all? A. far B. farther C. farthest D. the most far ( ) 2 Li Lei is___ student in our class. A. tall B. taller C. tallest D. the tallest ( ) 3 The fifth orange is____ of all. Give it to that small child. A. big B. bigger C. the bigger D. the biggest ( )4 Who is---of you three? A. the oldest B. much older C. oldest D. older ( ) 5 Tom is one of ____ boys in our class. A. tallest B. taller C. the tallest B. the tall ( )6 English is one of____ spoken in the world. A. the important languages B. the most important languages C. most important language D. the most important language ( ) 7 Beijing is one of____ in China. A. the largest city r '; B. the large cities C. the larger cities D. the largest cities 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ ‎1. If you take more exercise, you’ll soon be ________.‎ A. more healthy B. much healthy C. much healthier D. more healthier ‎2. —Would you like _______dumplings?‎ ‎—No, thanks. I’m full.‎ A. any B. any more C. some more D. the most ‎3. Which do you like _________, tea, coffee or milk?‎ A. well B. better C. best D. good ‎4. My home ________to the lake.‎ A. is close B. closes C. is near D. is closed ‎5. _________the store, I think Parkson is the best.‎ A. As B. For C. As for D. For as ‎6. What do young people think _________places in town?‎ A. about B. over C. off D. out ‎7. China is ________the east of Asia and ________the west of Japan.‎ A. in, in B. on, to C. in, to D. on, on 187‎ ‎8. Jim often talks _______but does ________. So everyone likes him very much.‎ A. little, many B. few, much C. less, more D. more, less ‎9. He is ________to reach（够到）the apple on the tree.‎ A. enough tall B. tall enough C. taller enough D. tallest enough ‎10. She always buys _________clothes though she isn’t rich enough.‎ A. cheap B. good C. expensive D. beautiful ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ ‎ Unit 4 what’s the best movie theater?‎ Section A 2a—2c ‎【学习目标】 ‎ 学习worst 、cheaply、 song、 choose 、 carefully ‎ 谈论clothes store和radio station ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ 掌握最高级的构成及运用 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 一、导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ 按要求写出下列单词 ‎1．much(比较级)__________ __ 2．nine(序数词)________________‎ ‎3．do(第三人称单数形式)___ _ 4．few(最高级)_________________‎ ‎5．near(反义词)___________ 6．free(反义词)________________‎ ‎7．swim(现在分词)_______ 8．good(副词)__________________‎ ‎9．many(最高级)_________ 10．I(名词性物主代词)__________‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ ‎1、语法 ‎　形容词最高级用于两个以上的人和物进行比较, 其结构形式为:‎ 主语+谓语(系动词)+the+形容词最高级+名词+表示范围的短语或从句。‎ ‎　She is             student      her class. 　她是班上最好的学生。‎ ‎　Shanghai is one of               cities      China. 上海是中国最大城市之一。‎ ‎　This is              apple I have ever met. 　这是我见到的最大的苹果。‎ Tom is              boy in his basketball team. 　汤姆是他们篮球队中个子最高的孩子。‎ ‎2、单词 worst [wɜːst] adj.最坏的；最差的　cheaply ['tʃiːpli] adv.廉价地；粗俗地　 ‎ song [sɒŋ] n.歌曲；歌唱 　choose [tʃuːz] v.选择；决定 ‎ carefully 'keəfəli] adv.小心地，认真地 ‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ 完成2a Listening ‎ ‎ 1. Read the instructions and learn the new words. Guess the meaning: radio station, clothing store, Jeans Corner, Trendy Teens, Jason’s, Funky Fashions. ‎ ‎2. point to the two questions on the survey. ‎ ‎3. Ask some students to read the names of the stores and the radio stations. 4. Play the 187‎ ‎ recording the first time. Students only listen.‎ ‎ 5. Play again. Ask students to circle the letters of the correct answers.‎ ‎ 6. Check the answers. ‎ 完成Listening (2b) Listening ‎1 . Read the instructions and point to the chart. And read the names of the stores and comments after each one or ask different students to do it. ‎ ‎2. Play again. Ask students to circle the correct words the boy says. ‎ ‎3. Check the answers. ‎ ‎4. Read again and tell your friends what the boy think of the stores. S1: The boy thinks Jason’s is the best. S2: Jeans Corner and Trendy Teens are good stores. S3…StepX Role play Look at the sentences they’ve found. Then make the conversation. Call 2 pairs to share their conversations.‎ ‎ 完成2c 小组活动：仿照2c对话，进行分角色表演，其中一人扮演记者， 采访小组内成员 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ 形容词最高级用法 ‎ 用法：当需要对三者或三者以上的人或事物进行比较，表示“最……”的含义时，需要用 级。我们在使用最高级时应注意以下几点。‎ ‎1、形容词最高级前通常要加定冠词 ，但如果最高级前有物主代词、名词所有格等修饰时，则不用定冠词。如：‎ ‎(1)Monday is my busiest day. (2)Jim is Mike’s best friend.。‎ ‎2、形容词最高级常与介词in或of引导的短语（说明比较范围）连用。若介词后的名词或代词与句中的主语是同一类人或物时，常用of短语。当强调是在某一范围、场所内进行比较时，常用in短语。‎ 如：(1)She is the oldest of these children. ‎ ‎ (2)Lily is the youngest in her class.‎ ‎3、形容词最高级前可用序数词进行限定，共同修饰后面的名词，其结构为：the+序数词+形容词最高级+名词。‎ 如： The Yellow River is the second longest river in China. 黄河是中国第二长河。‎ ‎4、有时有最高级修饰的名词前还可以用不定冠词来修饰,但这时不含比较的意思，只是表示“非常，很”‎ 如：Their performance was a greatest success.他们的演出非常成功。‎ 单选 ‎1. Pop music is ______music in the world. ‎ A .best of B .more better C .good of D. the best ‎2. Of all the students, Angie is the _____but studies __________than others.‎ A .shorter, best B .shortest, better C .shortest, best D .shorter, better ‎3. As students, we must work hard to make our country _______.‎ A .rich and stronger B .richer and stronger ‎ C .richer and stronger D .rich and strong ‎4. John often talks _____ but does _____, so all of us think he is a good boy.‎ A .little, many B .few, fast C .less, more D. more, less ‎5. The boy didn’t run ____ to catch the bus.‎ ‎ A .fast enough B .enough fast C .quick enough C .enough quick ‎6. I’m sure you can jump as ____as Jim if you wear your sports shoes.‎ 187‎ ‎ A .slow B .slower C .higher D .high ‎7. I don’t think this question is ____than that one .It is ____of these questions.‎ A. easier, more difficult B .easier, the most difficult ‎ C. easiest, more difficult D .easier, much more difficult ‎ ‎8. Mr Zhang is one of ____in our school. ‎ A .the more popular teachers B .most popular teachers ‎ C .the most popular teachers D .the most popular teacher 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ ‎16. The People’s Cinema is close _________ my home. ‎ ‎ A. in B, out C. to D. of ‎ ‎17. _________ is the coat? ‎ A. How far B. How much C. How soon D. How often ‎ ‎18一 _________ is it from your home to school? 一Ten minutes by bus.‎ A. How far B. How much C. How soon D. How long ‎19. FM 97. 4 is the best_ _________ . Lt plays popular music every day. ‎ A. fast food restaurant $. Clothing store C. radio station D. music store ‎ ‎20. (2012，广西桂林)The red pencil is _________ than the green one. ‎ A. short B. shorter C. nice D. the shortest ‎ ‎21: You can buy ticket _________ here. ‎ A. the most quick B. the more quick C. the most quickly D. the more quickly ‎ ‎22..1 like the Big Screen Complex because it has _________ screen. ‎ A. bigger B. the worst C. the biggest D. worst ‎ ‎23.—The weather is _________ today than yesterday.‎ A. bad B. worse C. badder D. badly ‎ ‎24: Which is__________season in Beijing? ‎ better B. best C. the best D. good ‎ ‎25. (2012，福建福州)Shu-how Lin is now one of _________ basketball players in the NBA. ‎ A. popular B, more popular C. the most popular ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ ‎ Unit 4 what’s the best movie theater?‎ Section A 2d ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1、学习How do you like 、so far 、Thanks for telling me. 、 No problem.‎ ‎2、运用形容词的最高级对人物进行描述 ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 .‎ 运用形容词的最高级对人物进行描述 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 一、导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ 用所给词的适当形式填空。 ‎ ‎1.My mom is _________ (busy) in my family. ‎ ‎2.Which clothes store is__________ (good)，Trendy Teens or Jason’s? ‎ 187‎ ‎3. Which city is _________ (beautiful)，Beijing， Shanghai or Hangzhou? ‎ ‎4. She is _________ (old) of us all.‎ ‎5. What’s _________ (bad) radio station in town? ‎ ‎6.Oldies 102. 1 FM is _________ (bad) than All Talk 970 AM. ‎ ‎7. Which is _________ (big) of the five ( oranges? ‎ ‎8. Movie Palace has_ ________________ （comfortable) seats of the three. ‎ ‎9.0f all the boxes this one is _________ (heavy). ‎ ‎10.1 want to learn science hard. I think it is _________ (difficult) of all. ‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ ‎1、自己阅读Section A1b 2a 2b 听力材料，复习体会最高级用法 ‎2、自学单词 so far 到目前为止；迄今为止 fantastic comfortably adv.舒服地；舒适地 No problem 没什么（不客气） ‎ ‎3、词语用法 so far的意思为 到现在为止。以此来看，属于完成时应用范畴；但是英语很灵活，一些东西不是固定的，不应学的很死。 So far, so good. 目前为止，一切顺利。 I can only trust him so far. 我到现在还信赖他。‎ everything is getting well so far. 目前为止，一切顺利。‎ ‎. comfortable: adj.‎ ‎①The car is ___________（comfortable）than that one.‎ ‎②Which theater has ___________（comfortable）seats in town?‎ ‎③Look! He is sitting ___________in the chair.‎ What do(es) sb. think about/of sth.? 意为“某人认为……怎么样?”，是一个用来询问某人 对某事有何看法的句型。该句型可以转化为“How do(es) sb. like…?”答语往往是对人（物）的评价。‎ 例如:  ---What do you think of your math teacher ?‎ ‎--- She is friendly and knowledgeable. Everyone likes her.‎ 练一练：-- ______do you _______ the game? ‎ ‎--It’s wonderful. I think the players are great.‎ A. How; like about B. What; think of  C. What; like about D. How; think about ‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ 学习Section A 2d Task1：小组成员看图画，猜测人物对话内容。‎ Task2：小组倾听课文的朗读并体会语音、语调、停顿。‎ Task3：小组长带领组员正确朗读课文，注意语音语调。‎ Task3：小组长带领组员翻译课文，并勾画短语。‎ Welcome to How do you like it so far my way around love watching movies Thanks for telling me. 、 ‎ No problem.‎ Task4：小组长带领组员分角色正确朗读课文，注意语音语调。‎ Task5：小组长带领组员背诵课文，‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ 187‎ ‎1、形容词最高级的构成 ‎2、写出下列形容词与副词的比较级与最高级形式。‎ long _____ ______ wide ______ _______ fat ____ _____ wet ______ _______ heavy ____ ______ slow ______ _______ ‎ few ____ _____ good ______ _______brightly ______ _____ ‎ bably _____ _______ far____ ____ bad _____ _____ ‎ quickly _____ ______ happy _____ ______ ‎ unhappy _______ _ _______ important ________ ________ ‎ many _______ _________ little _____ __ _________‎ strong ________ ________ patient ________ ______ __ ‎ safe _____ ___ ________expensive _______ _ ________ ‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ ‎1.(2012，山冻济南)-Sonia, do you think you are differem from Linda? ‎ ‎ 一Yes. I’m _________ _at drawing than her. ‎ better B. good C. well D. best ‎ ‎2.(2o12 山东济宁)In the talent show, I performed well and Ann did even _________ .‎ A. Well B. better C. more D, worse ‎ ‎3. (2012，天津)Who listens _________ , Corn ,Jack or Bill? ‎ ‎ A. the most carefully B. more carefully C. the most careful D. more careful ‎ ‎4. (2012,湖南岳阳)Wembley Stadium(温布利大球场)is one of the _________ soccer fields in the world. It will be the place for soccer matches during the Olympics next month. ‎ A. famous B. more famous C. most famous ‎ ‎5. (2012，贵州六盘水)It’s summer now; the weather is getting _________ .‎ A. higher and higher B. lower and lower C. hotter and hotter D. colder and colder ‎ Are the days__1__in summer or in winter？In China the days__2__longer in summer．There are__3__than sixteen__4__of daylight in the middle__5__ summer．In__6__there are only about eight hours of__7__．When is the weather warmest in China？It is the__8__during the summer months．During the winter it is often very__9__．In spring and autumn the weather is usually neither very hot nor very cold，The south has a__10__summer．The north has a cold winter．‎ ‎1．A．longer B．longest C．long D．short ‎2．A．is B．am C．are D．be ‎3．A．many B．much C．most D．more ‎4．A．days B．hours C．years D．months ‎5．A．of B．on C．at D．for ‎6．A．spring B．winter C．summer D．autumn ‎7．A．day B．light C．daylight D．clouds ‎8．A．warm B．warmest C．warmer D．cold ‎9．A．wet B．hot C．cool D．cold ‎10．A．wind B．rain C．hot D．warm ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ ‎ Unit 4 what’s the best movie theater?‎ 187‎ Section A 3a—3c ‎【学习目标】 ‎ 运用形容词最高级写句子 ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ 运用形容词最高级写句子 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ ‎ 用Of, than, in, as填空。‎ ‎1. This table is as big that one.‎ ‎2. The yellow book is bigger the blue one.‎ ‎3. Tom is the best student the class.‎ ‎4. This lesson is more interesting that one.‎ ‎5. This apple is the largest all the apples.‎ 用所给形容词或副词的适当形式填空 ‎ Which lesson is__________ (difficult) in Book 2? ‎ Alice writes __________________ (carefully) than I. ‎ This story is __________________ (interesting) than that one. ‎ He is __________________ (clever) boy in the class. ‎ This kind of food must be __________ (delicious) than that one. ‎ Can you show me_ _________ (near) shop? ‎ Who’s __________________ ，(careful)，Tom，Jim or Kate? ‎ That is __________________ (easy) of all.‎ That was one of. __________________ (exciting) moments in 2013. ‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ ‎1、自学单词 worse adj.& adv.(bad和badly的比较级）更差；更坏；更糟 service n.接待；服务 menu n.菜单 ‎ act v. 扮演（角色） meal n.早（或午、晚)餐；一餐所吃的食物 ‎ Meal,dish 和 dinner dish指某道菜， dinner 是正餐，宴会， meal 泛指一日三餐 ‎2、朗读语法句子并翻译：‎ What’s the best movie theater to go to ? ‎ Town Cinema. It’s the closest to home. And you can buy tickets the most quickly there?‎ Which is the worst clothes store in town? ‎ ‎ Dream Clothes. It’s worse than Blue Moon. It has the worst service.‎ What do you think of 970 AM? ‎ ‎ I think 970 AM is pretty bad. It has worst music.‎ ‎3、根据汉语意思完成句子，每空一词。‎ ‎.⑴What do you ______ ______(认为) the cinema in town?‎ ‎ ⑵______ ______ （至于）movie theater, I like Movie palace best. ‎ ‎⑶Bargain House has _____ ______ _______(质量最差)‎ ‎.⑷_______ ________ (多少钱) is the radio/ ‎ ‎⑸Funky Fashions has the _________ _________(最优秀的服务). ‎ IV. 根据汉语意思完成下列句子。 ‎ 我打算为格林城新闻做一个调查。I’m going to _____ ______ _______ for the Green City 187‎ ‎ news.你认为其他的商店怎么样？_____ ______ _______ _____ ______ the other stores?‎ 这家电台比城里其他电台要好得多。This radio station is _____ ______ than the other radio stations _____ ______.‎ 在这家商店你可以买到最好的牛仔裤。You can buy _____ ______ _______ in this store.‎ 汤姆是这三个男孩中最大的。Tom is _____ ______ _______the three boys.‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ 完成3a运用最高级 朗读句子，弄懂含义 完成任务 检查答案 完成3b谈论服装店 ‎1、完成任务 ‎2、小组交流 ‎3、全班交流 完成3c谈论饭店 ‎1、完成任务 ‎2、小组交流 ‎3、全班交流 ‎3、用所给单词的适当形式填空 ‎1. This bag is very _____(heavy), but that one is even _________(heavy).‎ ‎ 2. Mum gets up _________ (early) in my family. ‎ ‎3.Titanic was one of _________(popular) movies at that time. ‎ ‎4.Which is _________(big), themoon, the earth or the sun?‎ ‎5.The Yellow River is the second _________(long) river in China.‎ ‎ 6. We have to wear woolen _________(clthing) in cold winter. ‎ ‎7.He is a successful man and lives an _________(easier) life.‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ 副词比较级和最高级的用法：‎ ‎1. 原级主要的句型：‎ ‎1）as+副词原级+as Tom runs as fast as Jones.‎ not as/so+副词原级+as He didn’t come as/so early as Li Lei.‎ ‎2）too+副词原级+to do sth.‎ Jean rides too slowly to catch up with me.‎ ‎3）so +副词原级+ that Jean rides so slowly that she can’t catch up with me.‎ ‎4）副词原级+enough to do sth.‎ Jean doesn’t ride fast enough to catch up with me.‎ ‎2. 比较级的用法：‎ ‎1）比较级+than。当前后使用的动词相同时，通常用助动词来代替后面的动词，该动词或助动词可以省略。‎ Lily run faster than Mary(did).‎ ‎2）比较级+and +比较级 187‎ The days are getting longer and longer in summer.‎ ‎3）the more…the more…‎ The harder you work, the better you will learn.‎ ‎3. 最高级的用法：‎ 副词最高级前一般有the，也可省略。‎ He works (the) hardest of all the students in the class.‎ 及时练习：单选。‎ ‎（ ）1. John is my friend of all the classmates.‎ A. good B. better C. best D. the best ‎（ ）2. E-mailing is much than long-distance calling.‎ A. cheap B. cheaper C. cheapest D. the cheapest ‎（ ）3. Beijing is one of cities in China.‎ A. very beautiful B. much beautiful ‎ C. more beautiful D. the most beautiful ‎（ ）4. The Yellow River isn’t so as the Changjiang River.‎ A. long B. longest C. longer D. the longest ‎（ ）5. The coat I bought last week is too big for me. I’d like to change it for a one.‎ A. small B. larger C. nicer D. smaller ‎（ ）6. Who is the , Jim, Li Lei or Ling Feng?‎ A. tall B. taller C. tallest D. much taller ‎（ ）7. Of all the students, Wu Dong runs .‎ A. fast B. faster C. fastest D. most fast ‎（ ）8. He has grown to take care of himself.‎ A. tall enough B. enough tall C. old enough D. enough old ‎（ ）9. Tom draws better than his brother.‎ A. more B. most C. many D. much ‎（ ）10. Who does homework in your class?‎ A. carefully B. most carefully ‎ C. more carefully D. as carefully as ‎（ ）11. This box is___ that one.‎ ‎　A. heavy than B. so heavy than　 C. heavier as D. as heavy as ‎（ ）12. When we speak to people, we should be ' .‎ ‎　A. as polite as possible B. as polite as possibly ‎ C. as politely as possible D. as politely as possibly ‎（ ）13. This book is____ that one, but____ than that one.‎ ‎　A. as difficult as; expensive B. as more difficult as; more expensive ‎　C. as difficult as; more expensive D. more difficult as; as expensive ‎（ ）14. I think the story is not so ___ as that one.‎ ‎　A. interesting B. interested ‎ ‎ C. more interesting D. most interesting ‎（ ）15. His father began to work____ he was seven years old.‎ ‎　A. as old as B. as early as C. since D. while 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ 187‎ ‎1. (2013，广东模拟)It’s getting _________ . We should go now. ‎ A. dark and dark B. more and more dark C. darker and darker D. more and more darker ‎ ‎2.(2011，广东清远)Li Hua studies English very ___ and her English is __ _____ in her class. ‎ A. careful，good B. carefully, well C, careful，best D. carefully,the best ‎ ‎3.(2011，河北)Of all the subiects, chemistry seems to be _________ `for me. ‎ A. difficult B. too difficult C, more difficult D. the most difficult ‎ ‎4.(2011，四川南充)China is one of _________ countries in the world. ‎ A. larger B. largest C. the largest ‎ ‎5. (2011，黑龙江绥化)(陷阱题)Li Kai jumped the _________ in the long jump. He won the game.‎ A. farthest B. highest C. longest ‎ ‎6, (2012，贵州黔西南)-Which city has _________ popultion, Beijing，Guiyang or Xingyi? ‎ 一Xingyi，of course. ‎ the largest B. the smallest C. the most D. the least ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ Unit 4 what’s the best movie theater?‎ Section B 1a—1e ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1．单词、短语：positive，negative，loud，performer talent show.‎ ‎2．会用句型：My sister Isabal is the funniest person I know.‎ ‎3．继续学习形容词副词最高级的用法 ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ 继续学习形容词副词最高级的用法 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ 写出下列单词的最高级 early___________ big____________ boring____________ ‎ few____________careful___________wet______________ cute____________good_________ little__________‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ ‎1．试写出下列词的反义词。‎ creative ， big ， funny ‎ bigger ， quietest ， funniest ‎ 在写的时候，我们会发现级别要对应，即原级对原级，比较级对 ‎ ‎ ，最高级对 。‎ ‎2、如果以上的空格你已完成，相信完成1a一定不难，试试看。‎ 仔细朗读单词，完成1a 检查答案 总结形容词副词的比较等级的变化 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ ‎1、完成1b 187‎ 造句（形容词副词的比较等级的运用）‎ 朗读句子 ‎2．听听练练（1c—1d）‎ ‎①在1c中要看清这5个图，他们分别在做什么才艺展示，写出相应图的人名。‎ ‎②在1d中，要求你听出人们是怎样评价这些表演者的，要注意听形容词 如果在做听力时，只要能做到心中有数，相信你一定会听得很成功。‎ ‎3、朗读 听材料，体会语音、语调、停顿 跟读材料，模仿语音、语调、停顿 朗读材料，模仿语音、语调、停顿 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ 形容词副词比较级最高级使用注意事项 ‎◇比较应在同类事物之间进行。‎ 误：Your English is better than me.‎ 正：Your English is better than mine.‎ ‎◇比较级前可以有一个表示程度的状语，最常见的三大修饰词是：a little, much, even。‎ 以下单词也可用来修饰：any, far, still, a lot, yet, rather。‎ My sister is a little taller than me.‎ Their house is much larger than ours.‎ 另外，名词短语也可修饰比较级，说明程度。‎ I’m three years older than he. ‎ 特别提醒：very, quite, too不可修饰比较级。‎ ‎◇避免重复使用比较级。‎ 误：He is more kinder to small animals than I.‎ 正：He is much kinder to small animals than I.‎ 误：He is more cleverer than his brother. ‎ 正：He is cleverer than his brother. ‎ ‎◇比较要符合逻辑，在同一范围内比较时，避免将主语含在比较对象中，这时需使用 other来排除自身。‎ 误：China is larger that any country in Asia. ‎ 正：China is larger than any other country in Asia. ‎ 误：John studies harder than any student in his class.‎ 正：John studies harder than any other student in his class.‎ 正：John studies harder than any of the other students in his class.‎ 正：John studies harder than anyone else in his class. ‎ ‎◇比较要遵循前后一致的原则，注意前后呼应。‎ The population of Shanghai is larger than that of Beijing. ‎ It is easier to make a plan than to carry it out. ‎ ‎◇序数词通常只修饰最高级。 ‎ Africa is the second largest continent. ‎ The Yellow River is the second longest river in China.‎ This is the third most popular song of Michael Jackson.‎ ‎◇为避免重复，我们通常用that, those, one, ones代替前面出现的名词。that代替可数 187‎ 名词单数和不可数名词，those代替可数名词复数。one既可指人又可指物，只能代替 可数名词。‎ The weather in China is different from that in America.‎ The book on the table is more interesting than that(或the one)on the desk. A box made of steel is stronger than one made of wood. 误：In winter, the weather of Beijing is colder than it of Shanghai. ‎ 正：In winter, the weather of Beijing is colder than that of Shanghai. ‎ ‎◇“否定词 + 比较级”相当于最高级。‎ ‎----Wait until we get a satisfactory reply, will you?‎ ‎----I couldn't agree more. The idea sounds great to me.‎ Nothing is so easy as this. =Nothing is easier than this. =This is the easiest thing.‎ ‎◇比较级前一般不加冠词。但表示两者中较突出者，且比较级后又有名词或出现了of the ‎ two，这时比较级前一定要加the。 ‎ He is the taller of the two. ‎ Of the two jobs，he chose the harder. ‎ Which is the younger one, Lily or Lucy? ‎ 试比较：‎ Which is larger, Canada or Australia? ‎ Which is the larger country, Canada or Australia? ‎ She is taller than her two sisters. ‎ She is the taller of the two sisters. ‎ ‎◇不含than 的比较级前可加不定冠词修饰，构成“a/an+比较级+单数可数名词”表示 ‎ ‎“一个更……的人/物”。‎ Why don’t you use a sharper knife? 你为什么不用一把更锋利的刀呢？‎ ‎◇比较级than 后应用人称代词的主格，但非正式语体中常用宾格。‎ He is taller than I/me.‎ ‎◇为避免重复，比较级中同样的动词用助动词do, does, did替代。‎ I spend less time doing homework than John does.‎ She tells more funny jokes than we do.‎ 以下内容不是初中教学的重点，仅供拓展之用。‎ ‎◇形容词most前面没有the，不表示最高级的含义，只表示“非常”。 ‎ It is a most important problem. ‎ ‎=It is a very important problem. ‎ ‎◇倍数表达法 ‎▲A is three(four, etc.)times the size(height, length etc.)of B. The new building is four times the size(the height)of the old one. 这座新楼是那座旧楼的四倍大（高）/这座新楼比那座旧楼大（高）三倍。 ▲A is three(four, etc.)times as big(high, long, etc.)as B. Asia is four times as large as Europe. 亚洲是欧洲的四倍大/亚洲比欧洲大三倍。 ▲A is three (four, etc.)times bigger(higher, longer, etc.)than B. Your school is three times bigger than ours.你们的学校比我们的学校大三倍。 用times表倍数通常用于三倍以上，两倍可以用twice或double.‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ 选择填空：‎ 187‎ ‎1． He feels _____ today than yesterday.‎ A. tired B. more tired C. more tireder D. much tired ‎2. Which do you like _____, coffee, tea or milk?‎ A. the worst B. worse C. the worse D. worst ‎3. Of the two toys, the child chose_____.‎ A. the expensive one B. one most expensive C. a least expensive D. the most expensive of them ‎4. The line is ____ than that one.‎ A. more longer B. not longer C. much more longer D. many more longer ‎5. The earth is _____ the moon. A. as 49 times big as B. 49 times as bigger as C. 49 times as big as D.as big as 49 times ‎6. The book is ____ of the two.‎ A. thinner B. the thinner C. more thinner D. the thinnest ‎7. She looks _____ than she does.‎ A. the more older B. very older C. much older D. more older ‎8. The garden is becoming ______.‎ A. more beautiful and more B. more beautiful and beautiful C. more and more beautiful D. more beautiful and beautifuler ‎9. They competed（比赛） to see who could work _____.‎ A. the fastest and best B. the faster and the better C. fastest and better D. faster and better ‎10.______ hurry, _______speed.‎ A. More, less B. Much, little C. The more, the less D. The much, the little ‎11. This kind of coffee is different ______.‎ A. and it is also better B. and better than the other C. but also than others D. from the other, and better ‎(四)翻译句子：‎ ‎1． 本书跟那本书一样有趣。This book is _____ _____ _____ that one.‎ ‎2． 你游泳没有你弟弟好。You can’t swim _____ _____ _____ your brother.‎ ‎3． 今天比昨天冷的多。It is _____ ______ today______ it was yesterday.‎ ‎4． 对这个故事我比另一个喜欢的多。This story is _____ ______ ______ than that one.‎ ‎5． 他比我大两岁。He is _____ ______ ______ than I.‎ ‎6． 这个故事不如那个有趣。This story is _____ _____ _____ than that one.‎ ‎7． 她的身体状况一天天好起来。He is getting _____ ______ ______ every day.‎ ‎8.他对英语越来越感兴趣。He is becoming ______ _____ _______ _____ ______ English.‎ ‎9.他吃的越多，人越胖。The more he eats, the _______ he gets.‎ ‎10.你的问题是两个中比较难的那个。Your question is _______ ______ ______ of two.‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ ‎ Unit 4 what’s the best movie theater?‎ Section B 2a—2c 187‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ have one thing in common: That's up to you For example,‎ play a role in fact 运用比较级描述人物的才能 ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ have one thing in common: That's up to you For example,‎ play a role in fact 运用比较级描述人物的才能 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ Disscucc 2a ‎ 猜猜谁是班上最有才能的人？‎ Who is the best singers, the most talented dancers, the most exciting magicians, the funniest actors and so on in our class?‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ 生词学习：拼读音标、记忆含义、抽认单词 talent n.天资；天赋 P29‎ common n.与……相同 P29‎ have...in common有相同特征；(想法、兴趣等方面)相同P29‎ all kinds of 各种类型的；各种各样的 P29‎ beautifully adv.美丽地；漂亮地 P29‎ be up to是……的职责；由……决定 P29‎ role n. 作用；职能；角色 P29‎ play a role 发挥作用；有影响 P29‎ winner n. 获胜者；优胜者 P29‎ prize n. 奖；奖品；奖金 P29‎ everybody pron. 每人;人人;所有人 P29‎ make up 编造(故事、谎言等) P29‎ example n. 实例;范例 P29‎ for example 例如 P29‎ poor adj. 贫穷的；清贫的 P29‎ seriously adv. 严重地；严肃地；认真地 P29‎ take…seriously 认真对待 P29‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ Task1：听2b磁带，体会语音、语调、句群停顿，理解段落的汉语意义。‎ Task2：快速默读课文，回答 Which three talent shows are mentioned?‎ Task3：小组讨论核对答案。‎ Task4：仔细阅读2b课文，注意模仿语音、语调、句群停顿 Task5：仔细阅读2b课文，勾画记忆课文短语并翻译 is good at something, be interesting to +V watch other people +V get more and more popular. ‎ Be like American Idol and America's Got Talent.‎ ‎ around the world, such as and so on.‎ 187‎ China's Got Talent. have one thing in common: ‎ ‎ try to look for the best singers,‎ ‎ the most talented dancers, the most exciting magicians, ‎ the funniest actors All kinds of people ‎ play the piano the best sing the most beautifully? ‎ That's up to you to decide. play a role in deciding the winner. ‎ gets a very good prize. enjoys watching these shows. ‎ the lives of the performers are made up. For example, ‎ in fact take sth seriously, ‎ be fun to watch. A way to make their dreams come true.‎ make their dreams come true. come true.‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ Task1：阅读课文，完成2c ‎1、仔细阅读2b课文，注意模仿语音、语调、句群停顿 ‎2、在原文中找出2c的句子 ‎3、根据要求完成2c ‎4、检查答案 ‎5、拓展 Show的用法 Like 的用法 Look的短语总结 Give的用法 is good at something, be interesting to +V watch other people +V be fun to try to do try doing make 的用法 show既可用作及物动词，又可用作不及物动词，还可以用作名词，有多种含义。现将一些常见用法作以归纳。 show用作不及物动词，有“显现；显出；露出”等意思；用作及物动词，有以下含义： 1.意为“给……看；出示；显示”，常构成“show sb sth”或“show sth to sb”结构。如： Will you kindly show me that coat over there? 请把那儿的上衣拿给我看看好吗？ Show your tickets, please. 请出示车票。 [特别注意]在“show+间接宾语+直接宾语”结构中，若直接宾语为指物的代词it或them时，只能用“show it(them) to sb”结构。如： 正：You have a new pen, please show it to me. 误：You have a new pen, please show me it. 2.意为“带领；引领”，习惯搭配有show sb to..., show sb around...等。如： Please show me to your school. 请带我到你们学校去。 Uncle Wang is going to show us around his farm. 王叔叔要领我们参观他的农场。 3. 意为“（向人）说明；表明；指示；放映；展出”等。如： Your homework shows that you are careful.从你的作业上可以看出你很认真。 Show me the way, please.请给我指路。 4、此外，show还可用作名词，意为“展览；陈列；演出”。如： There is going to be a picture show in our school. 我们学校将举办一次画展。 Her mother is in show business.她的母亲从事演艺事业。‎ like主要有两种用法：‎ 187‎ ‎　　一、用作动词（v.），意思为“爱，爱好，喜欢”，无进行时态，既表示对“人或者事物的真挚的感情”，又表示“对某事有着浓厚的兴趣﹑爱好”。后面可以接名词﹑代词﹑动名词或者不定式。‎ ‎　　如：① My younger brother likes strawberries very much. 我的小弟弟非常喜欢吃草莓。‎ ‎　　② The boy likes washing hands in cold water. 这个男孩喜欢在冷水里洗手。‎ ‎　　二、用作介词（prep.），like前边一般情况下要有be，翻译成“像……”。‎ ‎　　如：The baby is like his mother. （= The baby looks like his mother.）‎ ‎　　这个小婴儿长得像他妈妈。‎ ‎　　三、有关like的重要短语及句型：‎ ‎　　1. look like （=look the same）看起来像 ‎　　如：Lily looks like Lucy. （=Lily and Lucy look the same.）莉莉和露西看起来长得很像。‎ ‎　　2. What is……like？……怎么样？‎ ‎　　如：— What is the weather like today？ — It is sunny.‎ ‎　　—— 今天的天气怎么样？‎ ‎　　—— 晴天。‎ ‎　　3. How do you like……？ 感觉……怎么样？‎ ‎　　如： — How do you like this book？ — It’s very interesting.‎ ‎　　—— 你感觉这本书怎么样？‎ ‎　　—— 非常有趣。‎ ‎　　4. 指对于别人所要做的事情感到满意（经常与would， could等连用），翻译成“希望，想要，愿意……”。‎ ‎　　如：① — What would Jim like？ — He would like a glass of water.‎ ‎　　—— 吉姆想要什么？‎ ‎　　—— 他想要杯水。‎ ‎　　5. like to do sth.喜欢做某事 （表示“一次性的具体的行为”）‎ ‎　　like doing sth. 喜欢做某事 （表示“经常性的，反复发生的动作”，已经形成习惯）‎ ‎　　like sb. to do sth. 喜欢某人做某事 ‎　　如：① It is too hot，I like to swim today. 今天太热了，我想去游泳。（只有今天想去，一次性的行为）‎ ‎　　② It is too hot，I like swimming in summer.‎ ‎　　天太热了，整个夏天我都喜欢去游泳。（表示“经常性的动作”，已经形成习惯）‎ ‎　　③ Our English teacher likes us to ask questions like this.‎ ‎　　我们的英语老师希望我们这样提问。‎ look的用法 名词，看, 注视, 脸色, 面容, 外表 如：have a look, good/nice look外表好 动词：用作行为动词指“看”，用作连系动词指“看上去”，还有look at、look like、look after、look the same等短语。‎ look after照顾，照看 look ahead向前看 look forward to盼望 look in顺便来访 look at考虑 look back回头看 look down on/upon看不起 look for寻找 look on观看 look out注意 look over把……看一遍 look through浏览 ‎ 187‎ look to照看 look up好转 Task2：仔细阅读课文2b，完成2d2e ‎1、仔细阅读2b课文，注意模仿语音、语调、句群停顿 ‎2、对原文仔细认真理解 ‎3、根据要求完成2 d ‎4、检查2 d答案 ‎5、大声朗读2d，尽量做到快速、流利，语音、语调、句群停顿正确。‎ ‎6、对原文仔细认真理解后进行简写2e。‎ ‎7、检查2e答案 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ ‎( )1、--Which do you prefer, orange juice or coke?‎ ‎--_____, thanks. I'd like just a cup of tea.‎ A. Both B. neither C. None ‎( )2、Mr Wang never get up so early, ____?‎ A. does he B. doesn't he C. doesn't Mr Wang ‎( )3、Pass me the glasses please. I can _____ read the words in the newspaper.‎ A. hardly B. really C. clearly ‎( )4、A dog is ____ than a cat. ‎ A. heavy B. heavier C. very heavier ‎( )5、If you stay at school this Sunday, I ____ go anywhere, _____.‎ A. won't, either B. will, too C. won't. also ‎( )6、He ___ the prize ___ the running this year.‎ A. made, on B. got, about C. won, for ‎( )7、It's cold. you'd better ____ more clothes.‎ A. put on B. wear C. to put on ‎( )8、Taiwan is ____ the south of China. ‎ A. to B. in C. on ‎( )9、Bill seldom helps others ,_____ he? ‎ A. does B. don't C. doesn't ‎( )10、Which is ____ season in Beijing? ‎ A. better B. best C. the best ‎ ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ ‎ Unit 4 what’s the best movie theater?‎ Section B 3a—selfcheck ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1．结合前面所学的形容词的比较级（Unit3）,全面掌握原级，比较级和最高级的用法（重点）‎ ‎2．能写一篇介绍事物或人物的文章，并能较好地运用形容词的比较等级。 ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ 能写一篇介绍事物或人物的文章，并能较好地运用形容词的比较 ‎【教学过程】‎ 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ 187‎ ‎ ‎ 本单元出现的交际用语有：‎ ‎①What’s the best……？最好的……是什么？‎ ‎②Which is the best……?最好的……是哪个？‎ ‎③Who/What do you think is the funniest……？你认为谁/什么是最有趣的 ‎④It’s the most……?它是最…….‎ ‎⑤It’s worse than…….它比……更差。‎ ‎⑥The funniest performer is……。最有趣的表演者是……。‎ ‎4.success 【U.N】.成功，反义词是failure,失败。‎ ‎ 【C.N】成功的人或事.‎ a great success 意为“非常成功”‎ 如：The party was ________ ________ ______ 这次聚会非常成功。‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ ‎1、本页生词自学 have…in common 有相同特征 ‎ all kinds of各种各样；各种类型 be up to是…….的职责；由…….决定 ‎ play a role发挥作用；有影响 make up编造 ‎ for example例如 take…seriously认真对待 ‎2、单元单词复习：朗读、记忆、抽写 ‎3、句型总结：‎ It has the biggest screens.‎ The DJs choose songs the most carefuuly.‎ How do you like it so far? 到目前为止，你认为它怎么样？‎ Thanks forget telling me.‎ Can I ask you some questions?‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ ‎1、单元短语总结：‎ so far 到目前为止，迄今为止 no problem 没什么，别客气 have….in common 有相同特征（想法、兴趣等方面）相同 ‎ ‎ be up to 是….的职责 all kinds of ….. 各种各样的…… play a role 发挥作用，有影响 make up 编造（故事、谎言等） for example 例如 take …..seriously 认真对待 not everybody 并不是每个人 close to 离….近 more and more 越来越……‎ ‎2、重点语法句子回顾：‎ What’s the best movie theater to go to ? ‎ ‎ Town Cinema. It’s the closest to home. And you can buy tickets the most quickly there?‎ Which is the worst clothes store in town? ‎ Dream Clothes. It’s worse than Blue Moon. It has the worst service.‎ What do you think of 970 AM? ‎ ‎ I think 970 AM is pretty bad. It has worst music.‎ ‎3、完成3b 187‎ 用本单元学过的句型描述自己的小镇最好的地方：电影院、服装店、餐馆、电视台 组内交流小镇最好的地方 全班交流小镇最好的地方 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ ‎1、完成3a ‎1、读方框里的单词并明确其含义和用法 ‎2、朗读3a短文，完成任务 ‎3、检查答案 ‎4、大声朗读3a短文，体会形容词副词最高级的用法 ‎2、用括号里的词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1. We went to the __________(bad) restaurant in town last night. The menu had only 10dishes and the service was not good at all.‎ ‎2. Blue Moon is _____(good), but Miler’s is ________(good ) in town.‎ ‎3. The Big Screen is __________(expensive) than most cinemas, but Cinema City is _________(expensive).‎ ‎4. Movie City has the _______ (bad) service, but we can sit the________ (comfortably)there.‎ ‎5. Johnny Dep acted the ____________(good) in that movie. He’s much ______(good) than other actors at finding the __________(interesting) role.‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ 完成Self Check ‎ ‎1. Fill in the blanks with the superlative forms of the words in the box.‎ good cheap popular comfortably bad ‎1. Dumpling House is_______ restaurant in the city. You can get a big plate of dumplings for only five yuan.‎ ‎2. Spring Park is_______ place in the city on weekends. Many families go there with their young children. Lots of old people like to take walks there, too.‎ ‎3. You can rest _______ at Flower Hotel. Their rooms are clean and big.‎ ‎4. 109.9 FM plays_______ music. The songs are always boring and too loud.‎ ‎5. PEP High School is _______ school in this town. They have big classrooms, fantastic teachers and an excellent sports center.‎ 朗读句子，填空 检查答案 个别句子提示 ‎2. Read the information. Then correct the mistakes.‎ A movie ticket at Town Cinema is $12.00. It is $10.50 at Screen City, and $10.00 at Movie World.‎ Screen City is always very crowded. Many people go to Movie World, too. But you can always get a ticket at Town Cinema. ‎ The seats at Movie World are very comfortable. The seats at Screen City are a little hard. The Town Cinema seats are very uncomfortable.‎ Movie World is the most expensive.‎ Screen City has the cheapest tickets.‎ Town cinema is more popular than Screen City.‎ Movie World is the most popular.‎ Town Cinema has the most comfortable seats 187‎ 朗读句子，完成任务 检查答案 个别句子提示 ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎【课 题】‎ Unit5 Do you want to watch a game show?‎ Section A 1a—1c ‎【学习目标】‎ ‎1．会读背单词：news, educational, plan, hope, discussion, stand, talent show, learn …from…., plan/hope to do sth.‎ ‎2．谈论各类电影和电视节目的名称。‎ ‎3．句型： ---- What do you think of game shows? ‎ ‎---- I like them. / I love them. / I don’t like them. / I can’t stand them. /I don’t mind them. ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】‎ 学会询问他人对某事物的观点并会正确表达自己的看法。‎ ‎---- What do you think of game shows? ‎ ‎---- I like them. / I love them. / I don’t like them. / I can’t stand them. /I don’t mind them. ‎ ‎【学法指导】 ‎ 主动读记单词、自觉捕捉听力中的关键词、听后跟读、读用重点句型 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 导入（启发探究 3分 Do you like to watch TV?‎ Yes ,I do .‎ What kind of TV program do you know Guide students to say some TV programs.‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ 预习指导 ‎1．预习33页单词，并理解意思。‎ ‎ 1.个人自读，记忆单词．‎ ‎ 2.小组互相检查读、写情况．‎ ‎ 3 .写出下列单词并展示．‎ ‎ 计划_________ 希望__________ 预料__________ 忍受___________‎ ‎ 情景喜剧_____________ 新闻___________肥皂剧________________‎ ‎ 4.在小组内核对答案.‎ ‎ 5.完成1a 将单词与图画匹配.‎ ‎2．将1a中单词与图画匹配。‎ ‎（二）预习检测 ‎1．同桌互相提问短语。‎ ‎2．把1a词组译成汉语。‎ ‎1. talk show 5. game show ______ ‎ ‎2. soap opera 6. talent show ______‎ ‎3. sports show ______ 7. news ______‎ 187‎ ‎4. sitcom ______‎ ‎3．两人一组合作练习1c。 ‎ ‎----What do you want to watch?‎ ‎----What do you think of talk shows?‎ ‎----They’re OK .-I don’t mind them.‎ ‎----Then let’s watch a talk show.‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ ‎1、完成1b听力练习，了解马克对电视节目的看法。‎ 认真听1b；‎ 完成1b听力练习；‎ 检查答案；‎ 跟读听力材料；‎ 自读听力材料。‎ ‎2、两人一组合作练习1c, 要求用其他词语替换练习。 ‎ ‎ A：What do you want to watch?‎ B：What do you think of…‎ A: …‎ B: Then let’s watch…‎ ‎3、两人一组全班表演1c。‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ ‎（一）1b是马克对电视节目的看法，1c是自己的看法。‎ 对比人称变化后，谓语动词的变化： ‎ 讨论如何询问第三人称喜好和计划的句型 ‎(1)A: What does he think of…? (2)A: What does he plan to watch?‎ B: He loves it./He likes it./ … B: He plans to watch … ‎ ‎（二）What do you think of…?‎ ‎=How do you like…?你认为…怎么样?/你觉得…怎么样?‎ ‎（三）下列各句均有一处错误，请找出并改正。‎ ‎1. He don’t mind the wallet. ____________‎ ‎2. I don’t have a watch, a scarf and sunglasses.____________‎ ‎3. Each student in our school wear a uniform.____________‎ ‎4. I often watch sitcoms, so I like them. ____________‎ ‎5. How does your mother think of the belt? ____________‎ ‎（四）汉翻英 ‎1.你认为肥皂剧怎么样？_____do you____ _____ ____ _____?‎ ‎2.我无法忍受。太令人厌烦了。I_______ ______ it. It’s too boring.‎ ‎3.他很喜欢数学课，很有趣。He_____ math classes. They are _______.‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ 选择 ‎（1）He wants the game show.‎ A. watch B. see C. to watch D. to see ‎（2）What do you the sports show? ---It’s great!‎ A. think B. like C. think of D. look like ‎（3）I the sitcom. It’s too long.‎ 187‎ A. like B. don’t mind C. can’t stand D. love ‎（4）Can you help me what time the train leaves?‎ A. find out B. look for C. watch D. see ‎（5）I like watching news. I want to know what is around the world.‎ A. go on B. goes on C. going on D. went on 补全对话 A. the game show B. don’t like C. around D. think of E. interesting A: It’s time for news! Turn on the TV!‎ B: What do you 1 news?‎ A: I think it’s important. It can tell me what is going on 2 the world.‎ B: I 3 it. I think it is too boring.‎ A: What do you plan to watch?‎ B: Game show. It’s 4 .‎ A: Ok. Let’s watch 5 after the news.‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【课 题】 Unit5 Do you want to watch a game show?‎ Section A 2a—2c ‎【学习目标】‎ ‎1．会读背单词：news, educational, plan, hope, discussion, stand, talent show, learn …from…., plan/hope to do sth.‎ ‎2．谈论各类电影和电视节目的名称。‎ ‎3．句型： ---- What do you think of game shows? ‎ ‎---- I like them. / I love them. / I don’t like them. / I can’t stand them. /I don’t mind them. ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ ‎1、学会制定计划的表达。‎ ‎2、Do you plan to watch the news tonight? ‎ ‎【学法指导】 ‎ 主动读记单词、自觉捕捉听力中的关键词、听后跟读、读用重点句型 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 一、导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ ‎1、练习下列对话 ‎----What do you want to watch?‎ ‎----What do you think of talk shows?‎ ‎----They’re OK .-I don’t mind them.‎ ‎----Then let’s watch a talk show.‎ ‎2、翻译下列句子 ‎1.我每天晚上看新闻。 ‎ ‎2. 他不喜欢情景剧。 ‎ ‎3. 他希望看体育节目。 ‎ 187‎ ‎4. 我们不喜欢肥皂剧。 ‎ ‎5.我认为我们能从游戏节目上学到很多。‎ ‎ ‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ 认读并书写本课单词 ‎ 1.个人自读，记忆单词．‎ ‎ 2.小组互相检查读、写情况．‎ ‎ 3 .写出下列单词并展示．‎ 脱口秀 肥皂剧 游戏节目 ‎ 体育节目 才艺表演 不喜欢 ‎ 不介意 不能忍受 ‎ 询问第三人称喜好和计划的句型 ‎(1)A: What does he think of…? ‎ B: He loves it./He likes it./ … ‎ ‎(2)A: What does he plan to watch?‎ B: He plans to watch … ‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ ‎1、2人一组朗读2a单词，明确汉语。‎ 听录音，完成2a将听到的电视节目排序并相互核对答案。‎ ‎______sitcoms _______news ‎_______game shows _______talk shows ‎_______soap operas ‎2、听录音，完成2b部分的句子并相互核对答案。‎ ‎1. Sally likes to watch________. ‎ ‎2. Lin Hui thinks she can learn ________ from sitcoms. ‎ ‎3. Sally thinks________ are more educational than sitcoms. ‎ ‎4. Sally loves________. She plans to watch Days of our Past. ‎ ‎3、跟读听力材料；‎ ‎4、自读听力材料。‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ ‎1、完成3c，学会制定计划的表达。‎ A: Do you plan to watch the news tonight? ‎ B: Yes. I like watching the news. I watch it every night. ‎ A: Why? ‎ B: Because I hope to find out what’s going on around the world.‎ ‎2、朗读3c对话；‎ ‎3、表演3c对话；‎ ‎4、不定式做宾语的用法及练习。‎ 动词不定式是由“不定式符号to+动词原形”‎ 187‎ 构成的一种非谓语动词结构。有些动词不定式不带to，动词不定式可以作句子的主语、表语、宾语、定语、补语、状语或单独使用。不定式保留动词的某些特性，可以有自己的宾语、状语等。动词不定式和它后面的宾语、状语等一起构成短语，叫作不定式短语。‎ ‎1、动词不定式（短语）可以放在一些动词后面用作宾语，能以动词不定式作宾语的动词有：begin,start, want, forget, remember, show, learn, like, hate, love, ask等。例：     I want to tell you a story. 我想给你讲个故事。 They begin to work at eight every morning.他们每天早晨8点开始工作。     Don’t forget to lock the door.别忘了锁门。     Would you like to go and have a picnic with us tomorrow?     明天和我们一起去野餐好吗？    ‎ ‎2 *如果and连接两个动词不定式，第二个动词不定式一般省“to”例：    （1）He wants to go and have a swim with us.     他想和我们一起去游泳。    （2）若作宾语的动词不定式（短语）很长，可用it作形式宾语。     I find it interesting to learn English with you.     我觉得和你一起学英语很有趣。     He found it hard to catch up with others.     他觉得赶上别人很困难。‎ ‎3.动词decide, know, learn, show, teach, tell...，介词结构on...可用疑问词带to的不定式短语作宾语，但why后面的不定式不带to。如：‎ ‎1)Could you please tell me where to park my car?‎ ‎2)It gives advice on what to do in lots of different situations. ‎ 练习 Don’t forget to bring your dictionary. 不要忘记把你的字典带来。‎ ‎ He can’t afford to buy a car. 他买不起小汽车。‎ I need to fetch a tape from a friend. ‎ 我需要去一个朋友处取一盒磁带回来。‎ We’ve decided to put on a short play next week. ‎ 我们决定下一周演一个小话剧。‎ Once you start to smoke, you cannot easily give it up. ‎ 一旦你抽上了烟，你就不容易戒掉。‎ I really like to watch football matches. 我非常喜欢看足球比赛。 ‎ How I wish to see my old friends again. ‎ 我多么想再见到我的老朋友啊！‎ I found it impossible to answer all the questions within the time given. ‎ 我发现在限定的时间内回答所有的问题是不可能的。‎ She thought it unnecessary to argue with him about it. ‎ ‎ 她觉得没有必要和他辩论这问题。‎ He made it a rule only to speak English in class. ‎ 他规定课上只能说英语。‎ I find it necessary to speak about our shortcomings. ‎ 我觉得有必要谈谈我们的缺点。‎ 187‎ She feels it hardly to help others. 她认为帮助别人是她的责任。‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ ‎（一）根据汉语，写出英语。‎ ‎1.认为，想到 2.游戏节目 ‎ ‎3.肥皂剧，连续剧： 4.体育节目 ‎ ‎5.不能忍受 : 6.不介意 ‎ ‎（二）根据句意及所给的首字母或汉语提示, 完成单词拼写。‎ ‎1. —What do you t____________ of your English teacher?‎ ‎—We love her very much.‎ ‎2. I can’t s____________ soap operas. They’re boring.‎ ‎3. He doesn’t ____________ (介意) sitcoms.‎ ‎4. In f____________, I’m a little hungry now.‎ ‎5. There is ____________ (没有什么) in the box but a ring.‎ ‎6. I don’t like sports shows. How a____________ you?‎ ‎7. —Do you like ____________ (文化) China?—Yes, I do.‎ ‎（三）单项选择 What _____ Maria think of Ann? A.does B.do C.is Henry doesn’t like the movie, I don’t _____.‎ A.too B.either C.also ‎--Do you enjoy _____ to classical music? --Yes, I do.‎ A.listening B.listen C.listens I don’t like Jackie. _____, I don’t like action movies.‎ A.In fact B.At fact C.On fact The sports report is really boring. I can’t _____ it.‎ A.mind B.like C.stand My friend bought new earrings. She likes _____ very much.‎ A.it B.them C.me ‎--What do you _____ the ring?-I like the ring.‎ A.think of B.like C.think I like this watch. _____ your brother?‎ A.Do B.Does C.What about ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【课 题】‎ Unit5 Do you want to watch a game show?‎ Section A 2d ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1．会读背单词：news, educational, plan, hope, discussion, stand, talent show, learn …from…., plan/hope to do sth.‎ 187‎ ‎2．谈论各类电影和电视节目的名称。‎ ‎3．句型： expect to V hope to be ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ ‎1、学会询问他人对某事物的观点并会正确表达自己的看法。‎ ‎3、动词不定式用法 expect to V hope to be ‎ ‎【学法指导】 ‎ 主动读记单词、自觉预习对话、背诵对话、读用重点句型 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 一、导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ A：What do you want to watch?‎ B：What do you think of…‎ A: …‎ B: Then let’s watch…‎ ‎----What do you want to watch?‎ ‎----What do you think of talk shows?‎ ‎----They’re OK .-I don’t mind them.‎ ‎----Then let’s watch a talk show.‎ 提前检测On-line.连线 ‎    （1）实话实说                      A. Outlook English ‎    （2）健康之路                      B. Man and Nature ‎    （3）人与自然                      C. Sports World ‎    （4）周末聊天室                    D. Tell it like it is!‎ ‎    （5）体育世界                      E. Road to Health ‎    （6）中国烹饪                      F. Law of Today ‎    （7）世界各地                      G. Chinese Cooking ‎    （8）幸运52                        H. Weekend Chat ‎    （9）希望英语                      I. Lucky 52‎ ‎    （10）今日说法                     J. Around the World 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ ‎1、生词预习：‎ 朗读单词，记忆汉语；‎ 拼写单词，记住单词形式。‎ hope [həʊp] .希望；期望；盼望 n.希望 ‎ discussion [dɪ'skʌʃn] n.讨论；谈论　 ‎ stand [stænd] v.站立；忍受　‎ happen ['hæpən] vi.发生；碰巧；出现；偶遇　 ‎ may[ meɪ] aux.可以，能够；可能，也许 expect[ɪk'spekt] v.预期；期待；盼望 ‎ 187‎ ‎2、预习2d对话 听2d对话，注意语音、语调、停顿；‎ 朗读2d对话，模仿语音、语调、停顿；‎ 朗读2d对话，并会翻译。‎ 朗读2d对话，并勾画短语。‎ had a discussion about TV shows.‎ ‎ I can’t stand them. ‎ ‎ like to follow the story see what happens next. ‎ ‎ I don’t mind soap operas. ‎ may not be very exciting,‎ ‎ expect to ‎ learn a lot from them. ‎ ‎ hope to be ‎ one day. ‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ 朗读2d对话：‎ 小组认真听2d对话，提醒对方注意语音、语调、停顿；‎ 小组大声朗读2d对话，看谁的语音、语调、停顿最好准备全班朗读；‎ 小组代表在全班大声朗读2d对话 小组分角色大声朗读2d对话 替换部分词组再分角色大声朗读2d对话 小组抽背2d对话 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ 不定式运用 ‎1、like to V be ‎ like doing和like to do 可以互换 当表示喜欢某事物，而且以前就喜欢，还可能持续，用like doing ，如：He likes cooking in his house. She likes singing.这些都可以表示一个人长期的爱好。‎ like一词具有多种词性和词义，以及多种用法。现简述如下： ‎ 一、用作动词： ‎ ‎1.like+名词/代词，意为"喜欢某人或某物"。例如： ‎ Tom likes fish very much.汤姆非常喜欢鱼。 ‎ Mr Wang is a good teacher.We all like him. 王老师是个好老师，我们都喜欢他。 ‎ ‎2.like to do sth. 意为"(偶尔或具体地)喜欢做某事"。例如： ‎ I like to swim with you today.今天我喜欢和你一起去游泳。 ‎ ‎3.like doing sth. 意为"(经常或习惯地)喜欢做某事"。例如： ‎ He likes singing.他喜欢唱歌。 ‎ ‎4.like sb. to do sth.意为"喜欢某人做某事"。例如： ‎ She likes them to ask questions like this. 她喜欢他们像这样问问题。 ‎ ‎5.would like to do sth. (=want to do sth.)意为" 想要做某事"。例如： ‎ I'd like to go shopping with you.我想要和你一起去买东西。 ‎ 187‎ ‎6.would like sb. to do sth.意为"想要某人做某事"。 ‎ I'd like you to meet my parents.我想要你见见我的父母亲。 ‎ 二、用作介词： ‎ ‎1. be like, look like后接名词或代词作宾语，意为"像……；跟……一样"。例如： ‎ What is he like? 他是怎么样的一个人？ ‎ The little girl looks like her father.那个小姑娘看起来像她的父亲。 ‎ ‎2. feel like后接V?鄄ing形式、代词或名词，意为"想要做某事"。例如： ‎ Do you feel like having a rest? 你想休息吗？ ‎ We'll go for a walk if you feel like it.如果你想散步，我们就去吧。 ‎ ‎2、expect to V be 请读下面的句子，注意expect的用法。‎ ‎1. I expect a snowstorm. ‎ ‎ 我预计会有一场暴风雪。‎ ‎2. The old man is expecting his daughter’s visit. ‎ 这个老人盼望着他女儿的到访。‎ ‎3. I expect to get a birthday present from my dad. ‎ 我期待着收到一件来自父亲的礼物。‎ ‎4. Do you expect him to teach you English?‎ 你希望他教你英语吗？‎ ‎5. I didn’t expect that you would get there so soon. ‎ 我没想到你会这么快就到达那里了。‎ ‎【及时归纳】‎ ‎ expect是及物动词，意为“预料，盼望”，它有以下常见用法：‎ ‎1. expect + n. / pron. 预计……可能发生；期待某人或某物 ‎ ‎2. expect + to do sth. 料想做某事 ‎ ‎3. expect sb. to do sth. 期望某人做某事 ‎ ‎4. expect + 从句 预计 / 料想…… ‎ ‎【趁热打铁】‎ 请根据汉语意思完成英语句子，每空一词。‎ ‎1. 李明的妈妈没有料到会得到那种答复。‎ Li Ming’s mother did not __________________. ‎ ‎2. 他叔叔预计3月15日可以种完这些树。‎ His uncle expected __________________ planting these trees by March 15. ‎ ‎3. 我希望你能更加努力地学习英语。‎ I expect __________________ even harder at your English. ‎ ‎4. 我预计我爸爸会给我买一本英汉词典。 ‎ I expect __________________ will buy me an English-Chinese dictionary.‎ ‎3、hope to V be hope 一词意为“希望”。在使用时应该注意以下几点： 1. 从说话语气上看，hope 用于表示可能实现的事情，后接从句时，用陈述语气。如： I hope I shall see him again. 我希望再见他一次。 I hope you haven't hurt yourself. 但愿你没有受伤。 2. 从含义上看，hope 多用于指对好事的盼望、预想;对坏事的预想则多用“I'm afraid...”。如： I hope it will be fine tomorrow. 我希望明天天气好。 ‎ 187‎ I'm afraid it will rain again. 恐怕还要下雨。 3. 从时间上看，hope 所希望的一般指将来或现在的事情，不用于指过去的事情。如： I hope he will come. 我希望他会来。 4. 从句型上看，hope 可用hope to do sth句型，而不能用hope sb to do sth句型。如： I hope to watch the football match again. 我希望再看一次那场足球赛。 而不说：I hope you to go. 最后，当你要表示“希望如此。”时，就说“I hope so.”其否定形式用“I hope not.”。hope 一般不用于进行时。 hope后面还可以接that 从句，意为“希望……；能……就好了”。如： She hopes that I will pass the exam. 她希望我能通过考试。 与hope有关的几个词组： in the hope of sth 怀着……的希望 live in hope(s) of 满怀希望 hope for the best 希望获得最好的结果 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ 单项选择 ‎( ) 1. -- ______ do you like it? --- Very much.‎ ‎ A. How B. What C. Why D. When ‎( ) 2. --- What ____ she think of the book? ---- She loves it.‎ ‎ A. do B. is C. was D. does ‎ ( ) 3. I like soap operas, she likes ______, too.‎ ‎ A. it B. they C. them D. the ones ‎( ) 4. Do you mind _______ the windows?‎ ‎ A. to open B. opens C. opening D. opened ‎( ) 5. I don’t like Mr Bean. ______, I don’t like comedies.‎ ‎ A. In fact B. I’m sorry C. Really D. Because ‎ ( )６. ---______ going shopping this weekend?‎ ‎ ---- That sounds great.‎ ‎ A. Why don’t you B. Please C. Let’s D. What about ‎ ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ ‎ Unit5 Do you want to watch a game show?‎ Section A 3a—3c ‎【学习目标】‎ ‎1.学会谈论自己的喜好,并准确表达对电视节目的看法。‎ ‎2.掌握不定式作宾语的用法。‎ ‎3. 学会制定计划的表达。‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】‎ ‎1、学会询问他人对某事物的观点并会正确表达自己的看法。‎ ‎---- What do you think of game shows? ‎ 187‎ ‎---- I like them. / I love them. / I don’t like them. / I can’t stand them. /I don’t mind them. ‎ ‎2、学会制定计划的表达。 ‎ ‎【学法指导】‎ 主动读记单词、自觉背诵grammar focus的对话、读用重点句型 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ A: Do you plan to watch the news tonight? ‎ B: Yes. I like watching the news. I watch it every night. ‎ A: Why? ‎ B: Because I hope to find out what’s going on around the world.‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ ‎1、朗读Grammar Focus句子，并明确句子含义。‎ Do you want to watch the news? Yes, I do./ No, I don’t. ‎ What do you think of talk shows? I don’t mind them./ I can’t stand them!/ I love watching them! ‎ What do you plan to watch tonight? I plan to watch Days of Our Past.‎ What can you expect to learn from sitcoms? You can learn some great jokes. ‎ Why do you like watching the news? Because I hope to find out what’s going on around the world. ‎ ‎2、汉译英 ‎（1）我们开展了有关电视节目的大讨论。We a the TV shows.‎ ‎（2）我不能忍受体育节目。I the sports shows.‎ ‎（3）他希望有一天能成为一名电视台记者。He be a TV reporter.‎ ‎（4）你觉得肥皂剧怎么样？What do you the soap opera?‎ ‎（5）他计划今天晚上看什么电视节目？What TV show he to watch?‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ 完成3a：‎ ‎1、与同桌朗读3a 句子，并明确对话大意。‎ ‎2、与同桌一起完成3a 句子，相互核对答案。‎ ‎3、与同桌一起大声朗读3a 句子，比比谁读得好。‎ 完成3c：‎ ‎1、小组内互相询问并回答问题 ‎2、填写表格，完成3c。‎ ‎3、根据表格内容组词成句（注意一般现在时态时态和第三人人称。）‎ ‎4、小组派代表向全班报告调查结果。‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ 完成3b，学会制定计划。‎ ‎1、独自回答问题 ‎2、填写表格，完成3b。‎ 187‎ ‎3、根据表格内容组词成句（注意一般现在时态时态和第一人称。）‎ ‎4、将句子连成作文，谢谢自己的看电视计划。学会用plan to 、expect to写句子。‎ ‎5、抽生朗读句子，看谁的计划科学合理。‎ ‎6、将句子抄写在作文本上。‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ 单词want 的用法。 ‎ ‎ 1. want +名词。‎ ‎ 如： (1) “ 我想要我妈妈”这个男孩说。‎ ‎ “ I _______my _________" the boy said. ‎ ‎ (2) 我想要一些草莓。 ____________________________‎ ‎ 2. want ( sb ) + to do sth ‎ ‎ ( 1) 我想去看动作片。 ‎ ‎ I want __________see ____________ movie. ‎ ‎ ( 2) 他想去玩电脑。__________________________________‎ 单选 ‎1.Jim doesn’t like the soap operas at all. He can’t _____ them.‎ ‎ A. love B. stand C. understand D. know ‎ ‎2. -Do you _____ my sitting here?‎ ‎ -Of course not. Have a seat, please.‎ ‎ A. mind B. like C. stand D. want ‎3. Nothing ______ difficult if you put your heart into it.‎ ‎ A. is B. are C. am D. be ‎4.-We have no classes this afternoon. How about _____?‎ ‎ -Good idea.‎ ‎ A. go to the park B. to go to the park ‎ ‎ C. are going to the park D. going to the park ‎5. Welcome back _____ home.‎ ‎ A. to B. at C. in D./‎ 阅读理解 ‎（A）‎ Host:Welcome to 8 o’clock Face to Face. Tonight we are talking to Linda, a 14-year-old girl. Welcome to the show, Linda.‎ Linda:Thank you.‎ Host:Do you like to watch TV?‎ Linda:Yes, I like to watch TV very much.‎ Host:What do you think of soap operas?‎ Linda:Oh, I love them.‎ Host:Me, too. And how about sports shows?‎ Linda:I don’ mind them.‎ Host:Really? And what do you think of sitcoms?‎ Linda:I don’t like them.‎ Host:And talk shows?‎ 187‎ Linda:That’s great! I like them.‎ Host:And what do you think of the game shows?‎ Linda:Oh, I can’t stand them. They’re so boring.‎ Host:OK! That was interesting. Thanks for joining us.‎ 根据对话判断正(T)误(F)。‎ Linda doesn’t like to watch TV.‎ Linda likes soap operas very much.‎ Linda doesn’t mind sitcoms.‎ Linda also likes talk shows.‎ Linda can’t stand game shows.‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【课 题】‎ ‎ Unit5 Do you want to watch a game show?‎ Section B 1a—1e ‎ ‎【学习目标】‎ ‎1.会读背单词和短语：meaningless, action, cartoon, enjoyable, scary movie ‎2.会运用句型描述对其喜好程度：‎ ‎（1）----What does your father think of the watch? ‎ ‎----He doesn’t mind it.‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ 学习如何描述喜欢电影类型的理由。‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ ‎（1）-----do you like watching the news?‎ ‎------ Yes, I do ‎----Why do you like watching the news?‎ ‎-----Because I hope to find out what’s going on around the world.‎ ‎（2）----What does your father think of the watch? ‎ ‎----He doesn’t mind it.‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ 完成1a ‎1、朗读1a单词，并写出其中文。‎ educational serious wonderful relaxing ‎ ‎ meaningless enjoyable exciting boring ‎2、明确这些形容词的用法 位于联系动词后，作表语；‎ 位于名词前，作定语。‎ ‎3、用这些形容词造句。‎ ‎4、完成1a任务。‎ What do you think of these TV shows and movies?‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ 187‎ 小组完成1b、1c 1d ‎1、1b Listen and circle the description words you hear in the box in 1a. ‎ ‎2、1c Listen again. Write down the words John and Mary use to describe the TV shows or movies.‎ ‎3、check the answers in pairs..‎ ‎4、listen and repeat after the tape.‎ ‎5、read the diologue aloud.. ‎ ‎6、talk about John and Mary use the words to describe the TV shows or movies.(1d)‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ 按要求改写句子。‎ Mary loves her belt very much.(对划线部分提问)‎ ‎_____ _____ Mary _____ _____ her belt?‎ Mike is a boy of twelve.(改为同义句)‎ Mike is a __________ boy.‎ Why not have a party?(改为同义句)‎ ‎_____ _____ _____ a party?‎ What do you think of the pen?(改为同义句)‎ ‎_____ do you _____ the pen?‎ I think this picture is beautiful.(对划线部分提问)‎ What _____ you _____ _____ this picture?‎ 阅读理解 My name is Gina. I like comedies very much. But my parents don’t like them. They like documentaries. They don’t think comedies are interesting, and I think comedies are boring. So I never go to the movies with my parents. I often go to the movies with my good friends.‎ John is my friend. Tom Hanks is his favorite actor. He collects the pictures, reports, and movie VCDs of him. But I love Harrison Ford best. He’s old but attractive(吸引人的). My cousin Ann also loves Harrison Ford. Ann and I have many things in common. For example, we both like comedies. And we also like thrillers, though they’re so scary.‎ Gina’s parents like _____.‎ A.comedies B.documentaries C.both A and B Gina thinks documentaries _____.‎ A.boring B.interesting C.fun John _____ Tom Hanks.‎ A.doesn’t like B.can’t stand C.likes Ann _____ Harrison Ford.‎ A.loves B.doesn’t mind C.hates The _____ are scary, but Gina likes them.‎ A.comedies B.action movies C.thrillers 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ ‎（一）根据汉语意思，完成下列句子。‎ ‎1. 你妈妈认为访谈节目怎么样？‎ What does your mother ____________ ____________ talk shows?‎ ‎2. 她从不看体育节目。She ____________ ____________ sports shows.‎ 187‎ ‎3. 你计划看体育节目吗？Do you ________ ________ watch sports shows?‎ ‎4. 妈妈不同意我的想法。My mother doesn’t ____________ __________ me.‎ ‎(二)单选 ‎1. He ________Beijing is very interesting.‎ ‎ A. think B. thinks C. like ‎ ‎ 2. Mark ______a lot about Chinese history.‎ ‎ A. learn B. learns C. think D. thinks ‎ ‎3. —_______pictures does ben like?‎ ‎ — He likes the pictures of Beijing Opear. ‎ A. What kind B. What kind of C. what kinds D. What kinds of ‎4. _______action movies are very interesting.‎ A. China B. Chinese C. The China D. The Chinese ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【课 题】‎ ‎ Unit5 Do you want to watch a game show?‎ Section B 2a—4 ‎ ‎【学习目标】‎ ‎1、会读会背单词:culture, famous, appear, become, rich, successful, might, main, reason, common, film, unlucky, lose, ready, simple, ‎ ‎2、短语：come out, be ready to, a pair of ‎3.学会运用本单元所学句型描述对其喜好程度并客观地评价事物。 ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】‎ 学会运用本单元所学句型描述对其喜好程度并客观地评价事物。 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ ‎1. Do you like to watch cartoons? ‎ ‎2. What is your favorite cartoon?‎ ‎3. Why do you like it?‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ 自学拼读单词和短语，记忆汉语单词 culture ['kʌltʃə(r)] n.栽培；文化；教养 famous ['feɪməs] adj.著名的；有名的　 ‎ appear [ə'pɪə(r)] vi.出现；出版；显得　‎ become [bɪ'kʌm] v.变成；成为　 ‎ rich [rɪtʃ] adj.富有的；富饶的；丰富的　‎ successful [sək'sesfl] adj.成功的；圆满的　 ‎ 187‎ might [maɪt] aux.可能；也许；may的过去式 　‎ main [meɪn] adj.主要的；最重要的 ‎ reason ['riːzn] n.原因；理由　‎ film [fɪlm] n.电影 　 ‎ unlucky [ʌn'lʌki] adj.倒霉的；不幸的；不吉利的　‎ lose [luːz] vt.丢失；失败vi.失败 ‎ ready ['redi] adj.准备好的；乐意的　‎ character ['kærəktə(r)] n.个性；品质；人物； ‎ simple ['sɪmpl] adj.简单的；朴素的；单纯的；笨的 army ['ɑːmi] n.军队；陆军；一大批 ‎ action movie动作片 be ready to愿意迅速做某事 ‎ dress up装扮；乔装打扮 take sb.’s place代替；替换 ‎ do a good job 工作干得好；做得好 ‎ 预习课文 ‎1、朗读课文 ‎2、勾画短语并翻译 think of came out the first cartoon with sound and music In the 1930s One of the main reasons was like a common man tried to face any danger was always ready to try his best see more than just a little mouse fighting bad guys,‎ ‎3、朗读并翻译课文 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ ‎1.小组合作完成2a ‎1. Do you like to watch cartoons? ‎ ‎2. What is your favorite cartoon?‎ ‎3. Why do you like it?‎ ‎2. 小组一起读3a 短文，完成题目要求并核对答案。‎ ‎ 2b Read the passage and complete the time line on the next page.‎ ‎3.小组讨论短文意思,然后全班交流，教师点拨。‎ ‎4．再读3a小短文，完成2c ‎2c Read the passage again and fill in the facts about Mickey.‎ 187‎ ‎ What does he look like? Who created him? What was his first cartoon? Who is his girlfriend? Why is he popular? ‎ Mickey Mouse ‎ ‎5、再读3a小短文，完成2d.‎ ‎1. What is Mickey Mouse a symbol of? What cartoon character is a symbol of Chinese culture? ‎ ‎2. Do you think Walt Disney is a smart man? Why or why not? Do you want to be like him? ‎ ‎3. Why did people want to be like Mickey? Do you want to be like Mickey? Why or why not? ‎ ‎4. Can you think of another cartoon character that is as famous as Mickey? Why is the character popular? ‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ think，think of，think about，think over的区别和用法 ‎1、think单独使用时表示“思考”，接that宾语从句时意为“认为、觉得”。如：‎ He is thinking how to work out the problem．他在思考如何解这道题。 I think I'll take it．我想我会买。 ‎ 当think后面的宾语从句含有否定意义时，通常形式上否定 think，但意义上却是否定宾语从句。如： ‎ I don't think it will rain．我认为不会下雨。 ‎ ‎2、think of意为“考虑到、想到”，后常接代词、名词或动词-ing形式；意为“认为”时，一般用于疑问句中，与what连用。如： ‎ It's good to think of the future．考虑到未来是对的。 He thought of a good plan．他想到一项好计划。 ‎ What do you think of the play？（＝How do you find ／like ／enjoy the play？）你觉得这部戏剧怎么样？ ‎ ‎3、think about可接名词、动词-ing形式或由疑问词引导的不定式或宾语从句，表示“考虑……”。如： ‎ He's thinking about a problem．He has thought about it for a long time．他正在考虑一个问题，他已经考虑了很长时间了。 ‎ Please think about how to tell her the bad news．请考虑一下，如何把这个不幸的消息告诉她。 ‎ He carefully thought about what I said．他仔细考虑了一下我所说的话。 ‎ ‎4、think over意为“仔细考虑”，后接名词或代词作宾语。当后接代词时，应把代词放在over之前。如： ‎ Let me think it over．让我好好想一想。 ‎ Please think over what I have said．请仔细考虑我说的话。‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ My name is Gina. I like comedies very much. But my parents don’t like them. They like documentaries. They don’t think comedies are interesting, and I think comedies are boring. So I never go to the movies with my parents. I often go to the movies with my good friends.‎ John is my friend. Tom Hanks is his favorite actor. He collects the pictures, reports, and movie VCDs of him. But I love Harrison Ford best. He’s old but attractive(吸引人的). My cousin Ann also loves Harrison Ford. Ann and I have many things in common. For example, we both like comedies. ‎ 187‎ And we also like thrillers, though they’re so scary.‎ Gina’s parents like _____.‎ A.comedies B.documentaries C.both A and B Gina thinks documentaries _____.‎ A.boring B.interesting C.fun John _____ Tom Hanks.‎ A.doesn’t like B.can’t stand C.likes Ann _____ Harrison Ford.‎ A.loves B.doesn’t mind C.hates The _____ are scary, but Gina likes them.‎ A.comedies B.action movies C.thrillers ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【课 题】‎ Unit5 Do you want to watch a game show?‎ Section B 3a—3c ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1.复习本单元单词。‎ ‎2、学会写作：客观描述自己及他人对事物的看法及意见。 ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ ‎1.复习本单元单词。 ‎ ‎2、学会写作：客观描述自己及他人对事物的看法及意见。 ‎ ‎【学法指导】 ‎ 及时复习，及时巩固，及时练习 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ ‎ ‎ ‎1. Do you like to watch cartoons? ‎ ‎2. What is your favorite cartoon?‎ ‎3. Why do you like it?‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ 读记本单元单词并完成单词默写表 Unit 5‎ 情景喜剧 n. 　‎ 新闻节目，新闻 n. 　‎ 肥皂剧 　 　‎ 教育的，在教育意义的 adj. 　‎ 打算，计划 v.&n. 　‎ 希望 v.&n. 　‎ 查明，弄清 　 　‎ 讨论，商量 n. 　‎ 187‎ 忍受，站立 v. 　‎ 发生，出现 v. 　‎ 也许，可能，可以 model v. 　‎ 预料，期待 v. 　‎ 笑话，玩笑 n. 　‎ 喜剧，喜剧片 n. 　‎ 毫无意义的，意思不明确的 adj. 　‎ 行动 n. 　‎ 动作影片 　 　‎ 动画片，卡通片 n. 　‎ 文化，文明 n. 　‎ 著名的，出名的 adj. 　‎ 出现 v. 　‎ 开始变得，变成 v. 　‎ 富有的 adj. 　‎ 获得成功的，有成就的 adj. 　‎ 可能，可以 model v. 　‎ 主要的，最重要的 adj. 　‎ 原因，理由 n. 　‎ 电影 n. 　‎ 不幸的，不吉祥的 adj. 　‎ 失去，丢失 v. 　‎ 愿意的，准备好的 adj. 　‎ 愿意迅速做某事 　 　‎ 人物 n. 　‎ 家伙，男人，小伙子 n. 　‎ 装扮，乔装打扮 　 　‎ 代替，替换 　 　‎ 陆军，陆军部队 n. 　‎ 干得好 　 　‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ 小组学习3a ‎1、组长带领阅读3a方框里的单词并明确其含义，写出汉语。‎ fantastic shows action want comes ‎ from played about like exciting plan ‎2、组长带领阅读3a课文并明确短文大意。‎ ‎3、完成空格内容。‎ ‎4、核对答案。‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ 调查 What do you and your partner think of these TV shows or movies? Write description words for each one. ‎ 写作 187‎ 完成3b问题，写出自己的答案。‎ 将提示词语写成完整的句子。‎ ‎3、将写出的几个句子连成作文。‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ 补全对话 A:What day is it today? B:__________Saturday.‎ A:Do you _____________to go to a movie? B: ___________,I do.‎ A:________________kind _______ movies do you like?‎ B: I like action _____________.I ____________it's _____________.‎ A: Good! Let's see __________action movie.‎ B:That sounds ____________________. ‎ 单项选择 ‎ ( ) 1. -- ______ do you like it? --- Very much.‎ ‎ A. How B. What C. Why D. When ‎( ) 2. --- What ____ she think of the book? ---- She loves it.‎ ‎ A. do B. is C. was D. does ‎ ( ) 3. I like soap operas, she likes ______, too.‎ ‎ A. it B. they C. them D. the ones ‎( ) 4. Do you mind _______ the windows?‎ ‎ A. to open B. opens C. opening D. opened 翻译句子.‎ ‎ 1.有关音乐方面的东西,我学到了许多。‎ ‎ I ________ a lot _________music。‎ ‎ 2. 我父亲也喜欢这部电影。 My father _______ ________the movies.‎ ‎ 3.我很喜欢肥皂剧。 I like ________ ________ ________very much.‎ ‎ 4. 我认为这部电影很有趣。 _____ _______this movie is exciting.‎ ‎5. 吉姆认为这是部可怕的恐怖片。Jim _______this is a_________ _________.‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎【课 题】‎ Unit5 Do you want to watch a game show?‎ Section B selfcheck ‎【学习目标】‎ 单元短语复习与巩固 ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ 单元短语复习与巩固 ‎ ‎【学法指导】 ‎ 读记短语---翻译短语---默写短语 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 187‎ 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ ‎ 读记本单元重要语法句子并翻译成汉语 Grammar Focus Do you want to watch the news? Yes, I do./ No, I don’t. ‎ What do you think of talk shows? I don’t mind them./ I can’t stand them!/ I love watching them! ‎ What do you plan to watch tonight? I plan to watch Days of Our Past.‎ What can you expect to learn from sitcoms? You can learn some great jokes. ‎ Why do you like watching the news? Because I hope to find out what’s going on around the world. ‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ ‎1、读记本单元重要短语：‎ find out be ready to dress up take sb. place do a good job ‎ think of game show learn from talk show soap opera go on watch a movie one of….. watch a movie try one’s best ‎ a pair of as famous as look like around the world ‎ have a discussion about one day such as ‎ a symbol of something enjoyable interesting information ‎2、写出以上短语的汉语 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ ‎1、小组轮流读背课文 Grace: What did you do in class today,Sarah?‎ Sarah: We had a discussion about TV shows. My classmates like game shows and sports shows.‎ Grace: Oh, I can’t stand them. I live soap opera. I like to follow the story and see what happens next.‎ Sarah: Well, I don’t mind soap opera. But my favorite TV shows are the news and talk shows.‎ Grace: They may not be very exciting, but you can expect to learn a lot from them. I hope to be a TV reporter one day.‎ ‎2、掌握本单元的语法：动词不定式 let sb. do sth. plan to do sth.‎ hope to do sth. happen to do sth.‎ expect to do sth. How about doing……‎ be ready to do sth. try one’s best to do sth.‎ ‎3、补全对话：‎ A：What do you plan to watch on TV tonight?‎ B: I hope to _______, but I also want to ________. How about you? Do you _______ a talk show or____?‎ A: Oh, I want to ________.‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ ‎1、词语辨析 187‎ ‎.the other, the others, other, others,another 辨析 the other 表示特指两个或者两部份中的另一个或另一部分，可直接单数名词或复数名词。表示两个中的一个……另一个……时，常用one …the other…。例：‎ He has two brothers, one is a teacher, the other is a doctor.‎ There are forty students in our class. twenty-one are girls, the other nineteen are boys.‎ the others 特指某一范围内的其他的（人或物），是the other的复数形式，相当于the other+复数名词。the other + 复数名词 = any other + 名词单数。例：‎ You two stay here, the others go with me. ‎ I’m different from Jeff because I’m louder than the other kids (any other kid) in my class.‎ other 作代词或形容词，可修饰可数名词单数或复数。例：‎ We learn Chinese, Maths, English and other subjects.‎ others 作代词，泛指“其他的人或物”。 例：‎ Some students are doing homework,others are talking loudly.‎ another 泛指同类事物中的三者或三者以上的“另一个”，只能代替或修饰单数可数名词。例：‎ I don’t like this one. Please show me another one. ‎ happen v.发生，一般指偶然发生，主语为事，不能为人。‎ Sth + happens to sb. A traffic accident happened to his elder brother yesterday.‎ Sth + happens + 地点/时间，意为：某地/某时发生了某事 An accident happened on Park Street.‎ happen v，表示“碰巧”，主语可以是人，后常跟动词不定式to,表示“碰巧……”.‎ Sb + happens to do sth.‎ I happened to see my uncle on the street.‎ ‎* take place 意为“发生，举行，举办”，一般指非偶然性事件的“发生”，即这种事件的发生一定有某种原因或事先的安排。例：‎ Great changes have taken place in China.‎ The meeting will take place next Friday.‎ ‎3、expect v. 期待，盼望，预期，后常接四种结构：‎ ‎1)expect + 名词/代词，期待某事/某人，预计……可能发生。‎ I’m expecting Li Lin’s letter.‎ ‎2)expect to do sth. 预计做某事 Lily expects to come back next week.‎ ‎3)expect sb. to do sth.‎ I expect my mother to come back early.‎ ‎4)expect + 从句 预计……‎ I expected that I’ll come back next Monday.‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ ‎.单项选择（每小题1分，共10分）‎ ‎ ( )1."________do you_________sitcoms?"‎ ‎"I love them."‎ 187‎ A.How, think of B.What, like of C. What, think of D.What, like ‎（ ）2.My mother wants me ________.‎ A. help her B.not help her C.not to watch TV D.to not watch TV ‎( )3.Mickey is one of _________ in the world.‎ A. famousest cartoon character B.the most famous cartoon characters B. famousest cartoon characters D. the most famous cartoon character ‎( )4. I don’t like action movies. I think they’re ________.‎ A．boring B．difficult C．interesting D．exciting ‎（ ）5. He even ________ a Beijing Opera artist. ‎ A．want to be B．wants to be C．want is D．is want ‎（ ）6.I don’t mind what _________.‎ A .do you think of me B .do you think of me C. you think of me D. you like of me ‎( )7.I don’t mind _____ the window. .It’s too cold.‎ A, close B. closing C. to close D. closes ‎( )8. .He looks rich. ______, he is very poor.‎ A. But B. However C. While D.Yet ‎( )9.She expect ______ the film Tiny Times directed by Guo Jingming.‎ A. see B. to see C. seeing D. to seeing ‎( )10.Pleasant Goat and Big Big Wolf is _____.‎ A .serous B. meaningless C. enjoyable D. simple A. 根据句意和提示写出单词，使句子完整。‎ ‎1.Mickey Mouse is a f cartoon character.‎ ‎2.If you try you best, you will be . (成功的)‎ ‎3.Jet Li is a great a movie star.‎ ‎4.You don’t look well. What (发生) to you?‎ ‎5.My teacher is funny. She often tells to us.‎ ‎6.Ithink game shows are (更有教育意义) than sitcoms.‎ ‎7.One symbol (在美国的文化中) is a cartoon.‎ ‎8. (在二十世纪三十年代),he made 87 cartoons with Mickey.‎ ‎9. Lei Feng (总是准备) help others.‎ ‎10.Today’s cartoons are usually (不像那么简单) little Mickey Mouse, but everyone still knows and loves him.‎ B.用所给词的正确形式填空。‎ ‎6.People in the west often think that the number thirteen is . (luck)‎ ‎7.The students are having a (discuss) about TV shows.‎ ‎8.I can’t stand (watch) the soap opera.‎ ‎9.My brother with my father (be) going to Shanghai tomorrow.‎ ‎10.He planned (go) to Beijing next holiday.‎ A.根据所给中文提示完成英文句子。‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎【课 题】 Unit 6 I’m going to study computer science.‎ 187‎ Section A（1a---1c）‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1．学习有关职业的单词。‎ ‎2.学会谈论自己或他人的理想和以及谈论实现理想的方式。‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ 学习有关职业的单词。 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ ‎ ‎ A: What do you want to be when you grow up?‎ B: I want to be a basketball player.‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ 认读并书写本课单词 ‎ ‎1.个人自读，记忆单词．‎ ‎2.小组互相检查读、写情况．‎ ‎3 .写出下列单词并展示 医生 工程师 小提琴手 司机 ‎ 飞行员 钢琴家 科学家 厨师 学院 ‎ ‎4.在小组内核对答案.‎ ‎5.根据自己对各种职业的兴趣，将1a 的单词排序。‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ 学会询问对方的理想和实现理想的方式。‎ ‎1.听录音完成1b的填空。 ‎ ‎2. 让学生理解并复述听力对话. 并和你的同学编新对话. ‎ ‎3. 用1a和1b中的信息两人一组练习下面的对话: ‎ A: What do you want to be when you grow up?‎ B: I want to be a basketball player.‎ A: How are you going to do that?‎ B: I’m going to practice basketball every day.‎ 小组调查：询问他人的理想和实现理想的方式。‎ 姓名 理想职业 方式 Li Xin ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ 调查报告：‎ In my group, Li Xin wants to be…. He is going to ….‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ 187‎ ‎1. 总结所学过的有关职业的名词。‎ ‎2. want to+动词原形；be going to+动词原形。‎ 句型转换 ‎1. I want to be a violinist. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ you want to ?‎ ‎2. He is going to practice playing piano every day. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ he going to every day?‎ ‎3. Mary is going to work in New York when she grows up. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ Mary going to when she grows up?‎ ‎4. She is going to Beijing next week. (对划线部分提问)‎ ‎ she going to ?‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ 单项选择 ‎1. He likes basketball very much. He wants to be a(an) when he grows up.‎ A. teacher B. pilot C. basketball player D. cook ‎2. Helen wants a pianist when she .‎ A. be, grow up B. to be, to grow up C. to be, grow up D. to be, grows up ‎3. He is going to for his parents.‎ A. cook B. cooking C. cooks D. to cook ‎ ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【课 题】 Unit 6 I’m going to study computer science.‎ Section A（2a---2c）‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1．学习有关职业的单词。‎ ‎2.学会谈论自己或他人的理想和以及谈论实现理想的方式。 ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ ‎1．学习有关职业的单词。‎ ‎2.学会谈论自己或他人的理想和以及谈论实现理想的方式。 ‎ ‎【学法指导】 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ A: What do you want to be when you grow up?‎ B: I want to be a basketball player.‎ A: How are you going to do that?‎ B: I’m going to practice basketball every day.‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ 187‎ ‎（一）读记单词 ‎1. cook 厨师；烹饪；煮 2. doctor 医生 ‎3. engineer 工程师 4. violinist 小提琴手 ‎5. driver 驾驶员；司机 6. pilot 飞行员 ‎7. pianist 钢琴家 8. scientist 科学家 ‎9. college 学院；大学；高等专科学校 ‎（二） 按要求写出下列单词或短语 学习电脑科技 练习篮球 刻苦学习数学 ‎ 上表演课 长大 电脑编程师 ‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ ‎1、.听录音，圈出2a中表示程晗的理想的图片。‎ ‎2、听录音，完成2b的表格。‎ ‎3、 两人一组,利用上面的俱乐部来练习下面的对话。‎ A: What does Cheng Han want to be?‎ B: He wants to be….‎ A: How is he going to do that?‎ B: He is going to ….‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ be going to+动词原形 be going to的基本用法 be going to是"一般将来时"的一种表现形式，表示将来某个时间将要发生的动作或存在的状态，意思为"打算，将要"。其中"be"会根据主语的人称变化成"is,am,are"等形式。"to"‎ 是"不定式符号"，跟在它后面的动词必须是动词原形。在肯定句中，be going to模样是：主语+be(am / is / are) + going to +动词原形+其它。‎ 如：‎ I am going to work hard this term.我打算这学期努力学习。‎ 否定句要在be的后面加not.‎ I am not going to play football.我不打算踢足球。‎ We are going to have a class meeting this afternoon.‎ 今天下午我们打算开班会。（安排）‎ Look at the black clouds. It's going to rain.‎ 看那些乌云，快要下雨了。（推测）‎ 根据汉语完成句子 ‎1.他打算学习教育。He going education.‎ ‎2.我的表弟想成为一名厨师。My cousin a cook.‎ ‎3.Mary打算去上表演课。Mary is going to .‎ ‎4.你打算什么时候学习医药？ you going to medicine?‎ ‎5.他打算到哪里工作？ He going to ? ‎ ‎6.---你打算今天下午做作业吗？‎ ‎_________ you _________ _________ _________ your homework _________ _________? ‎ ‎7.---学生们准备明天干什么？ ‎ ‎---帮助农民摘苹果。 ‎ ‎---What ________ the students ________ ________ ________ _________? ‎ ‎---They ________ ________ ________ ________ farmers ________ apples. ‎ 187‎ ‎8.瞧那些云彩，要下雨了。‎ Look at the clouds. It _________ _________ _________ _________.‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ ‎1.—How are you going to be ?‎ ‎—I’m going to practice basketball every day.‎ A. a basketball player B. a teacher C. a pianist D. a pilot ‎2. — is he going to be when he ?‎ ‎—He is going to be a computer programmer.‎ A. What, grows up B. How, grows up ‎ C. What, grow up D. How, grow up ‎3. The boy wants to be a(n) . He studies math really hard. ‎ A. writer B. cleaner C. engineer D. artist ‎4. — are you going to move?‎ ‎—I am moving .‎ A. Who, somewhere interesting B. Where, somewhere interesting C. Who, anywhere interesting D. Where, anywhere interesting ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【课 题】 Unit 6 I’m going to study computer science.‎ Section A（2d）‎ ‎【学习目标】‎ ‎1、本课的7个单词和2个短语 ‎ ‎2、Habit----forming: A: What do you want to be when you are grow up？‎ ‎ B: I want to be a doctor.‎ ‎ A: How are you going to do that?‎ ‎ B: I'm going to study medicine at a university.‎ Practising: 熟练 运用本课词汇和句型谈论将来的计划展望 Emotion:谈论自己的人生理想以激励自己的奋斗意识 ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 学习运用(一般将来时)描绘自己的人生理想和表达奋斗的想法 ‎ ‎ ‎【学法指导】 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 导入（启发探究 3分 A: What do you want to be when you grow up?‎ B: I am going to be a writer. Because I like writing.‎ A: How are you going to do that?‎ B: I am going to write articles and send them to magazines and news papers.‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ ‎1、通过自学能掌握本课重点单词和短语 187‎ 单词:‎ 学院；大学；高等专科学校__________ 教育__________ ‎ 药；医学__________ (综合性）大学；高等学府__________ ‎ ‎ 伦敦__________ 文章；论文__________邮寄；发送__________‎ 短语：‎ 确信;对 有把握__________确保；查明__________‎ 学习2d对话 ‎1、个人自读对话，然后回答下列问题并且组内核对答案 A: What does Ken want to be When he grows up?‎ B: __________________________________.‎ A: How is he going to become a writer ? ‎ B:_________________________.‎ A: What do Andy’s parents want him to be When he grows up?‎ B:_________________________.‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ ‎1、组内合作探究学习以下知识点 be good at doing sth.‎ keep on doing sth.‎ want sb. to do sth.‎ be sure about sth.‎ don’t worry make sure try one’s best ‎2、小组内对话，练习谈论自己的理想和实现的方法。‎ 所用句型是：‎ A: What do you want to be when you grow up?‎ B: I am going to be a writer. Because I like writing.‎ A: How are you going to do that?‎ B: I am going to write articles and send them to magazines and news papers.‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ Sure用法 ‎1、feel sure= be sure确信 2、 make sure 弄明白,查明白 3、make sure of 尽力做到,将...弄明白,保证 4、sure about对....确信的 5、sure of确信...的 6、sure of oneself 有自信心 7、be sure of sth / doing sth确信 eg. Can I be sure of a profit if I invest?我要是投资, 肯定能获利吗? 8、be sure to do 肯定,一定会 ‎ 187‎ He is sure to go there if he is free tomorrow.如果他明天有空,他一定会去那里的. 9、be sure that(that可以省略) + 从句 确信 eg. When you start the engine, be sure that the car is in neutral.你在发动引擎时，一定要让汽车处于空档。‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ ‎(一)、补全句子：‎ ‎1、When I grow up,I want to be an e _____________.‎ ‎2、My uncle is a compurter p__________________,he is good at computer.‎ ‎3、Computer s_________________ is Jake's favorite subject.‎ ‎4、Mary's father is an airline p____________.　‎ ‎(二)、用所给动词的适当形式填空：‎ ‎1、Mary _______________(go) fishing with her mother next week. ‎ ‎2、I ___________(meet) a famous actor last Sunday.‎ ‎3、I'm going to _______________（take）some acting lessons in ShangHai.‎ ‎4、When did he stop __________________（hiccup）?‎ ‎5、Tom started ___________________（ride）a bike when he was six years old.‎ ‎6、My brother __________________（take）these photos two days ago.‎ ‎（三）完成对话 A: Kelly, what do you want to be you grow up?‎ B: I _____to be an engineer.‎ A: Wow! _____are you going to do that?‎ B: I’m _____ to study science at a university.‎ A: Hmm ... sounds difficult. _____are you_____ to study?‎ B: I’m going to _____ in New York.‎ A: _____are you going to start?‎ B: I’m going to _____next year.‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【课 题】 Unit 6 I’m going to study computer science.‎ Section A（3a---3c）‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ ‎【学法指导】 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ ‎ ‎ 短语：‎ grow up every day be sure about make sure send…to… be able to the meaning of ‎ different kinds of the meaning of in common at the beginning of ‎ 187‎ ‎ write down have to do with take up hardly ever too…to…‎ 短语用法：‎ want to do sth. be going to + 动词原形 practice doing sth. keep on doing sth.‎ learn to do sth. finish doing sth promise to do sth. help sb. to do sth.‎ remember to do sth. agree to do sth.‎ love to do sth.‎ be going to 的用法 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ ‎1. education 教育 2. medicine 药；医学 ‎3. university (综合性)大学；高等学府 4. London 伦敦 ‎5. article 文章；论文 6. send 邮寄；发送 连词成句 ‎1、you, do, this, year, to, what, going, are ?‎ ‎___________________________________________________________‎ ‎2、piano, brother, take, and, to, going, I, my, lessons, are .‎ ‎___________________________________________________________‎ ‎3、you, do, to, get, part-time, a, want, job ?‎ ‎___________________________________________________________‎ ‎4、many, kids, parents, their, want, with, to, better, communicate .‎ ‎__________________________________________________________‎ ‎5、fit, los, keep, of, to, people, want, do, they, sports, because .‎ ‎___________________________________________________________‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ be going to 的用法 be going to + 动词原形——表示将来的打算、计划或安排。常与表示将来的tomorrow, next year等时间状语或when 引导的时间状语从句连用。各种句式变换都借助be 动词完成，be随主语有am, is, are 的变换，going to 后接动词原形。‎ 肯定句： 主语 + be going to + 动词原形 + 其他。‎ He is going to take the bus there.‎ 否定句： 主语 + be not going to + 动词原形 + 其他 ‎ I’m not going to see my friends this weekend.‎ 一般疑问句： Be + 主语 + going to + 动词原形 + 其他 肯定回答： Yes, 主语 + be. 否定回答： No, 主语 + be not.‎ Are you going to see your friends this weekend? ‎ ‎ Yes ,I am. / No, I’m not.‎ 187‎ 特殊疑问句： 疑问词 + be + 主语 + going to + 动词原形 + 其他？‎ What is he going to do this weekend? ‎ When are you going to see your friends?‎ 根据中文完成句子 ‎1、他不会在那儿。He _____ going to _____ there.‎ ‎2、她不想成为一名篮球员。She _____ want to be a basketball _____.‎ ‎3、我将做我想做的事。I’m going to _____ _____ I want to do.‎ ‎4、他们打算搬到某个有趣的地方。‎ They are going to _____ somewhere _____.‎ ‎5、我想成为一名时装杂志的记者。‎ I want to be a _____ for a fashion magazine.‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ What do you want to be when you grow up? ‎ ‎-----I want to be an engineer.‎ How are you going to do that? ‎ ‎----- I’m going to study math really hard.‎ Where are you going to work? ‎ ‎ -----I’m going to move to Shanghai.‎ When are you going to start? ‎ ‎----- I’m going to start when I finish high school and college.‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ Some children wish to be writers some day. They want to write stories or books for people to read. That's good! It's good to write something for people to read! But they should know that they need to be good readers first before they are really good writers. They should read a lot of books, instead(代替) of watching TV and spending a lot of time playing games when they are free. ‎ There is more fun in reading, you want to look for more books to read. ‎ Before you decide(决定) to be a good writer, you'd better say to yourself, "I must read more and more!" ‎ 根据短文内容，选择正确答案。‎ ‎( ) 31. This article mainly tells us that ________. ‎ A. some children wish to be writers some day ‎ B. it is good to write something for people to read ‎ C. reading can be helpful for us to become a good writer ‎ D. writers like to read more books for fun ‎ ‎( ) 32. Some children want to be writers ________. ‎ A. because they want to be good readers ‎ B. to write stories or books for people to read ‎ 187‎ C. to find good work some day ‎ D. to get more money to keep a family ‎ ‎( ) 33. It's good for children ________. ‎ A. to do a lot of reading B. to watch TV in the evening ‎ C. to have wishes only D. to be good writers right now ‎ ‎( ) 34. Reading can ________. ‎ A. help you to be a good player B. help you write well ‎ C. make you work better D. make you watch more TV at home ‎ ‎( ) 35. From the passage we know that ________. ‎ A. all children like to be writers B. people like to read for children ‎ C. all writers are children D. children need to read more and more books ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【课 题】 Unit 6 I’m going to study computer science.‎ Section B（1a---1e）‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1、Knowing : 本课的3个单词与5个短语 ‎ ‎ 2、Habit----forming: I’m going to ……‎ ‎ I want to ……‎ Practising: 熟练 运用本单元词汇和句型谈论自己的新年愿望 Emotion:通过谈论自己的新年愿望激发自己努力学习 ‎ ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ ‎1、学习运用(一般将来时)描绘自己的人生理想和表达奋斗的想法 ‎2、各种愿望的表达 ‎ ‎【学法指导】 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ ‎ ‎ A: What are you going to do next year?‎ B: Well, I’m going to take guitar lessons. I really love music.‎ A: Sounds interesting. I’m going to learn another foreign language.‎ B: Are you? Great! But foreign languages are not for me.‎ 根据所给汉语用be going to写句子 ‎1. Peter, make a new year resolution________________________________. ‎ ‎2. Lingling, learn to play the piano_________________________________? ‎ ‎3. Tom, get good grades__________________________________________. ‎ ‎4. Henry, get lots of exercise, keep,fit_______________________. ‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ 认读并书写本课单词 ．.‎ 187‎ ‎ 1.个人自读，记忆单词．‎ ‎ 2.小组互相检查读、写情况．‎ 决定，决心_________ 意思__________ 承诺__________ ‎ ‎ 开端_________ 改进，改善_________每周的（地）_______________‎ ‎ 3 .写出下列短语并展示．‎ 学会弹奏钢琴_______________组建足球队__________________‎ 取得好成绩_____________吃更健康的食___________‎ 进行大量锻炼____________________________‎ ‎ 4.在小组内核对答案.‎ ‎ 5.完成1a 将单词与图画匹配.‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ 学习1b对话，谈论自己将来的意向 ‎1、个人迅速朗读对话，并理解意思 ‎2、两人一组练习对话，组内展示 ‎3、用1a中的短语，模仿1b编对话，并在组内交流 A：What are you going to do next year? ‎ B：Well I’m going to take guitar lessons.I really love music. ‎ A：Sounds interesting I’m going to learn a foreign language. ‎ B：Are you? Great! But foreign languages are not for me.‎ Sound interesting 听起来有趣 sound为系动词后面跟形容词。‎ 又如：听起来无聊_______________觉得身体好________________ ‎ 完成1c、1d ‎ ‎1、Listen and circle the resolutions you hear in 1a. ——‎ learn to play an instrument —‎ make the soccer team ——‎ get good grades —‎ eat healthier food ——‎ get lots of exercise ‎ ‎2、再听一遍，听出与打算怎样把决心变为现实。‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ ‎（一）want to be与be going to的句型 ‎（二）根据汉语完成句子 ‎ ‎1. 他不会在那儿。 He ________ going to ________ there. ‎ ‎2. 她不想成为一名篮球队员。 She_______want to be a basketball________. ‎ ‎3. 我将做我想做的事。 I'm going to _______ ________ I want to do. ‎ ‎4. 他们打算搬到某个有趣的地方。 ‎ They are going to ________ somewhere ________. ‎ 187‎ ‎5. 我想成为一名时装杂志的记者。 ‎ I want to be a ________ for a fashion magazine. ‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ ‎1. －What are you doing? ‎ ‎ －I’m ______ my bag, but I can’t ______ it. ‎ A. looking for, look for B. looking for, find ‎ C. finding, look for D. finding, find ‎2. There _____ a wonderful concert at the Town Theatre this Sunday.‎ A. is going to have B. is going to be ‎ C. is having D. is going to having 根据应答语从方框中选出适当的问句补全对话。 ‎ Peter: 1 ? ‎ Linda: I'm going to be a teacher when I grow up. ‎ Peter: 2 ? ‎ Linda: I'm going to work harder in school this year. And I'm going to get a part-time job. ‎ Peter: 3 ? ‎ Linda: I want to put some money in the bank. I'll need money for college. ‎ Peter: 4 ? ‎ Linda: I want to work with computer. ‎ Peter: That sounds great! ‎ A. What are you going to do this year? ‎ B. Linda, what are you going to be when you grow up? ‎ C. What kind of job do you want? ‎ D. Why are you going to get a part-time job?‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【课 题】 Unit 6 I’m going to study computer science.‎ Section B（2a---4）‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1、掌握新单词 able, question, discuss, promise, improve, physical, themselves, ‎ hobby, weekly, meaning ‎ 2、句型 I’m going to …… I want to ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ 句型 I’m going to …… I want to ‎ ‎【学法指导】 ‎ 187‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 一、导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ ‎ ‎ A：What are you going to do next year? ‎ B：Well I’m going to take guitar lessons.I really love music. ‎ A：Sounds interesting I’m going to learn a foreign language. ‎ B：Are you? Great! But foreign languages are not easy for me.‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ 读记单词 ‎1. question 表示疑问；怀疑；提问2. meaning 意义，意思 ‎ ‎3. discuss 讨论，商量4. promise 承诺，诺言；许诺，承诺 ‎5. beginning 开头；开端6. improve 改进；改善 ‎7. physical 身体的8. self-improvement 自我改进；自我提高 ‎9. hobby 业余爱好10. weekly 每周的(地)‎ ‎11. schoolwork 学校作业 写出下列短语 承诺____________能够做某事__________________‎ 在„„开始的时候__________________ 改进____________‎ 写下__________________身体的____________‎ 业余爱好____________ 学着做，开始做_____________‎ 关于，与„„有关系_________________新年决心_____________________‎ 做出承诺__________________‎ physical health____________________ discuss sth. with sb.____________‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ read and learn 2b 快速阅读2b，找出中心句；‎ 快速阅读2b，划出短语并记忆；‎ 仔细阅读2b，理解课文含义；‎ ‎4、仔细阅读2b，完成课后任务 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ ‎1 promise vt. 保证，许诺。有三种结构：‎ ‎1)promise to do sth. _____My mother promised to buy a piano for me.‎ ‎2)promise sb. sth. _____ My aunt promised me a bike.‎ ‎3)promise + that 从句_____ Tom promises that he can return on time.‎ promise n. 允诺， 诺言 Lily is a dishonest girl. She never keeps a promise.‎ ‎2.when 与 while 的区别：‎ when 表示“当…时候”，既指时间点，又指一段时间，when 引导的时间状语从句中的动词可以是终止性的也可以是延续性的。When the teacher came in, the students were talking.‎ 187‎ When she arrives, I’ll call you.‎ while 表示“当…时候”，仅指一段时间，从句中的动作必须是延续性的，一般强调主从句的动作同时发生， while 还可以作并列连词，意为“ 而、却”，表示对比关系。‎ Lisa was singing while her mother was playing piano.‎ Tom is strong while his younger brother is week. ‎ ‎3. practice vt. 练习， 后接名词，代词或v-ing 作宾语。‎ Your elder sister is practicing the guitar in the room.‎ 常跟v-ing 作宾语的动词有：‎ 考虑建议盼原谅：consider, suggest/advise, look forward to, excuse, pardon.‎ 承认推迟没得想： admit, delay/put off, fancy.‎ 避免错过继续练：avoid, miss, keep/keep on, practice.‎ 否认完成能欣赏： deny, finish, enjoy, appreciate.‎ 不禁介意与逃亡： can’t help , mind, escape.‎ 不准冒险凭想象： forbid, risk, imagine.‎ ‎4. everyday 与 every day 区别 everyday adj. 每天的 在句中作定语，位于名词前。 This is our everyday homework.‎ every day 副词短语， 在句中作状语，位于句首或句末。 He reads books every day. ‎ ‎ ‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ ‎1.—How are you going to be ?‎ ‎—I’m going to practice basketball every day.‎ A. a basketball player B. a teacher C. a pianist D. a pilot ‎2. — does he want to be when he ?‎ ‎—He wants to be a computer programmer.‎ A. What, grows up B. How, grows up ‎ C. What, grow up D. How, grow up ‎3. The boy wants to be a(n) . He studies math really hard. ‎ A. writer B. cleaner C. engineer D. artist ‎4.— My New Year’s resolution is to travel to Qingdao.‎ ‎— .‎ ‎ A. That sounds great B. Sorry to hear that C. Sure D. I’d love to ‎5.—Is she going to be actor?‎ ‎—Yes. She is taking lessons on weekends now.‎ ‎ A. a, actor B. an, actor C. an, acting D. a, action ‎6. —Where is Linda?‎ ‎— She may be at home. But I’m not sure it.‎ A. at B. about C. with D. in ‎7. This is an important problem. Please .‎ A. write it down B. write down it C. write it in D. write in it ‎8. — are you going to visit your uncle?— Next week.‎ A. Where B. Who C. Why D. When ‎9. My grandfather me a postcard from New York last week.‎ 187‎ A. gave B. sent C. passed D. borrowed ‎10. —What is a resolution？—It’s .‎ A. a promise B. an action C. a message D. a letter ‎11. the beginning of the term, my mother bought me a new schoolbag.‎ A. With B. On C. At D. By ‎12.His resolution the life in the next year.‎ A. has to do with B. is good at C. is next to D. cross from ‎13. You are coughing! You should take some . ‎ A. medicine B. meat C. hamburgers D. juice ‎14. I want to go to the movie tonight. But my parents don’t agree me.‎ A. with B. on C. at D. in ‎15. —What’s your ?— I like swimming.‎ A. hobby B. name C. age D. habit ‎ ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【课 题】 Unit 6 I’m going to study computer science.‎ Section B（3a---3c）‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1. 理解本课短文，并能学会写新年计划。‎ ‎2. 复习掌握本单元的单词及短语。‎ ‎3. 熟练运用本单元表示计划的句型.‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ 学会书写新年计划. ‎ ‎【学法指导】 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ ‎ ‎ 句型比赛：每小组一分钟，同学们用want to be与be going to描述计划，看谁的计划多。‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ ‎ 1、自学生词 ‎ 2. 自读3a短文,用方框中的单词完成短文。‎ ‎ 3. 小组合作,翻译短文。‎ ‎ 4. 尝试背诵短文。‎ ‎5.依次完成3b和3c部分，选择一个话题写一份自己的年度计划。‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ 小组合作，完成4部分。‎ 187‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ ‎1. 李伟昨天制定了他的新年计划。‎ Li Wei his New Year’s yesterday.‎ ‎2. 他打算怎样成为一名职业篮球运动员？‎ ‎ is he going to a basketball player?‎ ‎3.最好的决定就是没有任何决心。‎ The best is to have no .‎ ‎4. 我打算努力学习并取得好成绩。‎ I am going to study and good grades.‎ ‎5.下一年你打算做什么？‎ ‎ are you to do next year?‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ Young people have many dreams. Here are Lei Ping and her friends’ dreams. Lei Ping is going to be an actor. She likes acting. She thinks the actors are well-known and they can make lots of money. She is going to take acting lessons. Her friend Yong likes writing. He is going to write articles for the magazines when he grows up. He thinks reading more is good for writing. So he often reads books in the library now. The other friend Li is going to be a teacher. She thinks children are lovely and in the long vacation she can do what she wants to do. ‎ ‎ ( )26.. Lei Ping’s dream is to be a(n) .‎ A. actor B. pilot C. bank clerk D. reader ‎( )27.What does Lei Ping think of the job of actor?‎ A. The actors are well-know. B. The actors can travel anywhere.‎ C. She doesn’t like actors. D. She thinks they are tired.‎ ‎( )28.How is Yong going to achieve his dream?‎ A. He is doing more exercise every day.‎ B. He is writing articles for the magazines.‎ C. He is reading books in the library.‎ D. He is taking writing lessons after school.‎ ‎( )29. Li is Lei Ping’s .‎ A. reader B. cousin C. sister D. friend ‎( )30. These ideas of the young are .‎ A. interesting B. not fit them C. not to be true D. wrong ‎ ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【课 题】 Unit 6 I’m going to study computer science.‎ Section B selfcheck ‎【学习目标】‎ 187‎ 学习计划的表达 ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ 用一般将来时态表达计划 ‎ ‎【学法指导】 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ 读记单词表单短语 ‎1. grow up 长大；成熟；成长 ‎ ‎2. computer programmer 计算机程序设计员；编程人员 ‎ ‎3. be sure about 确信；对……有把握 ‎ ‎4. make sure 确保；查明 ‎ ‎5. write down 写下；记录下 ‎ ‎6. have to do with 关于；与……有关系 ‎ ‎7. take up (尤指为消遣)学着做；开始做 ‎8. agree with 同意；赞成 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ 熟悉掌握本单元单词和短语。‎ ‎1.自读并记忆单词5分钟。‎ ‎ 2.组内练习，相互提问。‎ ‎ 3.回顾总结有关职业和学习科目的单词，完成1部分。‎ ‎4.把更多的词汇补充归纳到1中。‎ ‎5.询问他人理想与计划，完成2部分并分较色朗读。‎ ‎6.尝试写出自己的最近的目标与计划，完成3部分。‎ 重点短语归纳： grow up every day be sure about make sure send…to… be able to the meaning of different kinds of the meaning of in common at the beginning of write down have to do with take up hardly ever too…to…‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ 短语用法： want to do sth. be going to + 动词原形 practice doing sth. keep on doing sth. learn to do sth. finish doing sth promise to do sth. help sb. to do sth. remember to do sth. agree to do sth. love to do sth. be going to 的用法 重点语法归纳： What do you want to be when you grow up? I want to be an engineer. How are you going to do that? I’m going to study math really hard. Where are you going to work? I’m going to move to Shanghai. When are you going to start? I’m going to start when I finish high school and college.‎ 187‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ ‎4) be going to 与 will 的区别： ① 对未来事情的预测用“ will + 动词原形”表达，will 没有人称和数的变化，变否定句要在will 后面加not, 也可用will 后面加 not,或者缩略式won’t, 变一般疑问句将will 提至 句首。 Will planes be large in the future? Yes, they will. / No, they won’t. ②will 常表示说话人相信或希望要发生的事情，而be going to 指某事肯定发生，常表示事情很快就要发生。 I believe Lucy will be a great doctor. ③ 陈述将来的某个事实用will. I will ten years old next year. ④表示现在巨大将来要做的事情用 will. I’m tired I will go to bed. ⑤ 表示意愿用will. I’ll tell you the truth. ⑥ 表示计划、打算要做的事情用 be going to, 而不用 will. I’m going to buy a computer this month. ---Let’s discuss the plan, shall we? ----Not now. I ______ to an interview. A. go B. went C. am going D. was going ------Jack is busy packing luggage. ---Yes. He _________for America on vacation. A. leaves B. left C. is leaving D. has been away 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ 单项选择 He’s going to _____ an engineer when he _____ up.‎ A.do;grow B.do;grows C.be;grow D.be;grows An _____ must take _____ lessons.‎ A.actor;act B.actor;acting C.acting;actor D.acting;act What is he going to do when he _____ some money?‎ A.is going to save B.save C.saves D.will save I’m going to travel _____.‎ A.a place interesting B.a interesting place ‎ C.somewhere interesting D.interesting somewhere That sounds _____.‎ A.like good B.like a good plan C.likes good D.likes a good plan ‎--_____ the Greens going to move?‎ ‎--Maybe Beijing or Shanghai. I’m not sure yet.‎ A.What is B.What are C.Where is D.Where are Mr Brown is an editor. And he finds a _____ job _____ a teacher in our school.‎ A.part-time;as B.part-time;for C.full-time;as D.full-time;for More exercise can help you _____.‎ A.fit B.keep fit C.keep joy D.keep busy ‎--What is your New Year’s _____ ?‎ ‎--I’m going to study a lot.‎ A.exercise B.resolution C.job D.subject I think the exhibiiton will _____ me rich and famous.‎ A.let B.have C.make D.help 187‎ 阅读短文，从A，B，C，D四个选项中，选出可以填入空白处的最佳选项。‎ Kate’s brother Danny 16 some New Year’s resolutions this year. 17 , he is going to learn 18 the guitar. She is going to take the guitar lessons 19 practice every day. Next he wants to get good 20 . He is going to study 21 and he is going to do all his homework 22 he watches TV. Finally, he wants to learn 23 new language. He is going to buy some 24 CDs and practice 25 at home every morning. ‎ ‎( ) 16. A. made B. make C. is make D. making ‎( ) 17. A. First B. Second C. Third D. Last ‎( ) 18. A. play B. playing C. to play D. plays ‎( ) 19. A. but B. or C. then D. and ‎( ) 20. A. lesson B. class C. grades D. record ‎( ) 21. A. harder B. worse C. more beautiful D. cooler ‎( ) 22. A. when B. as C. if D. before ‎( ) 23. A. an B. a C. the D. /‎ ‎( ) 24. A. Japan B. Japanese C. China D. America ‎( ) 25. A. they B. their C. them D. theirs ‎ ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎【课 题】 Unit 7 Will people have robots?‎ Period 1 Section A 1a~1c ‎【学习目标】‎ ‎1.熟练掌握词汇：will, robot, everything, paper, use, fewer, less, pollution ‎2. 熟练掌握以下句型：‎ ‎(1) There will be more pollution.‎ ‎(2) A: Will there be fewer trees? ‎ B: Yes, there will. /No, there won’t.‎ ‎(3)Kids will study at home on computers.‎ ‎(4)People will live to be 200 years old.‎ ‎（5）Really？ I don’t think so ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ ‎1. 学会运用there be句型的一般将来时和will 构成的一般将来时态对未来进行预测。‎ ‎2. 学会运用“more, fewer, less”比较多少。 ‎ ‎【学法指导】 ‎ 预习单词、短语----听后跟读----朗读-----写作模仿 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ I保护自然环境，减少环境污染：‎ ‎ ‎ 187‎ ‎ 近50年来，全球气候变暖、臭氧层破坏、、森林植被锐减、生物多样性减少、酸雨和空气污染、土地荒漠化、水资源危机等一系列环境问题，使人们饱尝了环境恶化的后果。遏制环境污染，实施可持续发展，成为当今世界的最强号召。联合国环境署确定今年世界环境日的主题为“冰川消融，后果堪忧”，旨在控制温室气体排放，以扭转全球气候变暖的危险趋势。‎ Ⅱ. 请用there be句型描述我们的生活现状。‎ 例句：There is a lot of pollution.‎ Ⅲ. 一百年后，世界环境会有什么变化？人们的家居生活会是什么样的？发挥你的想象力，把它们用图画描绘出来。‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ everything (pron.)每件事情，一切 例 1. Everything ___ ok.‎ A. are B. is C.were D.was 例2.There is ___ with my watch.‎ ‎ 我的手表出点毛病 ‎ A.something wrong B.wrong something C.anything wrong D.wrong anything 解析：复合不定代词的用法 ‎①做主语时，谓语动词用第三人称单数。‎ ‎②复合不定代词被形容词修饰时，形容词后置。‎ paper (n.) 纸，试卷 考点：①作“纸”讲时，是不可数名词 ②作“报纸，论文，试卷”时，是可数名词。‎ 例3.Would you like to pass me___ paper?(多)‎ A.a B. a piece of C.two piece of D. two pieces of ‎ 例4. The English teacher is handing out the__ to students.‎ ‎ A.Paper B.a piece of paper C. pieces of paper D. papers ‎1. 书籍将会仅仅在电脑，而不在纸上。 Books _____ only _____ on computers, not _____ paper. 2. 今后在这座城市将会有更多的树木，更少的污染。 There will _____ _____ trees and _____ pollution in the city in future. 3. 五年前萨莉还在上大学。 Sally was _____ college five years _____. 4. 你认为十年后你的朋友会做什么职业？ _____ do you think your friend will _____ _____ ten years? 5. 他们不会去野营。我确信他们将来参加我们的聚会的。 They _____ go camping. They _____ come to our party, I’m sure. ‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ Before listening ‎1. 全班进行讨论，交流展示课前准备Ⅱ的预习成果。‎ ‎2. 全班共同讨论1a对未来的预测，发表自己的观点。将自己课前所画图画在班内展示，讨论出可能性最大的预测，评比最佳预言家。‎ ‎3. Groupwork:小组讨论1a中预测未来的句子在句式结构上有什么共同特点。‎ While listening ‎1. 听1b录音中对未来的预测，完成1b的听力任务。‎ ‎2. 再听一遍1b录音，你听到哪些对将来进行预测的句子？讨论一下吧! 看看谁说的多!‎ ‎3.‎ 187‎ ‎ Pairwork:对于一百年后的预测，哪些可能发生？哪些不可能发生？结合1a内容，两人一组自由讨论。讨论时可借助如下对话形式：‎ ‎(1)A：Will people use money in 100 years? (2)A: Will there be one country?‎ ‎ B: Yes, they will /No, they won’t。 B: Yes, there will./ No, there won’t.‎ 观察与思考：观察以上听力训练中所填词汇，结合1a中预测未来的句子，请你来总结：‎ ‎(1) 表示将来发生的动作或情况应该用___ +____________来表达。其否定形式为___________+____________。你能写出它的疑问句式吗？_______________________‎ ‎(2) There be 句型的一般将来时结构为______________________。‎ 练习：将下列句子译成英文。‎ 一百年后人们将会拥有机器人。‎ People __________ ________robots in 100 years.‎ 每样东西都将会免费吗？‎ ‎__________everything __________ __________?‎ 将来污染会很严重吗？ ‎ ‎__________ __________ __________much pollution?‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ say something about “will”:‎ 今天我向大家介绍另一个一般将来时小精灵"will"。"will"代表一般将来时，他的任务是表示将来某个时间将要发生的动作或存在的状态。‎ ‎　　"will"是个胆小的家伙，不独立使用，总是拉着动词原形跟在自己后面壮胆。而且它没有"be going to"那么变化多端。前面的主语不管是什么人称，他总是保持原形。有时他还偷懒，和主语缩写成'll的形式。‎ ‎　　如：I will->I'll；you will->you'll；he will->he'll ‎ will还和"not"老兄合作表示将来时的否定形式。两人粘在一起，弄成一个怪样子--won't。与will相同，在任何情况下，won't后面动词都要用原形。‎ ‎　　I won't buy a new book.‎ ‎　　will还和is，am，are一样，变一般疑问句时，挺起胸膛在句前一站，句尾写上"？"就OK啦！‎ ‎　　如：-Will you buy a new book?‎ ‎　　-Yes, I will. / No, I won't.‎ 小will很有用吧！‎ ‎　　请用will完成下面的句子。‎ ‎　　1. I _________ (visit) her this Saturday.‎ ‎　　2. _________ you _________ (go) to school tomorrow?‎ ‎　　3. They _________ (not buy) train tickets.‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ 单项选择。 1. —Will people live to be 300 years old? —_________. A. No, they aren't B. No, they won't C. No, they don't D. No, they can't 2. There will be _________ pollution this year than last year. A. fewer B. much C. less D. many 3. I think people here are friendly. Do you agree _________ me? A. with B. to C. on D. from ‎ 187‎ ‎4. —Where is Miss Wang? —She went to Hainan Island last week and will return _________ six days. A. ago B. later C. behind D. in 5. —_________ will they play? —They will play football. A. What subject B. What sport C. What food D. What language ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【课 题】‎ ‎ Unit 7 Will people have robots?‎ Period 2 Section A 2a~2c ‎ ‎【学习目标】‎ ‎1.熟练掌握词汇：will, robot, everything, paper, use, fewer, less, pollution ‎2. 熟练掌握以下句型：‎ ‎(1) There will be more pollution.‎ ‎(2) A: Will there be fewer trees? ‎ B: Yes, there will. /No, there won’t.‎ ‎(3)Kids will study at home on computers.‎ ‎(4)People will live to be 200 years old.‎ ‎（5）Really？ I don’t think so ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ ‎1. 学会运用there be句型的一般将来时和will 构成的一般将来时态对未来进行预测。‎ ‎2. 学会运用“more, fewer, less”比较多少。 ‎ ‎【学法指导】‎ 预习单词、短语----听后跟读----朗读-----写作模仿 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ ‎ ‎ ‎1、请用there be句型描述我们的生活现状。例句：There is a lot of pollution.‎ ‎2、 一百年后，世界环境会有什么变化？人们的家居生活会是什么样的？发挥你的想象力，把它们用图画描绘出来。‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ 拼读单词、记忆汉语、拼写单词 paper['peɪpər] 纸　 pollution [pə'luːʃn] 污染；污染物 ‎ prediction[prɪ'dɪkʃn]预测 future ['fjuːtʃər] 未来　 ‎ pollute[pə'luːt] 污染 environment [ɪn'vaɪrənmənt] 环境　‎ planet ['plænɪt] 行星 earth[ɜːrθ] 　 n.地球；泥土 ‎ plant [plænt] 　种植，植物 part [pɑːrt] 参加，部分　‎ 187‎ peace [piːs]和平 play a part 参与 ‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ 其他人对将来还有哪些预言？听2a录音，选出你所听到的单词。(听录音之前，首先浏览2a各句，明确其含义)‎ ‎(4) 听2b录音，选出你所听到的预言。(听录音之前，首先浏览2b各句，明确其含义。‎ ‎（5） 再听一遍录音，完成下面的对话。‎ Woman: OK, now I want to hear everyone’s predictions about the future.‎ Girl 1: Well, I think there will be ___________ ___________.‎ Woman: More people? OK. What else?‎ Boy 1: I predict that there will be ___________ ___________ ___________.‎ Woman: I hope not!‎ Girl 2: Well, I think there will be ___________ ___________. Woman: You do?‎ Girl 2: Yes, people will use the subways more.‎ Woman: That’s a great idea. Let’s hear another prediction.‎ Boy 2: There will be ___________ ___________.‎ Woman: That will be good for the earth!‎ Girl1: I think there will be _______ _____. I think cities will be really big and crowded.‎ 观察与思考：根据所填内容，请你来总结一下：‎ ‎(1) fewer译为______，是______的比较级，修饰___________(复数/不可数) 名词。‎ ‎(2) less译为_______，是__________的比较级，修饰______ (复数/不可数)名词。‎ ‎(3) more译为______，是_______或______的比较级，修饰_____(复数/不可数)名词 例5.At first, there is ___ water in the cup, after drinking, there is __ water in the cup.‎ ‎ A.few B.a few C.little D.a little 例6. After the heavy rain, __ trees are dry.‎ ‎ A. few B.a few C. little D. a little ‎7. 模仿秀：跟读录音，注意模仿每个人进行预测时的语音语调。‎ After listening ‎1. Pairwork:借助2c的对话形式，结合2b内容，两人一组，练习对话。‎ ‎2. Pairwork: 借助2c的对话形式，结合自己对未来的预测，两人一组，试着做一组新对话。‎ 知识巩固 Ⅰ. 将下列句子译成英语。‎ ‎1. 明天的城市汽车会更少，地铁会更多。‎ There ___________ ___________ ___________cars and _________subways in the city.‎ ‎2. 城市的污染会更少，人口会更多。‎ There _________ ________ __________ _________ more people in the city tomorrow.‎ ‎4. 这位老人非常健康，他可以活到100多岁。‎ The old man is very healthy, he can _________ _________ ________ over 100 years old.‎ Ⅱ. 仿照例句改写句子。‎ ‎1. I feel sick today. (be better tomorrow) I’ll be better tomorrow.‎ ‎2. Gina has six classes today.(have a lot of homework tonight)‎ ‎________________________‎ ‎3. I’m tired now.(sleep later)________________________________‎ ‎4. My parents need a new car. (buy one soon)_________________________‎ 187‎ ‎5. We can’t leave right now. (leave a little later)______________‎ ‎6. The weather is awful today. ________________‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ ‎1. 我们用_________时态对将来进行预测，其结构为________________。当我们说“将会有……”时，我们用_________________。‎ ‎2. 归纳形空词more、fewer和less的用法。‎ 单词 汉意 原型 修饰 ‎ 更多的 many和much 可数名词的复数或者不可数名词 fewer 更少的 ‎ ‎ 更少的 little ‎ 选择正确的词语填空。‎ ‎1. Tom has __________ (few; fewer) Christmas cards than I.‎ ‎2. They believe that there will be __________ (less; fewer) green trees in fifty years.‎ ‎3. He is ill and he can eat ________ (more; less) food, so he gets quite weak.‎ ‎4. The ________ (more; much) we get together, the ________ (happy; happier) we’ll be.‎ ‎5. David has _______ (less; fewer) money than Anna has.‎ ‎3、The difference between “in” and “after”:‎ ‎“in+一段时间” 表示以现在的时间为起点，多久之后 ‎“after+一段时间” 表示以过去或将来某个时间为起点，将过多久 Will people use money in 100 years?‎ I’ll come back in a week.‎ He went to Shanghai yesterday. He’ll come back after a week.‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ We live in computer age (时代). People 1 scientists, teachers, writers and even students use computers to do all kinds of work. But more than 30 years ago, 2 couldn't do much. They were very big and expensive. Very 3 people were interested in them and knew how to use them. Today computers are smaller and 4 . But they can do a lot of work, many people like to use them. Some people 5 have them at home. Computers become very important because they can work 6 than people and make fewer mistakes. Computers can 7 people do a lot of work. Writers now use computers to 8 . Teachers use them to help teaching. Students use them to 9 . Computers can also remember what you 10 them. Computers are very useful and helpful. They are our friends. Do you want to have a computer? 1. A. like B. as C. and D. with 2. A. students B. scientists C. teachers D. computers 3. A. few B. a few C. little D. a little 4. A. cheap B. cheaper C. more expensive D. expensive 5. A. even B. still C. already D. yet 6. A. fast B. faster C. slow D. slower 7. A. help B. make C. stop D. use 8. A. write B. play C. study D. learn 9. A. sing B. study C. dance D. watch 10. A. put in B. put on C. put into D. put up ‎ 187‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【课 题】‎ Unit 7 Will people have robots?‎ Period 3 Section A 2d ‎【学习目标】‎ ‎1.熟练掌握词汇：future，environment，planet，building，play a part，world peace ‎2. 熟练掌握以下句型 ‎(1)In the future，there will be...0‎ ‎(2)A：Will there be... ？ B：Yes，I hope so. ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ ‎1. 学会运用there be句型的一般将来时和will 构成的一般将来时态对未来进行预测。‎ ‎2. 学会运用“more, fewer, less”比较多少 ‎ ‎【学法指导】 预习单词、短语----听后跟读----朗读-----写作模仿 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ ‎.根据实际情况，回答下列问题：‎ ‎1. Which school are you in now? _____________________________________ ‎ ‎2. What do you think the school will be like in the future? ____________________ ‎ ‎3. What’s the city like now？__________________________________________‎ ‎4. What do you think the city be like in the future? ________________________‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ ‎2d学习. ‎ ‎(1)Read the conversation quickly and answer a question.‎ ‎ What is the book that Jill is reading about?‎ ‎(2) Read it carefully and judge the sentences are right or wrong. (R or W)‎ ‎ A. Cities will not be crowded and polluted any more in the future.‎ ‎ B. There will be a lot of trees everywhere and the environment will be beautiful.‎ ‎ C. People will use less water and plant more trees to save the earth in the future.‎ ‎(3) Listen and repeat. The read aloud for 5 minutes to recite ‎(4)Role-play the conversation.‎ 语言点：‎ ‎1.about. prep.关于 It’s a book ____________the future .这是一本关于未来的书 ‎2.move to 搬到.. We have to_______________ other city.‎ ‎3.play a part in （doing） sth. 参与，在..中扮演角色，起作用.‎ ‎ Everyone should play a part in__________________（save） the earth.‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ 小组交流，完成下面的调查表。‎ Name Which school are you in now? What do you think the school will be like in the future? What’s the city like now? What do you think the city be like in the future?‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ ‎. 在你的朋友和家人中展开调查，向他们咨询一下他们对现在成武的城区面貌和生活状况的 187‎ 看法 There are a lot of__________________ (old houses/tall buildings).‎ There is__________________(little/much)pollution There are________________(few/many)people The people live in a _______________(happy/hard)life.‎ 五十年后，成武会有什么变化？发挥你的想象力，把它们用图画描绘出来。‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ 大家都有很多梦想，有很多憧憬，可是在英语中怎样表达它们呢？那就是我们今天要学习的一种时态：一般将来时。 ‎ ‎［一］一般将来时的概念 ‎ ‎　　一般将来时是表示将来某个时间将要发生的动作或存在的状态。例如： ‎ ‎　　I am going to / shall watch a football match on TV this evening. 今天晚上我将看一场足球比赛。 ‎ ‎［二］一般将来时谓语动词形式 ‎ ‎　　一般将来时谓语动词形式可以分为三种： ‎ ‎　　1. 助动词will +动词原形。 ‎ ‎　　2. 助动词shall+动词原形(当主语为第一人称时，英式英语中一般用shall, 其他人称用will)。 ‎ ‎　　3. be going to + 动词原形。 ‎ ‎［三］三种形式间的区别 　　1．用be doing表示将来：主要意义是表示按计划、安排即将发生的动作，常用于位置转移的动词。 　　　 如：go, come, leave, arrive等，也可用于其他动作动词。  　　　 We are having fish for dinner. 　　 　We are moving to a different hotel the day after tomorrow.  　　 　这种用法通常带有表示将来的时间状语，如果不带时间状语，则根据上下 going for a walk. Are you coming with me? 　　 　A: Yes, I am just coming. Wait for me.  　　2．用be going to do表示将来：主要意义，一是表示“意图”，即打算在最近的将来或将来进行某事。  　　　 Are you going to post that letter? 　　　 How long is he going to stay here? 　　　 I am going to book a ticket.  　　　 另一意义是表示“预见”，即现在已有迹象表明将要发生或即将发生某种情况。 　　　 It’s going to rain. 　　　 George is putting on weight, he is going to be quite fat.  　　3. 用will/ shall do表示将来：  　　 　主要意义，一是表示预见。  　　　 You will feel better after taking this medicine. 　　　 Do you think it will rain?  　　 　二是表示意图. 　　 　I will not lend the book to you. 　　 　Take it easy, I will not do it any longer.  ‎ 187‎ ‎　　‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ A lift is very useful. It looks like a small room. It goes up and down all day. Sometimes a worker stands in the lift. He or she operates（操作） it up and down. In modern lifts there's no worker. People walk in. They know what floor they want to go. They push a button(按钮)and the lift goes to that floor. It's very fast and easy. Lifts are very important to us. Why? Think about a tall building. Maybe it has twenty floors. Maybe it has fifty or more. Who can walk up all the stairs(楼梯)?Maybe people can climb them once. Can someone climb thirty floors to an office every day? Can small children walk up to their rooms on the twenty-four floor? Can their mothers or fathers carry food up to all those stairs? Of course not. We can have very high buildings because we have lifts. We could not have all the beautiful tall buildings without lifts. Because it is too tired for people to climb the stairs every day. 根据短文的意思回答问题或完成句子。 1. What is a lift like? ____________________________ 2. What does a worker do when he or she stand in the lift? _____________ 3. Can small children walk up to their room on the twenty-four floor? __________ 4. Why do we have many high buildings? ____________________________________ 5. Can you give a title for the passage? ______________‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【课 题】‎ Unit 7 Will people have robots?‎ Period 4 Section A 3a~3c ‎ ‎ ‎【学习目标】‎ ‎1.熟练掌握词汇：future，environment，planet，building，‎ play a part，world peace ‎2. 熟练掌握以下句型 ‎(1)In the future，there will be...‎ ‎(2)A：Will there be... ？ B：Yes，I hope so. ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ 句型 ‎(1)In the future，there will be...‎ ‎(2)A：Will there be... ？ B：Yes，I hope so. ‎ ‎【学法指导】 预习单词、短语----听后跟读----朗读-----写作模 ‎【教学过程】‎ 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ ‎ ‎ ‎1、They _____(play)football tomorrow.‎ ‎2、The radio says the clouds_____(leave)later on.‎ ‎3、I ______(not leave)until he comes back.‎ ‎4、There______(not be)a football match in our college next week.‎ 187‎ ‎5、Kate often_____(watch)TV at home,but this evening she ______(watch)a new play at the theatre.‎ ‎5、I ______(study)in high school ten years ago and now I ______(be)a teacher.‎ few, little表示否定“几乎没有”。a few, a little表示肯定“一点，几个”。如，‎ Because he often stays at home, he has few friends.‎ 针对性练习：‎ ‎1.She is new here.She has ______friends here.　A.few B.little C.more ‎2.The city will have_____trees and_____pollution.　A.more;fewer B.less;fewer C.more;less ‎3.They did_____work with______money and_____people.‎ A.more;fewer;more B.more;less;fewer C.less;less;fewer ‎4.Ann is very busy these days.She has ____time to play with me.‎ A.few B.a few C.little 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ 自我检测你对Grammar Focus的理解, 完成3a，相信你是最棒的 ‎1）In the future，there will be_______ fresh water because there will be ___pollution in the sea.‎ ‎ 2）In 100 years，there will be _____cars because there will be__________ people in the cities.‎ ‎ 3）There will be_______ jobs for people__________ robots will do the same jobs as people.‎ ‎ 4) I think there will be_______ cities because people will build ______buildings in the country.‎ ‎ 5) In 50 years, people will have ______ free time because there will be _______ things to do.‎ 观察与思考：通过刚才的填空练习，你发现下面这些用法的规律了吗？‎ ‎(1)预测某人将来的情况应该采用______________时态。在运用时，我们应注意句子本身的时间状语，一般含有in the future. In+一段时间等 ‎(2)无论哪一种时态，都有许多常见的时间状语。‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ Groupwork:一般将来时态还有哪些常用的时间状语？请就此问题展开小组讨论。‎ 练习：用所给动词的适当形式填空。‎ a) I_________(study)in high school ten years ago, and now I_________(be)a college student. In ten years, I__________(be)a lawyer.‎ b) He_________(live)in a big city now. He _________(go)to the country next month.‎ c) Kate often _________(watch)TV at night, but this evening she ________(watch)a new movie in the cinema.‎ After reading ‎1. Pairwork:利用3a中有关将来时的表达方式，预测未来的其他情况。讨论式可借助3b的提示信息 ‎2. 全班进行讨论，对将来的状况进行预测。比一比谁的预测最合理。‎ For example: Kids study at school now. In 100 years, they will study at home or...‎ Groupwork:结合课前准备Ⅰ和Ⅱ的内容，完成3c，写一写将来的城市会是什么样子，然后在小组里进行汇报。‎ ‎_______________________________________________________________________________‎ 187‎ ‎4. 结合课前准备Ⅲ的内容，将自己的课前所画的成武未来的面貌图在班内展示，全班同学各抒已见，发表自己的观点，对成武的未来进行预测。预测时可仿照课本中4的形式。‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ there be 与have /has的区别 ‎①There be 表示“某地有某人/某物”，强调的是客观存在着的东西。‎ There is a pen on the desk.‎ ‎②have/ has表示“某人/物有….”强调所属关系。主观上拥有某物。‎ Tom has a pen.‎ 例24.There will be an exciting movie next week.(改为一般疑问句，并作肯定回答）‎ ‎———————————————————————————————‎ 例1.There will be an English party tonight.(改为同义句）‎ There ___ ___ ___ ___ an English party tonight.‎ 例2.There __ a basketball match tomorrow.‎ A. will have B. have C. has D.will be 例3,--Why are you in such a hurry,Mike?‎ ‎---There ___an NBA basketball game in ten minutes.‎ A.will have B. will be C.is going to have D. are going to be 例句4.There____ an interesting cartoon on CCT-6 at 7:30 this evening.‎ A.is going to have B. is going to be C. will have D.will to be 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ ‎1.Everything ___ ok.‎ ‎ A.are B. is C. were D.was ‎2.There is ___ with my watch.‎ ‎ A. something wrong B.wrong something C.anything wrong D.wrong anything ‎3.Would you like to pass me___ paper?(多)‎ A.a B. a piece of C.two piece of D. two pieces of ‎ ‎4.The English teacher is handing out the__ to students.‎ ‎ A.Paper B.a piece of paper C. pieces of paper D. pap ‎5.At first, there is ___ water in the cup, after drinking, there is __ water in the cup.‎ ‎ A.few B.a few C.little D.a little Ⅰ. 用所给单词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1. I_________(be)a little kid ten years ago. I________(be)a middle school student now. I______(be)a college student in five years.‎ ‎2. She ___________(not have)a pet parrot five years ago. She ________(have)a parrot now. She___________(have) a car in five years.‎ Ⅱ. 根据所给汉语完成句子。‎ ‎ 现在，我是一名中学生。我喜欢打网球，擅长英语，拥有许多好朋友。十五年后，我将是一名足球运动员。我会挣很多钱，我将拥有一架飞机。‎ ‎ Now, I _________ a middle school student. I_________ tennis. I_________ good at English. I _________ a lot of good friends. ______fifteen years, I_________ _________a football player. I _________ _________much money, and I _________ _________a plane. ‎ 187‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【课 题】 Unit 7 Will people have robots?‎ Period 5 Section B 1a~1e ‎【学习目标】‎ ‎1、熟练掌握以下词汇：astronaut, rocket, space, space station, fly, took, moon，take the train ‎2.熟练掌握以下句型：‎ ‎(1) A：What do you think your life will be like in ten years? ‎ B: I think I’ll be an astronaut.‎ ‎(2) A: Where will you live? ‎ B: I’ll live on a space station.‎ ‎(3) I’ll fly rockets on the moon.‎ ‎(4) Maybe there will be flights to other planets. ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】‎ ‎(1) A：What do you think your life will be like in ten years? ‎ B: I think I’ll be an astronaut.‎ ‎(2) A: Where will you live? ‎ B: I’ll live on a space station.‎ ‎(3) I’ll fly rockets on the moon.‎ ‎(4) Maybe there will be flights to other planets. ‎ ‎【学法指导】 ‎ 听后跟读---词句连接---作文练习 ‎【教学过程】‎ ‎ 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ I.收集有关职业和交通工具的名词。‎ Job:______________________________________________________‎ Transportation:____________________________________________‎ Ⅱ. 根据自己的实际情况完成下列表格。‎ How did you get to school five years ago? ‎ How do you get to school now? ‎ Where did you live five years ago? ‎ Where do you live now? ‎ 187‎ What will your life be like in ten years?(职业) ‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ Before listening ‎1.朗读la单词，理解其汉意，并按照职业、交通工具、居住地点进行分类，完成表格。‎ ‎2.Groupwork：除了1a中列举的这些词汇，你还掌握哪些类似词汇？结合课前准备Ⅰ的内容，进行小组讨论。比一比哪一组收集得最多。‎ While listening ‎ ‎1. 听录音，完成课本1c任务。‎ ‎2.速读1d句，理解其汉意。再听一遍录音，完成课本1d任务。‎ ‎3. 听第三遍录音，选择正确的句子完成下面的对话。‎ Conversation 2‎ Alexis: So, did you live here in Techville ten years ago?‎ Joe: No, I lived with my parents in Greenville.___________________________. ‎ I went to school here in Techville, though.‎ Alexis: Really? That’s pretty far from here. How did you get to school?‎ Joe: Oh, I think I’ll be an astronaut. ‎ Alexis: An astronaut? Are you kidding?‎ Joe: No, I’m serious. __________. Maybe there will be flights to other planets.‎ Alexis: Oh, and where will you live? Joe: ______________‎ ‎1. Oh, I took the train to school. ‎ ‎2. I’ll fly rockets to the moon.‎ ‎3. We lived in a house in the country.‎ ‎4. I’ll live on a space station.‎ ‎5. What do you think your life will be like in ten years?‎ ‎4. 模仿秀：听录音并跟读，注意模仿你所听到的问句的语音语调。‎ After listening 1. Pairwork:‎ ‎(1)和同桌合作，寻找有关Joe十年前、现在、十年后生活状况的信息。‎ ‎(2)操练2e. 和同桌分别扮演Alexis和Joe,根据刚才找到的信息进行对话练习。表演时可借助2c的对话形式。(进行对话练习时应注意时态的变化。) ‎ ‎2. Pairwork:结合课前预习II的内容，根据自己的实际情况与同伴进行交流。交流时可参考如下对话形式：‎ A: Where did you live five years ago? B:…‎ A: How did you get to school five years ago? B:…‎ A: How do you get to school now? B:…‎ A: Where will you live in ten years? B:…‎ A: How will you get to work in ten years? B:…‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ ‎　1．The next time you see Nikos, he ________ sixteen years old. ‎ ‎　　A. will be B. is C. was D. will ‎　2．Margot ________ computer science last year. ‎ ‎　　A. studies B. studied　　C. will study D. is studying ‎　3．In ten years, John ________ an astronaut. ‎ 187‎ ‎　　A. is B. will be C. was D. will ‎　4．How many people ________ there fifty years ago. ‎ ‎　　A. will B. were C. are D. will be ‎　5．There is _____ meat but ________ cakes on the plate. Please have one. ‎ ‎　　A. a little; a few B. a few; a little　　C. few; little D. little; a few ‎　6．There is very ________ on this street. ‎ ‎　　A. few traffics B. little traffics　C. few traffic D. little traffic 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ 观察与思考：通过刚才的训练，请你来总结：‎ ‎(1) 谈论他人上班或上学的交通方式应该用什么句型？请用三种时态形式表示出来。‎ 一般过去时：-_______ _________you get to school? -I _________(take)the train to school.‎ 一般现在时：-_________ _________you get to work? -I_________(get)to work by bike.‎ 一般将来时：-_________ _________you get to work? -I_________(fly)to work.‎ ‎(2)谈论他人居住地点应该用什么句型？请用三种时态形式表示出来。‎ 一般过去时：-_________ _________you _________? -I_________(live) in an apartment.‎ 一般现在时：-_________ _________ you _________? -I _________(live)in a house.‎ 一般将来时：-_________ _________you _________? –I_________(live)on a space station.‎ ‎(3)表示自己现在的职业用：I_______ a/an…预测自己将来的职业用：I______ ______a/an…‎ ‎(4)请仔细观察下面的两个句子有什么不同。‎ ‎①What will your life be like in ten years?‎ ‎②What do you think your life will be like in the years?‎ 在插入do you think之后，疑问句出现什么变化？ _________‎ 练习：汉译英。‎ ‎① 你认为她什么时候会来？ _________do you think _________ _________ _________?‎ ‎② 一百年后世界会是什么样？_________do you think the world _________ _________ _________ _________100 years?‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ 阅读短文，用方框内所给单词的适当形式填空，使短文意思通顺、完整。（注意：①每个单词只能用一次。②其中有两个多余选项。）‎ everything, robot, spend, factory, fly, able, housework, answer, other, work, space, science In one hundred years everyone will carry a small computer. The computer will give people the ①____________ to all their questions. We will all have ②____________ at our homew. So we’ll be ③____________ to let robots do most of the ④____________. While making a telephone call, we’ll also be able to see the people on the ⑤____________ end at the same time.‎ ‎ A lot of people will live and work under sea or in ⑥____________ because there will be big towns and ⑦____________ there. Robots will do most of the work, and people will just ⑧____________ two or three days a week. They’ll be able to ⑨____________ to the moon in a spaceship and ⑩____________ their holidays there. ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【课 题】‎ 187‎ Unit 7 Will people have robots?‎ Period 6 Section B 2a~2e ‎ ‎ ‎【学习目标】‎ ‎1.熟练掌握以下词汇： scientist, already, made, factory, simple, human, shape, snake, possible, seem, impossible, housework, hundreds of , be able to，over and over again，fall down，look for，for example，look like，wake up ，bored，such ‎2.熟练掌握以下句型：‎ ‎(1) He thinks that it will be difficult for a robot to do the same things as a person.‎ ‎(2) They think that robots will even be able to talk to people in 25 to 50 years.‎ ‎(3) Some will look like humans, and others might look like animals ‎(4) We never know what will happen in the future！‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ ‎(1) He thinks that it will be difficult for a robot to do the same things as a person.‎ ‎(2) They think that robots will even be able to talk to people in 25 to 50 years.‎ ‎(3) Some will look like humans, and others might look like animals ‎(4) We never know what will happen in the future！‎ ‎【学法指导】‎ 了解阅读方法---掌握阅读技巧----多阅读 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ 机器人发展史 ‎ 早在三千多年前的西周时代，我国就出现了能歌善舞的木偶，称为“倡者”，这可能是世界上最早的“机器人”。上世纪五六十年代，出现第一代机器人，它属于“示教再现”(Teach-in/playback)型机器人，只具有记忆、存储能力，按相应程序重复作业，但对周围环境基本没有感知与反馈控制能力。进入80年代，出现了第二代机器人——有感觉的机器人。它能够获得作业环境和作业对象的有关信息，进行一定的实时处理作业，在工业生产中得到广泛应用。第三代机器人是目前正在研究的“智能机器人”。它不仅具有更加完善的环境感知能力，而且还具有逻辑思维、判断和决策能力，可根据作业要求与环境信息自主进行工作。‎ Ⅱ. What do these robots look like? What can they do?‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ Before reading ‎1. (1)根据要求，利用本课词汇填空。‎ Safe(反义词)__________ possible(反义词)___________‎ ‎ make(过去式)__________ easy(近义词)__________ ‎ hardly（近义词）__________dirty（近义词）_________‎ ‎(2)拼装游戏。将下列词汇进行组合，看看能否构成其他词汇。你还能举出类似的例子吗？‎ ‎ danger im dis house agree ous possible ‎2. 利用课前画的机器人草图，全班同学就其外形和功能进行讨论，讨论时可借助如下句型：‎ A: What does the robot look like? B: It looks like a…‎ A: What can the robots do? B: It can…‎ ‎3. Groupwork:根据文章标题和插图猜测文章大体内容，完成2b.‎ 187‎ While reading ‎ ‎1. Fast reading 速读短文，回答下列问题。(阅读策略：以极快的速度阅读文章，寻找字面上阐述的信息。)‎ ‎(1)Are there any robots now? (2)Will there be more robots in the future?‎ ‎2. Careful reading (阅读策略：仔细阅读短文，有目的性、针对性地在文中查找问题答案。)‎ 根据文章内容，判断各句正误。‎ ‎(1) The robots help people do the most pleasant jobs.‎ ‎(2) Scientists try to make robots look different from people.‎ ‎(3) Robots will never get bored to do simple jobs over and over again.‎ ‎(4) Humans will have more work to do it the future.‎ ‎(5) Space rockets seemed possible a hundred years ago.‎ ‎3. Detailed reading(阅读策略：有选择地精研细读有关章节或段落，解决疑难之处。)‎ 阅读文章的1~3自然段，回答下列问题。‎ ‎(1) What do the robots do in some science movies?‎ ‎(2) Will robots get bored ‎(3) What can the robots do in Japanese companies?‎ ‎(4) Does Mr. White think robots can do the same things as a person?‎ 阅读文章的4~5自然段，根据文章内容完成下列各题。‎ 将下列发明按时间归类。computers, the robots that can talk to people，the robots that look like humans，the snake robots a hundred years ago ‎ now ‎ In the future ‎ 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ Reading up(研读)‎ ‎1) 合作学习——找出重、难点。______________‎ ‎2) 合作探究——细读全文，提出疑难问题，小组讨论，互助解答。‎ 观察与思考：‎ ‎1. However, they agree it may take hundreds of years.‎ ‎ hundreds of 意思为____________，后跟___________名词复数。当hundred 表示具体数量时，不可以+s，也不可以和of 连用。例如：400___________。‎ 练习：There are ________books in our school library.‎ A. hundred of B. hundreds of C. nine hundreds D. nine hundreds of ‎ ‎2. He thinks that it will be difficult( for a robot) to do the same things as a person.‎ ‎…,it’s easy for a child to wake up and know where they are. ‎ It is +形容词+（for sb. +）to do sth. 意思为_________________________‎ 练习：汉译英。‎ ‎① 学好英语对我而言很难。_______is difficult for me ________ ________English well.‎ ‎② 按时到校对我而言很容易。______is easy for me _______ _______to school on time.‎ ‎3. For example,there are already robots working in factories. ‎ There be sb. /sth. +doing sth. 意思为_____________________________‎ 练习：Listen! There is a girl ________(sing)in the next room.‎ ‎4. That may not seem possible now,…‎ 187‎ seem意思为___________，其后可跟__________词或to do.‎ 练习：①她似乎病了。She ________ ______ __________ ___________. ‎ ‎/ She ________ ____________.‎ ‎②看，机器人似乎动了。Look! The robot ________ ________ _________.‎ After reading ‎1. 完成课本2c和2d的内容。‎ ‎2. 介绍自己在课前设计的机器人的用途，完成2e ‎3. Groupwork:小组讨论全班同学设计的机器人图片，猜测它们的功能。讨论时借助如下对话形式： A：What do you think the robot can do? B: I think it can…‎ 知识巩固 Ⅰ. 根据汉语提示完成句子。‎ ‎1. No one knows what will happen __________the ____________(在将来).‎ ‎2. These things were invented __________ __________(数百)years ago.‎ ‎3. When I work for a long time, I’ll _________ _________(感到厌倦).‎ ‎4. I still don’t have a computer of __________ __________(我自己的).‎ ‎5. When she was 20, her dream to be a singer __________ _________(实现)‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ ‎1.Some scientists believe that there will be such robots in the future. However. They agree it may take hundreds of years. 有些科学家相信在将来会有这种机器人. 然而, 他们认为这可能需要数百年的时间。‎ ‎1) take 花费it takes sb.some time to do sth. 花费某人多长时间做某事 It takes me an hour to do my homework every day. 做作业每天要花费我一个小时的时间。‎ ‎2) hundred 数词, 百,用于a、one或含有数量意义的词之后, 其后接可数名词的复数形式.‎ e.g. There are four hundred students in our grade. 我们年级有400名学生。‎ 当这类数词前面有具体的数字时, 数词不能用复数形式:‎ e.g. We have more than five hundred this kind of books. 我们有500多本这种书。‎ e.g. three hundred 三百, five thousand五千, a few hundred 几百。‎ 类似的数词还有thousand , million,‎ 当数词前没有具体数字时, 数词用复数形式,后面接短语, 再加可数名词的复数形式。‎ ‎2.He thinks that it will be difficult for a robot to do the same things as a person.‎ 他认为对于一个机器人来说与人做同样的事情是困难的。‎ ‎1)that引导的是一个宾语从句。‎ 在宾语从句中,如果主句是一般现在时态, 从句可根据实际情况确定时态;‎ 如果主句是过去时态, 从句也要用过去时态的某种形式。‎ e.g. I hear(that) he won the first prize in English competition. 我听说他在英语竞赛中获得一等奖。 ‎ ‎ He said (that) he would go to college in four years. 他说四年后他将去上大学。‎ ‎2) it be+adj+for sb.to do sth. 对某人来说做某事是……‎ e.g. It's easy to do this thing. 做这件事是容易的。‎ ‎3. They think that robots will be able to talk to people in 25 to 50 years.‎ 他们相信在25至50年以后机器人将能够和人对话。‎ ‎1) talk 谈话,对话(1)talk to...跟……谈话(对话)‎ 187‎ e.g. 1 want to talk to you about a very important matter. 我想和你谈一件非常重要的事情。‎ ‎ 2) talk of...谈到;谈起 e.g. We often talk of you. 我们常常谈到你。‎ ‎ 3)talk about...谈论某人或某事 e.g. What are you talking about? 你们在谈论什么?‎ ‎ 4)talk with...同……交谈 e.g. He is talking with a friend. 他在和一个朋友谈话。‎ ‎4. That may not seem possible now, 现在看来似乎是不可能的.‎ seem 似乎是;好像是;看似,常用作连系动词。‎ ‎1) seem + to do表示“似乎……” e.g. He seems to think so. 他似乎认为如此。‎ ‎2) it seems +that从句”,表示“看来……”‎ e.g. It seems that no one knows it . 似乎没有人知道此事。‎ e.g. It seems that he is lying. 看来他在撒谎。‎ ‎3) seem + n.／adj.表示“好像是,似乎是”‎ e.g. He seems (to be) an honest boy. 看上去他像是个诚实的孩子。‎ ‎5、Do you think there will be robots in people’s homes？此句是一含宾语从句的主从复合句，Do you think…是主句，there will be…是宾语从句。Do you think…?答语一般为：Yes, I think so.或No, I don’t think so.有时do you think作为插入语，放在特殊疑问词后，该疑问句的其他部分应为陈述语气。 a.你认为十年后你会干什么？________________________________?   b.I think:我认为每家都会有个机器人。_______________________ c.I don’t think:我认为将来孩子们不会去上学。_______        ‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ ‎1.People will live to be 200 years old.（改为否定句）People to be 200 years old.‎ ‎2.They will study at home on computers this Saturday.（改为一般疑问句）‎ ‎ they at home on computers this Saturday?‎ ‎3.There is a snow tomorrow.（用一般将来时改写）There a snow tomorrow.‎ ‎4.My parents will go to Beijing in two days.（就划线部分提问）‎ ‎ your parents to Beijing?‎ ‎5.I think there will be fewer trees.（改为否定句）I there be fewer trees. ‎ ‎6.Will the flowers come out soon? (作否定回答) ______, _________ _________. ‎ ‎7.There will be only one country.(一般疑问句) ______ _____ only ______ one country?‎ ‎8.Mr Yang was a teacher.(用will改写句子) Mr Yang ______ ______ a teacher. ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎【课 题】‎ Unit 7 Will people have robots?‎ Period 7 Section B 3a~3c ‎、‎ ‎【学习目标】‎ ‎1.熟练掌握以下词汇： pet, probably, be good for, wear, holiday, both..and..，the meaning of，during the week，interesting，on the weekend ‎2.熟练掌握以下句型：‎ 187‎ In 20 years，I think I’ll be a newspaper reporter.‎ ‎(2) On the weekend, I’ll look less smart but I will be more comfortable.‎ ‎(3) What will your… be like ? ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】‎ ‎ ‎ In 20 years，I think I’ll be a newspaper reporter.‎ ‎(2) On the weekend, I’ll look less smart but I will be more comfortable.‎ ‎(3) What will your… be like ? ‎ ‎【学法指导】 ‎ 及时复习----及时巩固—及时练习 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ ‎ 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ Ⅰ. 根据自己的实际情况为自己的未来制定计划。‎ 未来职业 未来居住地点 未来爱好 未来衣着打扮 未来度假计划 I’ll be________ I’ll live_______ I’ll _________ I’ll wear______ I’ll go to______‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ 读记短语：‎ on computers on paper live to be 200 years old free time in danger on the earth play a part in sth space station look for computer programmer ‎ in the future huandreds of the same…as ‎ over and over again get bored wake up look like fall down 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ ‎.在同学之中展开调查，询问他们梦想的职业并记录下来。‎ Name ‎ Job ‎ Warming up 全班进行交流，讨论各自梦想的生活。讨论时可借助如下句型：‎ A：What do you think your life will be like in ten years?‎ B: I’ll be an astronaut. I’ll live in an apartment and…‎ While reading ‎1. Skimming(略读)：在3a中作者预测了自己20年后的生活状况。快读短文，回答问题：‎ ‎(1) What will Jill be in 20 years? ‎ ‎(2)What does Jill mention(提到)in 3a？(多选题)‎ A. 职业 B. 居住地点 C. 爱好 ‎ ‎ D. 衣着打扮 E. 薪水 F. 度假计划 ‎2. Scanning(找读)：1)仔细阅读短文，完成3a的填空。‎ ‎ 2)再细读短文，在3a中标出含有“will”的句子，并熟读这些句子。‎ ‎3. Ss read the filled passage aloud for 5 minutes to recite.‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ Reading up(研读)‎ ‎1)自主学习——找出重、难点。______________________‎ ‎2)合作探究——细读全文，提出疑难问题，小组讨论，互助解答。______________‎ 187‎ 观察与思考：‎ ‎(1) 这篇短文中出现了一般将来时这种时态，请从短文中找出这种时态的时间状语。你还知道哪些常用的时间状语？‎ ‎(2) 注意观察文章的开头与结尾，这篇文章从哪些方面描述了作者二十年后的生活？‎ ‎(3) 请仔细观察下面的二个句子，然后总结be good for和be good at的用法 我的公寓对养宠物不太好。My apartment will be no good for pet.‎ 我擅长唱歌。 I’m good at singing.‎ be good for 后跟____,译为___主语通常为____‎ be good at 后跟_____,译为_____,主语通常为______‎ 练习:用 be good for 和 be good at填空 ‎ Ming ______swimming in the river. ‎ Doing morning exercises _______your health.‎ ‎(4)wear指________，意为；put on 指_________，意为_______‎ in后跟_____，指______，dress sb.既可指_______也可指____________。‎ 练习: (1)I____________ a coat every day.‎ Look! The girl_________________ red is my sister.‎ Some Kids can_________________ themselves before five years old.‎ After reading ‎1. Groupwork:交流课前准备Ⅰ的预习成果。讨论时可借助如下形式：I’ll be an astronaut. I’ll live on a space station. I’ll play football in my free time. I’ll wear a suit and I’ll have long hair. I’ll go to Japan on vacation.‎ ‎2. 通过讨论，在班里评选出来未来的最佳职业、居住地点、爱好、衣着打扮和度假计划 ‎3. 完成3b的表格。借助3a，尝试写成短文。‎ ‎4. 仔细观察下列各句的时间状语，利用所给动词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎(1) Which country ________(win)the next World Cup?‎ ‎(2) What ________ the weather _________(be)like tomorrow?‎ ‎(3) Which movies ___________(win)awards next year?‎ ‎(4) What _________teenagers_________(do)for fun twenty years from now?‎ ‎5. Pairwork:结合生活实际，同桌之间就以上四个问题进行讨论。‎ ‎6. 完成4‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ Ⅰ. 用所给词的正确形式填空。‎ ‎1. There are many new __________ (build) in our city.‎ ‎2. We can do the work with ______ (little) money and _______(few) people.‎ ‎3. Maybe he wants to go ______________ (skate).‎ ‎4. There are ____________ (hundred) of people on the ground.‎ ‎5. Where do you think Sally ___________(work)ten years from now?‎ ‎6. The boy ____(fly) to New York two days ago, and he ____(be) back soon.‎ ‎7. _________(be) you at school yesterday evening? We had an exciting party.‎ ‎8. When I grow up, I_______________ (be) a famous pilot.‎ Ⅱ. 用适当的介词填空。‎ ‎1. ___________ten years, I think I’ll be a reporter.‎ ‎2. I’ll live _________ Shanghai.‎ ‎3. I fell __________love __________the beautiful city.‎ 187‎ ‎4. ___________ a reporter, I think I will meet lots of people.‎ ‎5. ___________ the week, I go to school and have many classes.‎ ‎6. ___________the weekends, I usually stay at home. ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【课 题】‎ Unit 7 Will people have robots?‎ Period 8 Section B Selfcheck ‎ ‎ ‎【学习目标】‎ ‎1.熟练掌握本单元词汇： ‎ ‎2.熟练掌握本单元句型：‎ In 20 years，I think I’ll be a newspaper reporter.‎ ‎(2) On the weekend, I’ll look less smart but I will be more comfortable.‎ ‎(3) What will your… be like ? ‎ ‎【学习重点难点】 ‎ 本单元的单词、短语、语法 ‎ ‎【学法指导】 ‎ 及时练习与巩固 ‎ ‎【教学过程】‎ 导入（启发探究 3分钟）‎ ‎ 对话复习：‎ Nick: What are you reading, Jill?‎ Jill: It’s book about future.‎ Nick: Sounds cool. So what will the future be like?‎ Jill: Well, cities will be more crowded and polluted. There will be fewer trees and the environment will be in great danger.‎ Nick: That sounds bad! Will we have to move to other planets.‎ Jill: Maybe. But I want to live on the earth.‎ Nick: Me, too. Then what can we do?‎ Jill: We can use less water and plants more trees. Everyone should play a part in saving the earth.‎ 二、自学（自主探究 6分钟）‎ 用法：‎ will + 动词原形 将要做 ‎ fewer/more + 可数名词复数 更少/更多…‎ less/more + 不可数名词 更少/更多 ‎ try to do sth. 尽力做某事 have to do sth 不得不做某事 ‎ agree with sb. 同意某人的意见 such + 名词（词组） 如此 ‎ play a part in doing sth 参与做某事 make sb do sth 让某人做某事 ‎ ‎ help sb with sth 帮助某人做某事 187‎ There will be + 主语 + 其他 将会有…. ‎ ‎ There is/are + sb. + doing sth 有…正在做…‎ It is + 形容词 + for sb + to do sth 做某事对某人来说…的 三、交流（合作探究 10分钟）‎ 语法：‎ What will the future be like? Cities will be more polluted. And there will be fewer trees.‎ Will people use money in 100 years? No, they won’t. Everything will be free.‎ Will there be world peace? Yes, I hope so.‎ Kids will stuffy at home on computers. ‎ They won’t go to school.‎ ‎ ‎ ‎ Countable nouns Uncountable nouns ‎ ‎ There will be more people. There will be more pollution.‎ ‎ There will be fewer trees. There will be less free time.‎ 四、总结（引深探究 15分钟）‎ 词语辨析：‎ ‎1. every 与 each 的区别：‎ every 用来表整体，each 用来表个别。each 最低需是两，every 最低需是三。every adj.‎ every 作主用单数，each 可单也可复，作主、作定用单数，其他情况用复数。 each adj./ pron.‎ Every teacher knows her. ‎ There are lots of trees on each side of the road.‎ Each of the road has a dictionary.‎ ‎2. on the earth 在地球上，作地点状语，位于句首或句末。 on earth 究竟，到底。用于疑问句或副词后，加强语气。‎ All the living things on the earth depend on the sun. / What on earth do you mean?‎ ‎3. human, 指包括男人女人孩子的“人，人类”，有别于动物，自然景物，机器等的特殊群体，也可指具体的人。 ‎ person, 无性别之分，常用于数目不太大，而且数目比较精确的场合。‎ people, 泛指“人们”，表示复数概念。‎ man,前不带冠词而且单独使用时，指“男人”，a man 可指“一个人/ 一个男人”，复数形式为men.‎ He was the only human on the island. ‎ There are only three persons in the room.‎ There are many people there.‎ Man is stronger than woman.‎ ‎4. seem 连系动词，好像，似乎，看来。有下面几种用法：‎ seem + 名词 看起来。He seems a nice man.‎ seem like 好像，似乎。 It seemed like a good idea at the time.‎ seem to do sth. 似乎/看起来/好像做某事。 I seem to have left my book at home.‎ It seems/seemed that 看起来好像…, 似乎…. He was very happy.‎ seem to be + 形容词/名词 = seem + 形容词/名词。 She seems to be happy.= She seems happy.‎ ‎5. probably ad. maybe 相当于 perhaps. 也许，大概，可能。作状语.‎ 187‎ probably 用于句中，可能性最大。 He will probably come tomorrow.‎ maybe/perhaps 用于句首。 Maybe/Perhaps you are right.‎ during / for / in 介词，在……期间。说到某事是在某一段时间之间发生的用during; 说到某事持续多久则用for; 说到某事具体发生的时间用in.‎ We visited many places of interest during the summer holiday.‎ I’ve been here for two weeks.‎ They usually leave school in July.‎ 五、练评（包含“考点链接” 应用探究 6分钟）‎ 读“What will your life be like in the future?”短文，用所给单词填空。‎ meet work live look keep wear ‎ ‎ more less fewer take In 20 years, I think I’ll be a newspaper reporter. I’ll ________in Shanghai, because there will be _______jobs in that city. As a reporter, I think I will _______lots of interesting people, so I’ll have more friends. I’ll have ______ pets, because it’ll be too small. So I’ll probably just ______a bird. During the week, I’ll________smart clothes. On the weekend, I’ll _______less smart but I’ll be more comfortable. In the future, people will _______more so they’ll probable have fewer vacations, but I think I’ll _______a holiday in Hong Kong when possible. One day I’ll even go to Australia.‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【教学反思】‎ ‎ ‎ ‎【课题】Unit8 How do you make a banana milk shake? Section A 1a-1c（1）（1课时）‎ 编号： 主编：初2013级 英语 组 编写人： 审核人： 审批人； ‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1.识记并运用与turn、cut、pour、put相关的词组及first、then、next、finally四个顺序副词。‎ ‎2.学会描述香蕉奶昔的制作流程。‎ ‎3.识记祈使句的结构、类型并学会使用简单的祈使句。‎ ‎【重点，难点】 ‎ 相关动词词组的辨析和运用；祈使句的使用。‎ 温故知新 ‎ 对划线部分提问。‎ ‎1.His best friend exercises three times a week.‎ ‎_________ _________ ______ his best friend ___________?‎ ‎2.Wang Lan usually takes the subway to school.‎ ‎________ _________ Wang Lan usually _______ the subway to school?‎ 用所给词的正确形式填空。‎ ‎1.They have as ________(long) hair as us.‎ ‎2.She does _______(well) in math than her brother.‎ 187‎ ‎3.They have _______(much) homework to do today than they did yesterday.‎ ‎4.Wu Xi _________(go) to a movie with her parents this weekend.‎ ‎5.Her mother-in-law has a ___________(stomach) and she has to _____(take) her to the hospital.‎ 知识链接 ‎“turn”的使用。‎ 大家都使用过电视、冰箱、收录音机、电风扇等家用电器吧?在它们开关的旁边一般都印着“on/off”‎ 的字样，它们就是“开/关”的意思。同样，“站起来”是“stand up”，“坐下”是“sit down”，我们可以推断，“up”是“向上”，“down”是“向下”。现在，轮到大家造词了。‎ ‎ 1.打开 turn on; 2. 关掉______________; 3. 调高（声音）______________; 4. 调低_______________。当然，“turn”还有其它的用法：turn left 向左转；turn right 向右转；turn to Page 23 翻到23页；the first turning 第一个拐角处；It’s your turn 轮到你了。‎ 根据上边所述，完成下列各题。‎ ‎1.The baby is sleeping. Could you please _________ the CD player ?‎ ‎ A. turn on B. turn off C. turn down D. turn up ‎2.Go along the street and take the second ___________(turn) on the right, then you can find the school.‎ 自主互助学习 一、请对应上边图片，填写它们所属奶昔（shake）类型并和同学一起熟读、识记它们。(西瓜：watermelon)‎ ‎ ‎ ‎1_________ milk shake 2._________ shake 3._________shake 4.____________shake 二、结合上边所学，你可以发现，课本41页的图片中是在制作________________（填写英语），在制作这种奶昔的过程中，需要用到________________ ,_________________,______________,___________‎ 和_______________（请用英语填写）。它的制作流程又是什么呢？请结合图片、单词表及知识链接所学，按照1a题目要求完成1a。之后，同小组成员核对答案并大声朗读它们。‎ 三、考考你的记忆力。翻译下列词组。‎ ‎1.打开搅拌器_____________________________; 2.剥香蕉（皮）_____________________________;‎ ‎3.将香蕉和冰欺凌放到搅拌器里________________________________________;4.切碎香蕉_________;‎ ‎5.将牛奶倒进搅拌器里______________________________;6. 享用（喝）奶昔____________________;‎ 187‎ 四、仔细观察1b中的6个句子，你不难发现，它们的句首都是_____________,这种句子在汉语中同样存在，用于表述一种命令或用在使用说明中表示一种指令，它们就是____________ 句。1b中的这6个句子就属于_________________________。同小组成员核对你的答案。‎ 五、听力。‎ ‎1.弄清1b题意，然后要求老师播放听力并认真完成题意要求。‎ ‎2.核对答案，并要求老师再次播放听力，帮助自己填写下列空格。用心去写，能写几个写几个。‎ 说话人使用了First,__________,Now,___________,___________及_____________6个词巧妙地将制作香蕉奶昔的工序很有条理地讲述给了听者。‎ ‎3.翻阅听力材料，检测自己做对了几个？不要气馁哦，这个题很有难度的！别忘了改错或补填你没听出的单词！然后同老师同学一同朗读它们。‎ ‎【课堂练习】‎ 对话练习。同搭档一起仿照下列model conversation彼此介绍制作香蕉奶昔的工序。‎ A:How do you make a banana milk shake?/I want to drink some banana milk shake.Can you tell me how to make it?‎ B:Take it easy! Let me tell you carefully.First,......,Then......‎ 选择题。‎ ‎1.Please ___________ some water into my milk.‎ A.cut B. pour C. peel D. Make ‎2.________ the lights before you leave the room.‎ ‎ A.Turn on B.Turn down C.Turn off D. Turn against ‎3.Please ________ the TV. I’d like to see the TV play.‎ ‎ A.turn up B.turn on C. turn down D.turn off ‎4.______ talking! Don’t you see it’s time for class.‎ ‎ A.Stops B. Stopping C.Stop D.To stop ‎【要点归纳】‎ ‎ 简单祈使句的基本结构及运用；first, then, next,finally几个词的使用；香蕉奶昔的制作工序。‎ ‎【拓展练习】‎ 你知道如何制作香蕉奶昔吗？填空完成下列说明。‎ ‎1._________ ,__________three bananas. ‎ ‎2.__________, _________ _______the bananas and ______ the bananas and ice cream_____the blender.‎ ‎3.__________, _______the milk _______the blender.‎ ‎4.__________. ______ ______ the blender. After a while, you can __________ the milk shake.‎ ‎【总结反思】‎ ‎【课题】Unit8 How do you make a banana milk shake? Section A 2a-2c（2）（1课时）‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1.学会对可数名词及不可数名词数量的提问及使用量词来表达不可数名词的数量。‎ ‎2.能通过对话获取或介绍制作一种食物所需的原料。‎ ‎3.提升自己听和说的能力。‎ ‎【重点，难点】 ‎ 187‎ 对可数名词与不可数名词数量的提问及表达的辨析；通过对话获取或介绍制作一种食物所需的原料。‎ 温故知新 ‎ 一、根据句意及首字母提示补全单词。‎ ‎1.We shouldn’t p_____ dirty water into the river.‎ ‎2.It’s seven o’clock. Please t_____on the TV.Let’s watch the CCTV news report.‎ ‎3. Please c_____ up the potatoes. It’s easier to cook.‎ ‎4. P____the bananas before you eat them.‎ 二、描述制作香蕉奶昔的工序。‎ 知识链接 ‎“need”的使用。‎ ‎1.You needn’t arrive at school at 6:00, it’s so early.‎ ‎2.Mary doesn’t need to arrive at school at 6:00, it’s so early.‎ 请仔细观察上边两个句子，它们都是_______句，但否定的方法不同。根据前边所学到的变一个句子为否定句的方法，我们很容易得知，“need”不是我们所寻找的be动词，也不属于这三个助动词（do、does、did ），但第一个句子中却在“need”后边加“not，”缩写成“needn’t，”后边arrive使用了它的原形也遵循了情态动词后边使用动词原形这一大性质。从以上两个方面，我们可以得知：“need”是一个_____________动词。在第二个句子中，你可以发现，里边并没有我们要找的“be”动词或助动词，“need”也不可能是情态动词。如果是的话，就根本不需要借一个“doesn’t”来帮助否定。由此，我们得知，“need”是一个和“eat”一样的实义动词，其第三人称单数是_________,过去式或过去分词是__________ 。根据以上所述，判断下列句子中“need”是情态动词还是实义动词，并在后边横线上说明理由。‎ ‎1.He needs to have a rest. ______________ ______________________________‎ ‎2.They don’t need to return the book to Mr. Wang .______________ ____________________________‎ ‎3.—Must I finish my homework this afternoon?‎ ‎ — No, you needn’t. _____________ ____________________________ ‎ 自主互助学习 一、考考你的观察力。‎ ‎1.请在课本42页的范围内（包括题目）搜寻到下列词组的英语翻译。‎ 水果沙拉__________________;原料的名称______________________________________________;‎ 多少__________________;多少_________________;在图表中____________________;在正确的数目旁边________________________________________;一茶杯酸奶___________________________________;‎ 可数名词__________________________;不可数名词___________________________________________;‎ ‎2.小组核对答案并大声朗读、识记它们。‎ ‎3.仔细观察2a中的图片，翻译下列单词。然后小组核对答案并大声朗读、识记它们。‎ 茶匙___________;西瓜______________; 蜂蜜 _______________;香蕉_____________;苹果____________;橘子____________;酸奶____________。‎ 二、听力（2a-2b）。‎ ‎1. 弄清2a题意，按要求完成图表。‎ 187‎ ‎2. 同老师核对答案，注意在有分歧的地方要求老师再次播放磁带并根据新获取的信息修改自己的答案。‎ ‎3.根据所填图标，我们可以发现“how much”后边跟了“yogurt、honey”这两个词，而“how many”后边跟了“bananas、watermelon、oranges” 等词。思考：“yogurt、honey”与“bananas...”的区别在哪里？请根据思考结果，我们可以得知:How much +_________________;How many+______________. ‎ ‎4.弄清2b题意，完成2b图表。然后同老师核对答案。‎ ‎5.根据所听到的听力，我们可以知道：一杯酸奶____________________;两茶匙蜂蜜_____________。‎ 那么，以此类推，我们可以知道：两公斤鸡肉_______________________;三篮子洋芋_______________‎ ‎_______________;六盒月饼_________________________;四瓶牛奶______________________________;‎ 三碗饭____________________。（注意：公斤—kilo，篮子—basket,盒—box，瓶—bottle,碗—bowl。）‎ ‎ 6.小组核对答案。思考:是不是只有不可数名词才能使用量词？量词有没有单复数变化？如果可数名词使用了量词来表达数量的话，可数名词要使用单数形式还是复数形式？‎ ‎【课堂练习】‎ 根据2c要求，，模仿2c右边的对话，参照2a、2b中的信息制作对话。思考对话中使用的“need”‎ 是情态动词还是实义动词？‎ 对划线部分提问。‎ ‎1.We need six oranges to make fruit salad.‎ ‎ _________ _________ oranges __________ we need to make fruit salad?‎ ‎2.We need two teaspoons of honey to make fruit salad.‎ ‎ _________ _________ honey ________ we need to make fruit salad?‎ ‎3.We need two teaspoons of honey to make fruit salad.‎ ‎ _________ _________ teaspoons of honey ________ we need to make fruit salad?‎ ‎4.He drank two bowls of soup yesterday .‎ ‎ _________ __________ soup _______ he ________ yesterday?‎ ‎【要点归纳】‎ ‎ 量词在可数名词和不可数名词中的使用；对可数名词和不可数名词数量的提问。‎ ‎【拓展练习】‎ ‎ 用所给词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1.—How many ________(banana) do we need?—Three .‎ ‎2.—How ________(many) is the pen? —Twenty yuan.‎ ‎3.In my opinion, pour two ________(cup) of yogurt into the blender.‎ ‎4.It usually takes you half an hour to pick a basket of _________(apple).‎ ‎5.There is only a little _______(orange) in the bottle and two __________(orange)on the table.‎ ‎6.He needs _____________(work) harder if he really wants to get better grades. ‎ ‎【总结反思】‎ ‎【课题】Unit8 How do you make a banana milk shake? Section A3a-4（3）（1课时）‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1.能熟练运用first,then,next,finally及量词。‎ 187‎ ‎2.能给别人介绍制作水果沙拉、爆米花、西红柿牛肉面及其它食物的具体工序。‎ ‎3.提升自己说的能力。‎ ‎【重点，难点】 ‎ 将first等顺序副词、量词及祈使句灵活地用到一起来表述一种食物的制作工序。‎ 温故知新 ‎ 请再次翻译下列词组 一杯酸奶____________________;两茶匙蜂蜜______________________________;两公斤鸡肉_______________________;三篮子洋芋_____________________;六盒月饼_________________________;四瓶牛奶______________________________;三碗饭____________________。‎ 选择题。‎ ‎1.We need _______onion and five _______.‎ ‎ A.a, tomatos B.an, tomatos C.an, tomatoes D.a, tomatoes ‎2._______fruit salad did your mother make the day before yesterday?‎ ‎ A.How many B.How much C.How often D.How far ‎3.It’s good for your health to have ________every morning.‎ ‎ A.two glasses of milk B.two glass of milk C.two glasses of milks D. two glass of milks ‎4.______, peel some bananas . Then cut them up and put it in the blender.‎ ‎ A.Finally B.First C.Next D. Last 知识链接 一、请熟悉下边这首关于祈使句的儿歌并根据你对儿哥的理解完成下列问题。‎ 祈使句，祈使句，请求命令或建议； 主语是you常省去，动词原形开头住；‎ 否定形式要注意，句首要把Don’t加；要讲客气用please，句首句末没关系。‎ ‎ 1.祈使句的基本结构是：_____________ + 其它.‎ ‎2.否定祈使句的基本结构是: __________ + _________ + 其它.‎ ‎3.若要客气一些，如何改变“Cut up the potatoes.”这个祈使句？有多少种改法？请将你所改写的客气的祈使句写到下列横线上。________________________________________________________________‎ ‎_________________________________________________________________________________________ ‎ 二、“let”型祈使句。基本结构：let + sb.（not） + 动词原形 + 其他。意为“让某人（不要）做某事”,let us 通常缩写成 let’s。根据let型祈使句，完成下列问题。‎ ‎1.Let me __________(help) you carry the heavy box.(用所给词的正确形式填空)‎ ‎2.Let those students _______________________________(不要打篮球)here. It’s dangerous.‎ 三、“No + 动词-ing”型、“No + 名词”型、“Why don’t you/Why not + 动词原形 + 其他”型。‎ ‎1.No parking here.(这里不准停车) No smoking .(不准抽烟) ‎ ‎2.No wet umbrellas.(不得带湿的雨伞进入) No schoolbags.(不得带书包进入) No photos(禁止拍照)‎ ‎3.Why not go skateboarding?(干嘛不去踩滑板) Why don’t you have a rest?(干嘛不休息一下)‎ 自主互助学习 一、仔细阅读3a，完成下列问题。‎ ‎1.认真阅读3a文章，在下列表格中填写出制作水果沙拉所需的原料及数量。然后，使用“How many”,‎ 187‎ ‎“How much”及图表中的信息进行询问和介绍制作水果沙拉所需原料的对话。‎ Ingredient Amount ‎2.弄清3a题意，按要求填写对话中的横线。‎ ‎3.核对答案并理解背诵3a中的对话。争取机会在老师同学面前展示你的理解力和记忆力。 ‎ 二、认真思考，仔细观察，完成下列各题。‎ ‎1.考考你的“快速定位”能力。请在课本43页中找到下列词组的翻译并大声朗读识记它们。‎ ‎ 切碎_____________;把...放到...里______________;两茶匙蜂蜜__________________________;‎ 一杯酸奶__________________;把它全部混合在一起______________________;制作爆米花__________;‎ 爆米花机_________________________;打开_______________;煮面条____________________________;‎ 加......到......中去__________________________;按正确顺序摆放或排列......________________‎ ‎___________________。‎ ‎2.按3b题意要求描述制作爆米花的具体工序。注意使用“first”等顺序副词。‎ ‎3.尝试只看3b图片，描述爆米花制作的工序。 ‎ ‎4.快速阅读4中制作西红柿牛肉面的制作工序并合上课本和搭档彼此描述它的制作工序。‎ ‎【课堂练习】‎ 按要求完成句子。‎ ‎1.Turn on the popcorn popper.(变为否定句)‎ ‎ ________ _________ on the popcorn popper.‎ ‎2.Make some banana milk shake for me.(将please放入句中使句子感觉更有礼貌)‎ ‎ ____________________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎3.Don’t smoke in the classroom any more.(肯定回答) No，I _________.‎ ‎4.Don’t talk. It’s time for class.( 变为同义句) No __________. It’s time for class.‎ ‎5.Why not come to school early?(变为同义句) ________ _________ ________ come to school early?‎ ‎6.I need two teaspoons of honey .( 对划线部分提问) ________ _________ _________ do you need?‎ 二、用所给词的正确形式填空。‎ ‎1.Eating two ___________(tomato) every day is good for our health.‎ ‎2._____________(not arrive) late next time.‎ ‎3.Let’s __________(make) some popcorn for our parents. They must be hungry after work.‎ 三、选择填空。‎ ‎1.Please add some salt _____the chicken.A.in B.on C.for D.to ‎2.Jim, your room is out of order. Please clean your room and put your things ___ order.‎ ‎ A. out B. of C.in D.up ‎3.The apples are too big. So you can __________ first.‎ ‎ A.cut it up B.cut them up C.cut up it D.cut up them ‎【要点归纳】‎ 187‎ ‎ 复述三种食物的制作工序。‎ ‎【拓展练习】‎ ‎ 想出一种食物并写出它具体的制作工序。‎ ‎【总结反思】‎ ‎【课题】Unit8 How do you make a banana milk shake? Section B1a-2c（4）（1课时）‎ ‎【学习目标】 ‎ ‎1.识记并能运用“bread(面包)、butter(黄油)、relish(佐料)、lettuce(生菜)、turkey(火鸡肉)、onion(洋葱)、turkey slices(火鸡肉片)、sandwich(三明治)这些词及表达它们数量的方法。‎ ‎2.学会描述三明治的制作工序。‎ ‎3.提升自己听和说的能力。‎ ‎【重点，难点】 ‎ 可数名词或不可数名词的甄别；听力中的快速记写；不可数名词数量的表达。‎ 温故知新 ‎ 从表格中选择适当的句子补全对话。‎ A.Then we cut up the bananas.‎ B.How many apples do we need?‎ C.How much honey do we need?‎ D.Can you make fruit salad?‎ E.What should we do then?‎ A: 1__‎ B:Yes, let me make it for you.‎ A:OK. 2____‎ B:Oh, only one. And we need honey and bananas.‎ A: 3___‎ B:About two teaspoons.‎ A:How many bananas do we need?‎ B:Three.‎ A: 4____‎ B:First we cut up the apple. Next we peel the bananas. 5_____ Finally mix it all up.‎ 知识链接 ‎“shake, milk shake,”、 “turkey”、 “orange”的使用。‎ 比较下列三组句子，回答问题。‎ ‎1.I love milk shake and my mom often make some milk shake for me.(uncountable noun)‎ Waiter, could you please give us two milk shakes?( countable noun)‎ ‎“shake, milk shake”通常是作______________，但具体到一份两份时是____________________。‎ ‎2.I want to eat another threee slices of turkey. ‎ Look at those turkeys! They are eating food. ‎ ‎“turkey”作“火鸡肉”时是_______________，作“一只一只的火鸡”时是____________。“chicken”也是。作“一只一只小鸡”时是______________，作“鸡肉”时是____________。当然，“Turkey”作专有名词时是国名“土耳其”。‎ ‎3.I like eating oranges), but I don’t like drinking orange.‎ ‎“orange”作“橘子、桔子”讲是 _____________，作“桔子汁”讲是____________。‎ 自主互助学习 一、仔细观察1a中的图片，完成下列问题。‎ 187‎ ‎1.借助图片提示，翻译表中的单词并打勾判断是可数名词还是不可数名词。然后小组大声朗读识记它们。‎ Word Meaning Countable Noun Uncountable Noun butter tomato relish ‎ ‎ lettuce turkey slices onion bread ‎2.弄清1a题意，按要求填写课本1a左边方框中的横线。‎ ‎3.模仿1b中的对话调查至少两位同学，并要求做好调查记录。被调查的同学根据你在1a中所填的信息回答。调查完成后，按照下列提示向搭档做出报道。‎ ‎*** likes ... ... in his/her sandwiches, but *** doesn’t like ... ... in his sandwiches.‎ 二、听力。‎ ‎ 1.弄清2a、2b题意。小组讨论：如何做才能按要求完成2a、2b。在快速的语速情况下，如何准确记录下题目所要求填写的原料？‎ ‎2.仔细听磁带，完成题目要求。‎ ‎3.同老师同学核对答案，根据自己的错误可向老师提出再次播放磁带的要求。 ‎ ‎4.根据听力所听信息及你们在1a中所填的信息，询问或回答他（她）或你制作你们最喜爱的三明治的具体工序。‎ ‎5.向老师同学展示你们的作品。‎ ‎【课堂练习】‎ 翻译下列词组。‎ 一块面包_____________________;两茶匙佐料______________________;十片火鸡肉____________‎ ‎___________/________________________;一个洋葱_____________;把......放到......__________________;一瓶佐料______________________;‎ 二、选择填空。‎ ‎1. I’m hungry. Could you please bring me some _________. ‎ A.popcorn poppers B.bread C.medicine D.relish ‎2.I often have _______or ______ for breakfast.‎ A.breads;noodles B.bread; noodle C.bread; noodles D. breads; noodle.‎ ‎3.—Would you mind giving me something to eat? —Sure. Here’s some __________.‎ ‎ A. potatoes B.turkey C. orange D.banana milk shakes ‎【要点归纳】‎ ‎ 罗列所学到的不可数名词；不可数名词数量的表达；回顾哪些词既可用作不可数名词，又可用作可数名词；三明治的制作工序。‎ ‎【拓展练习】‎ ‎ 编出三明治的制作说明。‎ ‎【总结反思】‎ ‎【课题】Unit8 How do you make a banana milk shake? Section B3a-4（5）（1课时）‎ ‎【学习目标】‎ ‎1.学会描述超级鸡肉三明治和优等火鸡三明治的制作工序。‎ 187‎ ‎2.学会编写一种你所喜欢的食物的制作工序。‎ ‎3.提升自己说和写的能力。‎ ‎【重点，难点】 ‎ 在不同类型三明治的制作工序中找到编写任何一种食物制作说明的方法。‎ 温故知新 ‎ 再次翻译下列词组。‎ 一块面包_____________________;两茶匙佐料______________________;十片火鸡肉____________‎ ‎___________/________________________;一个洋葱_____________;把......放到......__________________;一瓶佐料______________________。‎ 二、优秀作业展示。选出编写较好的四篇三明治制作说明并由作者到讲台朗读。‎ 用所给词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1.How many ___________(sandwich) would you like?‎ ‎2.There are three bottles of ________ (orange) and five ________(orange) in the fridge.‎ ‎3.On Thanksgiving Day, many westerners eat _________(turkey) and pumpkin pie.‎ ‎4.We need _________(cut) up two apples to make fruit shake.‎ ‎5.Then add some relish to the three chicken __________(slice).‎ 知识链接 单词“other,another,the other,else”辨析。‎ 单 词 基 本 含 义 使 用 结 构 使 用 方 法 other 别的，另外的 other+复数名词/ones；‎ some/many/数词+other表示“几个，一些别的”‎ 指在上文提及或直接提到的整个范围中除前面说到的某者或几者外剩余部分中的某一些。‎ another 另一个 another + 单数名词/one；‎ another+数词+名词=数词+more+名词，表“再...几个”‎ 指在上文提及或直接提到的整个范围中除前面说到的某者或几者外剩余部分中的某一者。‎ the other 其余的 the other+单数名词/one；‎ the other+复数名词/ones 特指两者中除其中一者外的另一者，或是特指多者中被列举完后剩下的最后一个。‎ else 别的 不定代词+else（anything else）;‎ 特殊疑问代词+else(what else)‎ 用于不定代词或特殊疑问代词后作后置限定修饰语。‎ 注：others, the others的使用方法与other, the other的使用方法一致，不一样的地方others, the others已经包含了名词，后边不能再+名词或one(ones)。‎ 根据上边知识链接所述，完成下列练习。‎ ‎1.I’m not full yet. Please give me _________two slices of bread.‎ ‎ A. other B. the other C. another D. else ‎2.I have ever been to (曾经到过)America. I want to visit __________ countries next year.‎ ‎ A. the other B. others C. other D. another ‎3.Look at the twins! One loves banana milk shake, ________ loves super chicken sandwiches.‎ ‎ A. the other B.the others C. another D. other ‎4.Is there anything ______ that you still can’t understand?‎ ‎ A. another B. ther others C. else D. others 自主互助学习 187‎ 一、仔细阅读3a中的原料单和制作说明，完成下列问题。‎ ‎1.翻译下列词组并大声朗读识记它们。‎ 两块面包___________________;一茶匙蜂蜜_____________________;两片鸡肉_________________‎ ‎________ /__________________________;三瓶佐料_________________________;把...放到...上____‎ ‎_____________________; 切碎______________;加...到...里（上）_____________________________;‎ 把...放到..顶上______________________;首先_________;然后________;接下来_________;最后______; ‎ ‎2.弄清3a题意，按要求填写课本3a下边的图表。‎ ‎3.核对答案并按照原料提示复述超级三明治制作说明。‎ 二、弄清3b题意并完成选词填空。然后核对答案并复述优等火鸡三明治制作说明。‎ ‎【课堂练习】‎ 根据所给的原料清单，编写优等牛肉三明治制作说明。‎ Ingredients Great Beef Sandwich ‎2 slices of bread ‎2 teaspoons of butter ‎1 carrot(cut up)‎ Lettuce ‎5 beef slices ‎2 teaspoons of relish ‎ __________________________________________________________________‎ ‎____________________________________________________________________‎ ‎____________________________________________________________________‎ ‎____________________________________________________________________‎ ‎____________________________________________________________________‎ ‎____________________________________________________________________‎ ‎【要点归纳】‎ ‎ 回顾编写一种食物制作说明所需用到的重要词组及写作大致模式。‎ ‎【拓展练习】‎ First ,beat two eggs in a bowl,add some salt and stir(搅；拌)them . Cut up some garlic(大蒜)and chillies(辣椒). Then heat(加热)some oil(油) in a pan(平底锅)and put the garlic and chillies into the pan to cook them for a little while(一小会儿）, put the egg into the pan and stir them for one minute. After that, pour it in a bowl. Next, boil(煮沸)a pot(锅)of water and cook some noodles for 5 minutes. After that, put the cooked noodles in a bowl and add the egg from that bowl to the noodles. If you like, you can pour a little sauce（酱油）and vinegar(醋) into it and stir them. Finally eat the egg noodles.‎ ‎ 1.What does this passage teach you to make? _____________________________‎ ‎2.How long does it take you to cook the noodles? __________________________‎ ‎3.According to the passage, what do we need to make egg noodles?_______________________________‎ ‎_____________________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎【总结反思】‎ Unit9 Can you come to my party?‎ Section A (1a--2c)‎ ‎[学习目标] ‎ 187‎ ‎1.重点词汇：prepare, prepare for, exam, flu, available, another time. ‎ ‎2.重点句型：(1)—Can you come to my party ? —Sure, I’d love to ./ Sorry, I can’t. (2) Thanks for asking. ‎ ‎3.重点语法：用情态动词can来邀请别人做某事。‎ 自主预习 ‎1、为了考试做准备 ‎ ‎2、帮我父母 ‎ ‎3、看医生 ‎ ‎4、得流感 ‎ ‎5、和我的朋友见面 ‎ ‎6、下一次 ‎ 合作探究 探究点一 总结情态动词can的用法：‎ ‎（1）表示“可能”“能够”。表示一种可能性。 ‎ 你周三能来我的生日会吗？ Can you come to my birthday party on Wednesday ? ‎ 你能和我一起打网球吗？ Can you play tennis with me ? ‎ 你明天晚上能来我的家吗？ Can you come over to my house tomorrow evening ? ‎ 她后天能去听音乐会吗？ Can she go to the concert the day after tomorrow ‎ ‎（2）can表示“能力”“能、会”。 ‎ 如She can run fast , but I can’t . ‎ 她能跑得很快，而我不能。 ‎ ‎（3）can表示许可、允许。 ‎ 如：We can listen to music in the music class . ‎ 我们能在音乐课上听音乐。 ‎ We can’t run in the hallways .‎ 跟踪训练 ‎ ‎1.— you come to my house for dinner?‎ ‎—Sure,___ ____ ____. Sorry, I can’t. I have to go to the doctor.‎ 探究点二 another, the another, the others, others的区别 Maybe another time.‎ Another意为“又一的；再一的”。泛指三者或三者以上中的另一个，其后常跟名词的单数形式。‎ 辨析：another, the other, the others, others 表示不确定数目中的“一个”与“另一个”时，用one…another…‎ 表示两件物品或两个人中“一个……另一个……”时，用one…the other…‎ 强调确定数目中的“一个……其余的……”用one…the others，the others相当于the other+复数名词。‎ 表示许多人或物中的“一部分……另一部分（并非全部）……”，用some…others，others 相当于other+复数名词。‎ 表示许多人或物中的“一部分……其余的全部”，用some…the others…‎ 跟踪训练 ‎（ ）2.The shoes are too big ,so I’d like to try ____ pair.‎ ‎ A. other B. the other 187‎ ‎ C. another D. the others 达标测评 根据句意及首字母提示完成单词。‎ ‎1. I can’t go to the party. I have to p_____ for an exam.‎ ‎2. I don’t like this green skirt. Please show me a one.‎ ‎3. I’m s ,but I can’t go shopping with you this afternoon.‎ ‎4. You have the f _____ , you have to go to the doctor.‎ ‎5. I’m not a_____ , I can’t go to the movies with you.‎ ‎6. I have too much h______ this weekend. ‎ ‎7. —Can you go shopping with me?‎ ‎ —S_____, I’d love to .‎ 二、单项选择。‎ ‎( ) 1. —Happy birthday! —____________.‎ A. Thanks B. The same to you C. I do too D. Not at all ‎ ‎( ) 2.You can’t find him. He usually _____ at 4:00. A. have an English lesson B. is having an English lesson C. will go to the guitar lesson D. goes to the guitar lesson ‎ ‎( ) 3.—What are you going to do this weekend? —I’d like _____my parents.‎ A．to visit B．visit C．visiting D. visit ‎( ) 4. —She has a headache．She can’t attend the meeting. —______.‎ A．It doesn’t matter B．It sounds wonderful C．I’m sorry to hear that D. really ‎( ) 5. —I’m sorry，I can’t go to the movies with you．—Oh，that’s too bad．Maybe _____ time．‎ A．the other B．other C．another D. others ‎( ) 6.—Can you go to the science museum with me tomorrow?‎ ‎—_______，but I have to study for my chemistry test.‎ A．I'd love to B．Never mind C．It’s nothing D. Yes, please ‎( ) 7.He ______ stay at home, because his mother was ill. A. has to B. have to C. had D. had to ‎( ) 8.Can you come to my party ___Sunday afternoon?‎ ‎ A、in B、on C、at D、with 三、完成句子。‎ ‎1. Her mother is ill, she has to _______ _______ _______ ______.(去看病)‎ ‎2. I’m sorry, I_____ _____ _____ _____ _____(必须得帮助我的父母).‎ ‎3. ______ ______ ______ ______ (谢谢你帮助)me. ‎ ‎4. I’m not happy. I have _____ _____ _____ _____ _____.(太多家庭作业要做)‎ ‎5. She can’t come to your party. She _____ _____ ______.(没空) ‎ ‎6.Ｉ______ ______ ______ (恐怕不行). I ______ ______ ______(得了流感).‎ ‎ ‎ Unit9 Can you come to my party?‎ ‎ Section A (2d--3c)‎ ‎[学习目标] 1.重点词汇：until, hang, hang out, catch, invite, accept, refuse. 2.重点句型：(1)I’m afraid I can’t. (2)I’m not sure. I might have to meet my friends.‎ 187‎ ‎ 3.重点语法：学会礼貌地接受邀请和拒绝邀请。‎ 自主预习 ‎1. I'm v______ （看望）my aunt this weekend.‎ ‎2. We have to s______（学习） for the math test.‎ ‎3. Can you come to my b_____ （生日）party?‎ ‎4. Can you h_____（闲逛） out with us on Saturday?‎ ‎5.Thanks for i______（邀请） me to your party.‎ 合作探究 探究点一 have to 与 must ‎1、have to 的用法 　　情态动词没有人称和数的变化，而且所用的时态也受到一定的限制，但是have to 有人称和数的变化，可用于多种时态中，在一般现在时中，当主语是第三人称单数时，要用has to, 其余人称用have to；一般过去时中用had to；一般将来时中用will have to, 例如： 2. have to 与must 的区别 　have to 和must 都有“必须”的意思，那么它们有哪些不同呢？ 　(1) 含义和用法上的区别： 　　have to 强调客观上需要做某事，即表示外界条件的需要不得不做某事，含有“形势逼迫”的意味；must 强调说话者主观上认为必须做某事，含有“主观判断”的意味， 　(2) 否定式的区别： 　 have to 的否定式意为“不必”，must的否定式意为“禁止；不允许”。因此，以must开头的一般疑问句的肯定回答为“Yes, 主语+must”，否定回答为“No, 主语+needn't / don't have to”。例如： 　---Must I finish the homework now? 我必须现在完成作业吗？ 　---Yes, you must. (No, you needn't / don't have to) 是的，你必须现在完成。（不，你不必。） 跟踪训练 ‎ ‎1. I ______ finish my homework first.‎ ‎2. It’s raining outside . You ________ take an umbrella.‎ 达标测评 一、根据句意及首字母提示完成单词。‎ ‎1. He isn’t leaving u_____ next Wednesday.‎ ‎2. If I run faster, I will c______ you.‎ ‎3. He often i_____ me to go to the movies.‎ ‎4. Did she a______ or r______ your invitation?‎ ‎5.—Let’s play tennis .— That s______ great.‎ 二、用所给词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1. Can you __________(come) to my house for dinner? Sorry, I can’t .‎ ‎2. Thanks for __________ (invite) me to your birthday party.‎ ‎3. He’s trying _________(go) out, please _________(help) him _________(open) the door.‎ ‎4. Do you want_______(hang) out with us Saturday afternoon?‎ ‎5. Would you like ______(come) to my office ______(discuss) the report?‎ 三、选择填空。‎ ‎( ) 1. Some of the players are pleased with the result, but aren’t.‎ A. other B. another C. others D. the other ‎( ) 2. There is way of saying “Goodbye”. Do you know?‎ 187‎ A. other B. another C. others D. the other ‎( ) 3. The little girl slowly closed one eye and then .‎ A. other B. another C. others D. the other ‎( ) 4. What things can you see in the Natural Science Museum?‎ A. other B. another C. others D. the other ‎( ) 5. How many more oranges can I have? You can have one more. are for Tom.‎ A. The others B. Another C. Others D. The other ‎( ) 6. Herry be at home because he phoned me from the farm just now.‎ A. mustn’t B. isn’t able C. may not D. can’t ‎( ) 7. ,can you tell me the way to the park? .I’m a stranger. Please ask that policeman. ‎ A. Excuse me; Excuse me B. Excuse me; Sorry C. Sorry, Excuse me D. Sorry, Sorry ‎( ) 8. Thanks a lot for me your party.‎ A. invite; for B. invite; to ‎ C. inviting; for D. inviting; to ‎( ) 9. you study for a math exam?‎ A. Have; to B. Do; have to C. Do; have D. Have to; ‎ ‎( ) 10. Can you cook fish? .It’s easy.‎ ‎ A. No, I can’t B. Yes, I can ‎ C. Sorry, I can’t D. Yes, I need 三、按要求完成句子，每空一词 ‎1. We _________________________________(一起去骑车旅行)last fall when he visited you.‎ ‎2. I ________________________________________ (愿意去，但是我没空).‎ ‎3. Can you ____________________________ (和我们一起去闲逛) on Sunday night?‎ ‎4. I’m sorry, I ___________________________________.(不得不为数学考试而学习)‎ ‎5. They’re __________. They __________________________.(他们没空，他们可能必须和朋友见面)‎ Unit9 Can you come to my party?‎ Section B(1a—1f)‎ ‎[学习目标] 1.重点词汇：the day before yesterday , the day after tomorrow, weekday, look after. 2.重点句型：—What’s today? —It’s Monday the 14 th . 3.重点语法：学会询问及回答日期的表达方法。‎ 自主预习 ‎1.在周末______‎ ‎2.在工作日_______‎ ‎3.上钢琴课__________________‎ ‎4.后天________‎ ‎5.照看他的妹妹______________‎ ‎6.和我打网球___________‎ 合作探究 187‎ 询问星期 ‎—What day is it today / tomorrow / the day after tomorrow? ‎ ‎—It is We。dnesday.‎ ‎ 询问日期 ‎—What is the date today / tomorrow / the day after tomorrow? ‎ ‎—It is Nov. 2nd.  询问日期和星期 ‎—What's / is today?   — It is Wednesday Nov. 2nd.  — What was yesterday / the day before yesterday?  — It was Tuesday Nov. 1st. 跟踪训练 ‎1. — ______ ______ ______ ______ today?‎ ‎— It’s Saturday.‎ ‎2. — ______ ______ ______ today?‎ ‎—It’s October 1st today.‎ 达标测评 一、用所给词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎1. Is Ted (go) to the dentist tomorrow?‎ ‎2. I would love ( come ) to your house.‎ ‎3. Thanks a lot for (look after) my little brother.‎ ‎4. Thanks for ( invite ) me to your party.‎ ‎5. His mother doesn’t go shopping on ( weekday ).‎ ‎6. Why don’t you (invite, invitation) your cousin to your party?‎ ‎7. How about ________ (write) a letter to her?‎ ‎8. Why ( not go ) to Wang lin’s birthday party?‎ ‎9. The ( two ) Sunday in May is Mother’s Day.‎ ‎10 .Miss Gao is our new teacher and she is going to teach us (lessons, classes) one day.‎ 二、单项选择 ‎( ) 1. Thank you ______me to your party．‎ ‎ A. asking B. ask C. for asking D. to asking ‎( ) 2. May 12th is Xiao Ming’s birthday．He____ us to his birthday party．‎ ‎ A. invites B. makes C. tells D. pleases ‎( ) 3. In my class，some students love music; ____are fond of drawing and _____enjoy reading．‎ ‎ A. some；the other B. others；the other C. others；the others D. some； others ‎( ) 4.一What day is it today? 一It’s _______．‎ ‎ A. evening B. June C. Saturday D. summer ‎( ) 5.－Linda，when shall we take a walk?－After I finish_____ the dishes．‎ A. wash B. washed C. to wash D. washing ‎( ) 6.一May I use your ruler?－_______.‎ A. Yes, please B. You are nice C. It doesn’t matter D. It was a pleasure ‎( ) 7. He eats ______ meat and he is ______ heavy.‎ 187‎ ‎ A. too much ; too much B. much too; much too ‎ C. too much ; much too D. much too; too much ‎( ) 8. ______ a cold winter evening, he came to visit me.‎ ‎ A. In B. At C. With D. On ‎ ‎( ) 9. — Sorry but I have to look after my brother.‎ ‎ — That ‘s too ______. Maybe ______ time.‎ ‎ A. bad, another B. bad, other ‎ C. good, another D. good, other ‎( ) 10. Jack can play ______ tennis very well, but he can’t play ______ piano.‎ ‎ A. the, the B. /, the ‎ C. /. / D. the, /‎ 三、 根据汉语提示完成句子。‎ ‎1. Would you like ______________________ (踢足球) with us.‎ ‎2. I’m going to _____________________________ (上一节钢琴课).‎ ‎3. She has to _____________________________ (照顾她的妹妹).‎ ‎4. I will go to the doctor _____________________ (后天).‎ ‎5. They had a piano lesson ______ ______ ______ ______ (前天).‎ Unit9 Can you come to my party?‎ ‎ Section B (2a—2e)‎ ‎[学习目标] 1.重点词汇：invitation, reply, forward, delete, print, sad, goodbye, take a trip, glad, preparation, glue, without, surprised, look forward to, housewarming. 2.重点句型：(1)Thanks so much for planning this. (2) Let me know if you need my help. (3) I look forward to hearing from you all. 3.重点语法：学会用书信的方式发出邀请或接受和拒绝邀请。‎ 自主预习 ‎1.制作一份请柬 _____________________‎ ‎2.去旅行 _______________‎ ‎3.举行一个惊喜聚会 _____________________‎ ‎4.盼望 ___________________ ‎ ‎5.没有说再见__________________‎ ‎6.What a great idea! ________________‎ ‎7. Thanks so much for __________________‎ ‎8. help out with any of the party preparations _____________________‎ 合作探究 excuse me与 sorry ‎（1) excuse me是会话时常用的客套话，常用在句首，有“劳驾，请问，请原谅，对不起，打扰了”等意思 eg：Excuse me. Are you Mr Black?‎ Excuse me. Where is the bus stop? Excuse me. I don’t agree with you.‎ ‎（2）sorry(I’m sorry.)是说错话，做错事，认错人等之后，向对方致歉的用语，其答语是“That’s all right.” “Not at all.” “Never mind.” “It doesn’t matter.”等。‎ eg :　Ａ：I’m sorry I’m late. Ｂ：Ｔhat’s all right.‎ ‎（3）sorry还可用来表示对别人病情，身体不适，处于困境等感到同情，伤心，难过。‎ eg : A: Tom is ill. B: I’m sorry to hear that.‎ 187‎ ‎ 跟踪训练 ‎( ) 1. ,can you tell me the way to the park? .I’m stranger. Please ask that policeman. ‎ A. Excuse me; Excuse me B. Excuse me; Sorry ‎ C. Sorry; Excuse me D. Sorry; Sorry Surprise Surprised Surprise 作及物动词，“使惊奇，使意外”，后跟“人”作宾语。构成短语surprise sb.‎ 达标测评 一、根据句意及首字母提示补全单词。‎ ‎1. Thanks a lot for your i_________. But I have to stay at home.‎ ‎2. I’m sorry I can’t visit you. Because I’m r______ busy.‎ ‎3. We shouldn’t play computer games on w_______.‎ ‎4. He is coming back s______.‎ ‎5. Please r______ to the invitation by Friday.‎ ‎6. She is very s______ , because her mother is ill.‎ ‎7. I went to school w______ having breakfast this morning.‎ ‎8. I’m g______ to hear that you can come to the party.‎ ‎9. She will be s______ if we have a surprise party for her.‎ ‎10. We can help with some of the party p________.‎ 二、单项选择。‎ ‎( ) 1. I’m sad _____ her go, and this party is the best way ______ goodbye.‎ ‎ A. see, say B. to see, say C. to see, to say D. see, to say ‎( ) 2. I have a great idea about _____.‎ ‎ A. what to do that B. how to do 　‎ ‎ C. how can do D. how to do that ‎( ) 3. The boy does well in all his .He is a good student.‎ A. lesson B. lessons C. class D. classes ‎( ) 4. He can’t come to the party. He stay at home.‎ A. has B. have C .has to D. have to ‎( ) 5. Listen! Helen is singing in the next room.‎ ‎ It be Helen. She has gone to Beijing.‎ A. may B. can’t C mustn’t D. should ‎( ) 6. I want you up but I can’t your number.‎ A. call; know B. to call; knows C. to call; look for D. to call; find ‎( ) 7. Thanks a lot helping me my English.‎ A. to; in B. to; with C. for; in D. for; with ‎( ) 8. —_______ tomorrow?‎ ‎—It’s Friday the 5 th.‎ A. What B. What’s C. when is D. What day is ‎( ) 9. －What are you going to do for vacation?‎ ‎ －I plan ______ my uncle in Hong Kong.‎ ‎　 A. visiting B. to visit C. visit D. visits ‎( ) 10. Thanks a lot for ____me____ your birthday party.‎ 187‎ A. invite for B. invite to C. inviting for D. inviting to 三、 根据汉语提示完成句子。‎ ‎1. 我真的非常喜欢李老师。‎ I ______ ______ Mr Li ______ ______.‎ ‎2. 我的家人准备在这个月末去武汉度假。‎ ‎ My family ______ ______ ______ ______ ______Wuhan ______ ______ ______ ______this month.‎ ‎3. 如果你需要我的帮助让我知道。‎ ‎ Let me know if ______ ______ ______ ______>‎ ‎4. 我将仍然高兴帮助聚会的任何一项准备工作。‎ ‎ I’ll still ______ ______ ______ help out with ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ .‎ ‎5. 我们将在下个星期五为她举行一个惊喜聚会。‎ ‎ We’ll ______ ______ ______ ______ for her next Friday.‎ ‎6. 我盼望收到你的来信。‎ ‎ I ______ ______ ______ ______ ______ you all.‎ ‎7. 我们正在计划一个乔迁聚会。‎ We are ______ ______ ______ ______.‎ Unit9 Can you come to my party?‎ ‎ Section B(3a--4)‎ ‎[学习目标] 1.重点词汇：opening, concert, smartly, headmaster, event, guest, calendar. 2.重点句型：(1)I would like to invite you to the opening of our new library at No.9 High School. (2) Please dress smartly. (3) What will happen after this?3.重点语法：学会用书信的方式发出邀请或接受和拒绝邀请。‎ 自主预习 我最喜欢的老师之一________________________‎ 举行聚会的最佳时间________________________‎ 什么种类的食物________________________‎ 新图书馆的开幕式______________________‎ 去听音乐会____________________‎ 穿着光鲜______________________‎ 在日历上_____________________‎ 回复邀请______________________‎ 合作探究 辨析：like, love与enjoy 相同点：都有“喜欢”的意思。‎ 不同点：‎ ‎（1）like“喜欢”、“爱好”，是普通用语，指对某人某物赞许或发生兴趣，并积极参加活动，不带感情色彩，语气较弱而冷静，后接名词、代词、动名词或不定式作宾语。‎ eg: We all like English.‎ ‎ I like doing morning exercises every morning.‎ ‎（2)love意为“ 爱好，爱”，在感情上比like强烈，表示深深的爱或对异性的爱。Love “爱”讲时，后面一般不接动词不定式，但作“喜欢”讲时，可接动名词或不定式作宾语。‎ 187‎ eg: I love to ride a bike. / My brother loves playing basketball.‎ ‎（3)enjoy意为“喜爱，欣赏，享受”，指对某样东西或某件事感觉愉快，广泛用于从外界事物中得到喜悦，领略到乐趣，后接名词、代词或动名词作宾语，不能接不定式。‎ We all enjoyed the film very much.‎ 跟踪训练 ‎( ) 1. All of us enjoyed some English songs.‎ A. learned B. to learn C. learning D. learn ‎( ) 2. Though his income(收入)was small, he to buy books.‎ A. like B. likes C. loved D. love 达标测评 一、根据句意及首字母提示完成单词。‎ ‎1. I read the c______ just now. It’s October 28th today.‎ ‎2. His parents like country music. They are going to a c______ this weekend.‎ ‎3. When you come to a party, you have to dress s______.‎ ‎4. The 2008 Olympic Games was one of the most important e______ in modern Chinese history. ‎ ‎5. This young man is the h______ of our school.‎ 二、单项选择 ‎( ) 1. Thank you ______ me to your party．‎ ‎ A. asking B. ask C. for asking D. to asking ‎( ) 2. May 12th is Xiao Ming’s birthday．He____ us to his birthday party．‎ ‎ A. invites B. makes C. tells D. pleases ‎( ) 3. —What ______ drinks would you like _______?‎ ‎ —Orange juice.‎ ‎ A. kind of; serve B. kinds of; to serve C. kinds of; serve D. kind of; to serve ‎( ) 4. —What day is it today? —It’s _______．‎ ‎ A. evening B. June C. Saturday D. summer ‎( ) 5. －When is the best time ______ the party?‎ ‎ —Let’s have it ______ Saturday night.‎ A. have; at B. to have; in C. to have ; on D. have; on ‎( ) 6. —When should people reply ______ the party?‎ ‎ They should do it ______ Friday.‎ A. to; on B. /; by C. to; by D. to; at 三、 根据汉语提示完成句子。‎ ‎1. I would like to invite you _____ ______ ______ ______ (来参加我们新图书馆的开幕式) our new library.‎ ‎2. They often ______ ______ ______ ______ (去听音乐会).‎ ‎3. You should ______ ______ (穿着漂亮) to go to Jim’s birthday party. ‎ ‎4. Please bring one book ______ ______ ______ ______ (作为给新图书馆的礼物 ) the new library.‎ ‎5. I must ______ ______ ______ ______ (为数学考试而学习).‎ ‎6. The opening will be ______ ______ ______ ______ (在上午) Wednesday, January 8th at 9:00‎ ‎7. ______ ______ ______(将会发生) if we have the party today?‎ Unit9 Can you come to my party?‎ 187‎ ‎（Self—check）‎ 一、根据句意及首字母提示完成单词。‎ ‎1. We can know the date on the c______.‎ ‎2. They have to go to school on w______.‎ ‎3. He left angrily w______ saying goodbye. ‎ ‎4. Let’s go to the c______ on the weekend.‎ ‎5. She can’t come to your party. She has to p______ for an exam. ‎ 二、单项选择。‎ ‎( ) 1.They arrived there cold Sunday afternoon.‎ A in the B. on the C. in a D. on a ‎( ) 2.Antia is her little cousin this weekend.‎ A. looking for B. looking after C. looking at D. looking out ‎( ) 3.There is going to a class meeting tomorrow.‎ A have B. has C. be D. is ‎( ) 4.The old man has two sons. One is a worker, is a teacher.‎ A another B. other C. others D. the other ‎( ) 5.You are late again. Why a little earlier?‎ A. not you come B. do you come C. don’t you D. not come ‎( ) 6.The weather will be cloudy .‎ A. every day B. yesterday C. now D. the day after tomorrow 三、按要求转换下列句式．‎ ‎1. Can she go to the movies?（作肯定回答）‎ Yes, she .‎ ‎2. I have to do my homework on Sunday。（改为一般疑问句）‎ ‎ to do my homework on Sunday?‎ ‎3. They can play tennis at 4:oo pm. （对划线部分提问）‎ ‎ they play tennis?‎ ‎4. Why don’t you go fishing with me? （改为同义句）‎ ‎ fishing with me?‎ ‎5. Jenny asked me to come to her birthday party last week. （改为同义句）‎ Jenny her birthday party last week.‎ ‎6 Thank you for inviting me. （改为同义句）‎ Thank you for .‎ ‎7. Mrs Brown is not free every day. （改为同义句）‎ ‎ Mrs Brown is every day.‎ 四、短文填词。‎ Hi, Lydia,‎ Thanks a lot for the i______. I’m sorry I c_____ visit next week. I am r______ busy. On Monday, I have to s______ for my science t______. The test is really hard. On T______, I’m h______ out with my friends. On Wednesday, I have to play s______. On Thursday, I’m going to my friend’s b______ party. On Friday, I have to go camping with my classmates. Please call me later W______ soon.‎ Sonia 187‎ Unit 10 If you go to the party, you’ll have a great time!‎ Period 1 Section A 1a-2c 学习目标 知识目标：熟练掌握句型：‎ ‎1. A:I think I’m going to the party with Karen and Ann. ‎ B: If you do ,you’ll have a great time.‎ ‎2. If you do , the teachers won’t let you in.‎ ‎3. What will happen if they have the party tomorrow?‎ 熟练掌握并能正确运用以下词汇：jeans, have a good time, organize 技能目标： 熟练运用“will+动词原形”和现在进行时表示将来的语言结构。‎ 了解并初步运用“if引导的条件状语从句+will”结构来谈论因果关系。‎ 情感态度：在活动中学会统筹安排事情。‎ 课前准备 Ⅰ. 你会唱If You Are Happy这首歌吗？请你从网上搜索这首歌并学会它。‎ Ⅱ. 假设你的好友本周六晚上要举行生日聚会，你打算去参加。请试着回答下列问题：‎ How are you going there? ________________________________________________‎ Whom are you going with? ________________________________________________‎ What time are you going? ________________________________________________‎ What clothes will you wear?________________________________________________‎ What will you bring? ________________________________________________‎ What will you do there? _________________________________________________‎ 学习过程 Before listening ‎1. 齐唱英文歌曲If You Are Happy。和同伴练习对话：‎ A：If you are happy, what will you do? B: If I am happy, I will…‎ A: If you are sad, what will you do? B: If I am sad, I will…‎ ‎2. Groupwork: 小组内交流课前准备Ⅱ的内容。用“If you do, you’ll…”在小组内互动。‎ ‎3. 观察1a中的图画，默读1a中的句子，并进行匹配。并大声朗读1a句子。‎ While listening ‎1. 听1b中的录音，完成1a句子中的答语。。‎ ‎2. 再听一遍1b的录音并跟读， 和同伴说一下你们听到的表“假设”的句子。看看谁说得多!(可参考1a的内容)‎ 观察与思考：观察1a中含有if的句子，你发现主句和从句的特点吗？if引导的是一个条件句，主句用__________(时态)，从句用__________(时态)。注意：在与if条件句连用的主句中我们一般用will 表示将来时，而不用be going to 表示将来时。‎ 练习：用所给动词的适当形式填空。‎ ‎(1) If he ___________(go) to the party, he ________(have) a great time. ‎ ‎(2) If the rain______________(stop) tonight, we will go to the cinema.‎ ‎(3) I’ll buy a computer if I ______________(have) enough money.‎ ‎(4) You ______________(not get) nervous if you __________(do) enough exercise.‎ ‎(5) If she ______________(be) kind to me, I______________(not argue) with her.‎ ‎3. Pairwork: 看1a中的图片，仿1c的内容编对话。‎ ‎4. 听录音，完成2a的听力任务。‎ ‎5. 熟读2b中的句子。再听录音，完成2b的听力任务。‎ ‎6. 听第三遍录音，选择正确的句子填空。检测自己回答问题的情况。‎ 187‎ Andrea: Hi, Mark. I want to have a class party. Will you help me organize it?‎ Mark: Sure, Andrea. I can help you. So when shall we have the party?‎ Andrea: Let’s have it today after class.‎ Mark: No, today is too early. ________________‎ Andrea: Okay, let’s have it tomorrow.‎ Mark: Hmm… There’s a test tomorrow. ______________let’s have it on the weekend.‎ Andrea: Okay, let’s have it on Saturday afternoon. We can all meet and watch a video.‎ Mark: No, I don’t think we should watch a video. __________ let’s play party games.‎ Andrea: Okay, good idea. ______________‎ Mark: Sure, I can do that.__________‎ Andrea: Yes, that’s no problem.‎ A. Can you organize the party games?‎ B. If we have it today. Half the class won’t come.‎ C. Some students will be bored.‎ D. And can you make some food for us?‎ E. Students will leave early to study for their tests.‎ ‎7. 模仿秀：跟读录音后，分角色朗读对话，注意语音、语调，看谁模仿录音最标准。‎ After listening ‎1. Pairwork: 和同伴分角色扮演2c中的对话。 2. 同伴交流：‎ A：I think I’m going to ride my bike. (be late) B: If you do, you’ll be late.‎ A: I think I’m going to work until night. (be tired) B: ____________________‎ A: I think I’m going to exercise every day.(be healthy) B: ______________________‎ A: I think I’m going to work hard. (get A) B:_____________________‎ 两人一组表演对话后，将对话的内容补全。‎ 知识巩固 Ⅰ. 根据首字母及句意补全单词。‎ ‎1. Don’t wear j ________ to go to the party, or your teacher will be angry.‎ ‎2. Who are going to o_________ this important English speech?‎ ‎3. I had a g ________ time at Ann’s birthday party yesterday.‎ ‎4. What will h _________ in a hundred years?‎ Ⅱ. 根据提供的关键词，用if组成完整的句子。‎ ‎1. surf the Internet, worry about ___________‎ ‎2. be sunny, go for a trip ___________‎ ‎3. watch the match, have a great time ____________‎ ‎4. not finish homework , be angry_________‎ 课堂反思 本单元我们学习了用__________引导的条件状语从句来谈论因果关系。‎ 我们应注意以下几点：‎ ‎(1) if引导的条件句位置灵活，可直接放在主句后面。若if引导的从句在前时，应在句中加__________(标点符号)。‎ ‎(2) 如果if条件句谈论的是今后可能出现的情况，则主句大多用_______时；若if条件句谈论的是客观事实，则主句大多用_________时或含情态动词的句子。‎ ‎(3) 在if条件句中通常用________时代替一般将来时表将来。‎ 家庭作业 ‎ ‎1. 背诵1b的对话 ‎ ‎2. 结合课前准备Ⅱ的内容，仿照1c或2c编对话。‎ 187‎ 1. 依据学习目标，预习下一个学案的课前准备。 ‎ Unit 10 If you go to the party, you’ll have a great time!‎ ‎ Period 2 Section A 2d—3c 学习目标： 知识目标：熟练掌握句型：‎ ‎1. A: What will you do if you go to the old people’s home visit?‎ B: If I go to that one, I’ll bring them some flowers.‎ ‎2. I think that’s a great idea! If we do that, more people will want to play the games.‎ 熟练掌握并能正确运用以下词汇：take away, clean –up, flower 技能目标： 学习运用祈使句来制订规章制度，并能运用if引导的条件状语从句、现在进行时(表示将来)、情态动词should等语言结构来发表自己的观点，谈论事情的结果。‎ 情感态度：让学生了解社交场所的礼仪和习惯。培养学生关爱老人和社会的良好品德。‎ 课前准备 Ⅰ. 文化欣赏 聚会是现代社会交往中很常见的一种形式，为了能够在各类型的聚会中得心应手，需要注意一些基本的礼仪。‎ ‎(1) 庆祝会。参加这种性质的聚会时需要把握住“喜庆”原则，不能过于拘谨、古板或严肃。但在一些正式的庆祝会上，参与者应注意其中的礼节，例如在给老人祝寿时，做晚辈应注意言谈举止，在选择座次时应听从主人的安排，不要“先入为主”，在选择买什么礼品时，也要考虑考虑庆祝的特点。‎ ‎(2) 其他聚会，如茶话会、纪念会等等，同样要求参与者举止得体，切忌喧宾夺主、哗众取宠、忘乎所以。‎ Ⅱ. 你的班级规章制度有哪些？请你和同伴交流写出来！‎ Don't Please You can't You mustn't You should You'd better not Let's Why not[来源:学.科.网]‎ Ⅲ. 如果你有一次社会实践的机会，你打算去哪里？如果去那里，你打算做哪些具体的事情？I’m going to _________. If I go to that one. I’ll__________________.‎ 学习过程 Warming up ‎1. Groupwork: 小组内交流课前准备Ⅱ的内容。请尝试用“Don’t…或“If you… , you will…”来说明如果违反将受到的惩罚。‎ ‎2. Groupwork: Suppose our school is going to have a party. If you want to join the party, what will you do and what won’t you do?‎ While reading ‎1. 阅读2d，找出含有if条件从子的复合句。[来源:学*科*网]‎ ‎_________________________________________________________________‎ ‎_________________________________________________________________‎ ‎2. 模仿秀：跟读，模仿语音，语调。然后大声朗读、并背诵对话. 3. 两人一组表演对话 187‎ 观察与思考：2d中是运用______句式来制定规则制度的。肯定形式和否定形式是如何表达的呢？我们还可以运用什么句式来表达禁止或劝告呢？(参考课前准备)‎ After reading ‎1. 3a. Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the verbs in brackets.‎ ‎2. Read 3a aloud for 5 minutes to recite or retell.‎ ‎3. 3b.结合课前准备II的内容，根据自己的实际情况和同伴一起交流。‎ ‎4. 3c Writing and speaking in group.‎ A：What will you do if you go to…? B: If I go to…, I’ll …‎ 根据3a，仿写一篇小短文，来介绍你学校的制度。‎ ‎_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________‎ 知识巩固 Ⅰ. 根据汉语或首字母提示写出单词。‎ ‎1. I saw many kinds of f ________ in the garden.‎ ‎2. I want you to r ________ the rules for school parties.[来源:Z&xx&k.Com]‎ ‎3. Don’t bring your mobile phone. If you do, the teachers will take it a _______.‎ ‎4. Let’s bring some _________(小吃)to the picnic.‎ ‎5. If Lucy________(穿)jeans to the party, we won’t let her in. So she should_________(穿)her beautiful pants.‎ Ⅱ. 用if连接下列句子，注意动词的变化。‎ ‎1. I will go to the park. It will not rain tomorrow.‎ ‎____________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎2. He won’t help others. He will never get others’ help.‎ ‎____________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎3. I will pass the exams. I’ll go to high school.‎ ‎____________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎4. She will become a doctor. She’ll make a lot of money.‎ ‎____________________________________________________________________________‎ ‎5. My father will save more money. He will stop smoking.[来源:Z&xx&k.Com]‎ ‎____________________________________________________________________________‎ III．词的适当形式填空 Many young people want_____(be) a professional athlete. They think it’s interesting and wonderful. If they ____________(become) a champion, they can make a living by___________(do) something they really love, and they______(be) famous. Lots of people will look up to them all the time and they can do lots of work___________(help) people. But ____(be) a professional athlete____(be) very dangerous and they can________(hurt) very often. People_____________(watch) them all time. This can make life difficult. So you must_________(think) about it before you want to be a professional athlete.‎ 课堂反思: 1. 你能综合运用祈使句，情态动词should,条件状语从句及一般将来时帮助班级制定一下班规吗？ 写一下你能用到的句型吧!‎ 187‎ ‎2. 通过本节课的学习，你还有哪些知识没有掌握？请做出标记。‎ 家庭作业 1. 熟背3a和3b的内容。 2.把课堂反思1中的任务以书面的形式写在作业本上。3.依据学习目标，预习下一个学案的课前准备。[来源:学,科,网]‎ Unit 10 If you go to the party, you’ll have a great time!‎ Period 3 Section B 1a—1d 学习目标 ‎ 知识目标：熟练掌握句型：‎ ‎1. If you become a Lion, you’ll travel around the world.‎ ‎2. A: I think you should go to college. ‎ ‎ B: But if I go to college, I’ll never become a great soccer player.‎ 熟练掌握并能正确运用以下词汇：agent, travel around the world.‎ 技能目标：理解对话中四个人物不同的想法和意图。运用if条件状语从句来表达因果关系。‎ 情感态度： 就对待某一事的看法上鼓励学生畅所欲言，帮助学生形成健康向上的人生观。‎ 课前准备[来源:Zxxk.Com]‎ Ⅰ. 你能写出下面这些活动的汉语吗？请选出你打算做的活动吧!‎ ‎( )travel around the world ________________‎ ‎( )become a professional soccer player _____________‎ ‎( )get an education ___________‎ ‎( )make a lot of money __________‎ ‎( )get a part-time job____________‎ ‎( )have a bake sale_____________‎ ‎( )join an English club___________‎ ‎( )go to college___________‎ Ⅱ. 你还打算去做哪些活动？__________ ________ __________ ___________‎ Ⅲ. 在以上的这些活动中，你认为最重要的是什么？请说出理由。参考句型：‎ ‎__________is the most important to me. If I _____________, I’ll_____________________.‎ 学习过程 ‎ Before listening ‎1. 检测、交流课前准备Ⅰ、Ⅱ的内容，选出大家公认的最有意义的活动。‎ ‎2. 结合课前准备Ⅲ和课本1的内容，借助下面的句型和同伴进行交流。‎ A：What is the most important to you in life?‎ B: I think it is important for me to…‎ A: Why?‎ B: If I…, I’ll… However, I don’t think it’s so important for me to …, because…‎ ‎3. 看1中的图片，先理解Lion和Agent的意思，然后回答：If you join the Lions/become a Lion, what will you do?‎ While listening ‎1. 听1b的录音。浏览1中所列的条目，在足球经纪人说的内容前写上“A”，在迈克父母说的内容前写上“P”‎ ‎2. 熟读1c中的句子，并理解句子的含义。‎ ‎3. 听第二遍录音，选择正确的句子完成1c。‎ ‎4. 再听两遍录音，补全下面的对话。‎ Conversation 1‎ ‎1. If you join the Lions,________ __________ a great soccer player.‎ 187‎ ‎2. If you become a Lion, _________ __________around the world.‎ ‎3. If you __________really hard, you’ll be famous.‎ Conversation 2‎ ‎4. If you become a professional soccer player,________ _________ _________to college.‎ ‎5. But if I ________do this now, I’ll ________ do it.‎ 观察与思考：‎ Conversation 1中含有的if从句，主句和从句都是肯定形式。Conversation 2中的if从句，主句和从句中用到了否定形式。 If引导的条件状语从句，若主句是否定含义，我们常用“主语+_________+动词原形+其他”来表达，若从句是否定含义，我们常用“if+主语+______+动词原形+其他”来表达。‎ 练习：(1)If he __________(not do )his homework, he’ll be late.‎ ‎(2)If she wears jeans, the teacher__________(not let)her in.‎ ‎(3)If you ________(not study) hard, you_________(not pass)the exam.‎ ‎5. 模仿秀： (1)同桌练习表演对话1。‎ ‎(2)跟读录音，模仿Conversation 2的语音语调，比比看谁模仿得最好。‎ After listening ‎1. 角色扮演：假设学生A是Micheal的朋友，学生B是Micheal.请给Micheal提供一些建议，利用2b中的信息。(请尽可能地发散你的思维吧!)‎ 例如：A：I think you should go to college.‎ B: But if I go to college, I’ll never become a great soccer player.‎ A:______________________________‎ B:______________________________‎ ‎2. 小组活动： 接龙游戏(If I travel around the world, I’ll…)‎ 知识巩固 Ⅰ. 单项选择。‎ ‎1. Zhou Jielun is famous __________ singing. A. as B. to C. for D. in ‎2. If you are late for class, the teacher ________ angry. A. is B. was C. will D. will be ‎3. If he _________harder, he will catch up with us soon. ‎ A. study B. studies C. will study D. studied ‎4. If I have a lot of money, I’ll travel _________ the world.‎ A. at B. around C. for D. to Ⅱ. 发挥想象，补全句子。‎ ‎1. If you play computer games all day, you _________________.‎ your eyes___________.‎ Your parents ____________.‎ ‎2. If I make a lot of money, I_________________.‎ ‎3. If ______________, he will stay at home.‎ ‎4. If______________, we won’t do well in our subjects.‎ 课堂反思 ‎1. 假如你是英语老师，你会做什么呢？请根据本课所学的语言结构进行陈述。‎ If I become an English teacher, I will… I will…if I don’t…, my pupil will…‎ ‎2. 通过本节课的学习，你还有哪些知识没有掌握？请做出标记。‎ 家庭作业 ‎1. 熟记听力材料中的Conversation 1和Conversation 2.‎ ‎2. ‎ 187‎ 编写对话，请同学们发挥想象，编写Agent与Micheal的父母之间的对话。(用上if引导的条件状语从句。) ‎ ‎3. 依据学习目标，预习下一个学案的课前准备。‎ Unit 10 If you go to the party, you’ll have a great time!‎ Period 4 Section B 2a—2d 学习目标 ‎ 知识目标： 熟练掌握句型：‎ ‎1. Some people believe the worst thing is to do nothing.‎ ‎2. Unless we talk to someone, we’ll certainly fell worse.‎ ‎3. It is best not to run away from our problems. We should always try to solve them.‎ 熟练掌握并能正确运用以下词汇：expert, keep . . . to oneself, teenager, normal, unless, certainly, wallet, worried, mile, angry, in the end, understanding, careless, mistake, himself, advise, solve, experience, in half, halfway.‎ 技能目标： 在阅读过程中，训练快读和精读两种策略。在写作过程中，学习正反对比两种写作方法，并恰当使用连接词。‎ 情感态度： 让学生认识到任何职业都有优点、缺点，学生应用辩证的观点分析、看待事物，在对自己理想职业的选择上要有一个清醒的认识并为之努力奋斗。‎ 课前准备 人人都有烦恼，你的烦恼是什么？请和你的同伴说说，并说说你是怎么解决的？‎ 列出你现在的问题，打算怎么解决？‎ problems solutions 学习过程 Warming up ‎1. Brainstorm: 结合课前准备I，与同伴交流：What kind of things do you worry about? ‎ ‎ Who do you usually go to for help?‎ ‎2. 结合课前准备Ⅱ，做出调查！‎ While reading ‎1. Skimming(略读)：速读2b，‎ ‎.( ) Which statement expresses the main idea of the passage?‎ A. If people have problems, they should get advice from an expert.‎ B. If people have problems, they should talk to other people.‎ C. If people have problems, they should keep them to themselves.[来源:学科网ZXXK]‎ ‎2. Scanning(找读)：‎ ‎(1) 仔细阅读2b，完成下面的任务。‎ ‎1.) What kinds of problems do students worry about? _______________________________‎ ‎2.) What does Laura have problem? ______________________________________________‎ ‎(2) 再读2b, 判断正误(正确“T”，错误“F”)。‎ ‎( ) 1.) Students these days often have lots of worries.‎ ‎( ) 2.) Some people believe the best thing is to do nothing.‎ ‎( ) 3.) Laura even walked three miles to school.[来源:学科网ZXXK]‎ 187‎ ‎(3) 再读2b, 回答问题。‎ ‎1.）What is the worst thing to do if you have a problem? _____________________________‎ ‎2.) Why didn’t Laura want to tell her parents about her lost wallet? ‎ ‎ ______________________________________________________________‎ ‎3.) What is the first thing you should do when you want to solve a problem? ‎ ‎ ______________________________________________________________‎ ‎4. Why can our parents give us good advice about our problems?‎ ‎ _____________________________________________________________‎ 观察与思考 ‎(1) 观察含有if的条件状语从句，总结其特点，并把它们翻译成汉语。‎ ‎(2) If I tell my parents, they’ll be angry!‎ If you play sports for a living, your job will become rich.‎ And if you become rich, you will have a difficult time knowing who your real friends are.‎ ‎※ 观察这三个句子，主句用了____________(时态)，从句用了__________(时态)。‎ ‎3. 听录音并跟读。‎ ‎4. 朗读与复述：‎ After reading ‎1. 完成2d，并大声朗读2d的短文。‎ ‎2. 仿照2b或2d的写作策略，写一篇小短文。用上“if+will”句式(。写完后，小组内互相批阅，并写上评语。‎ ‎3. Groupwork：故事接龙。Example: I think I’m going to go to the movies tonight. If I go to the movies, I won’t finish my homework. If I don’t finish my homework…‎ 知识巩固 Ⅰ. 根据句意和首字母提示完成单词。‎ ‎1. To be a p _________ soccer player is my dream.‎ ‎2. Many famous people give money to schools and c______________. ‎ ‎3. He was ill. H________, he went to school on time.‎ ‎4. Teachers’ Day is coming. I’ll give some f________ to our teachers.‎ ‎5. Yesterday she was badly __________(受伤)，so she didn’t go to work.‎ Ⅱ. 按要求完成句子，每空一词。‎ ‎1. Take more exercise and you’ll be healthy.(写出同义句)‎ ‎__________ __________take more exercise, you’ll be healthy.‎ ‎2. The old man sells newspapers for a living.(写出同义句)‎ The old man ________ ___________ __________ ___________newspapers.‎ ‎3. He is too small, so he can’t help his mother.(写出同义句)‎ He is _________small _______ help his mother.‎ ‎4. Jim enjoyed himself in the park.(写出同义句)‎ Jim _______ _________ ____________ __________ in the park.‎ ‎5. You can’t bring friends from other schools to the party.(改为祈使句)‎ ‎_______ ________ friends from other schools to the party.‎ 课堂反思 ‎1. 当我们有问题的时候 187‎ ‎，我们应分析其优点和缺点，以便指导好自己的选择。在描述完优点，转入描述缺点时，我们可使用如__________这类的表转折的连词。谈论中我们会用到哪些语言结构呢？‎ ‎2. 通过本节课的学习，你还有哪些没有掌握？请做出标记。‎ 家庭作业 熟读2b,并牢记2b中的短语。‎ 仿照2b或2d写出你的问题，仿写一篇小短文。‎ 1. 依据学习目标，预习下一个学案的课前准备。‎ Unit 10 If you go to the party, you’ll have a great time!‎ ‎ Period 5 Section B 2e--4‎ 学习目标 ‎ ‎ 知识目标： 熟练掌握句型：‎ A: What will you do if you visit an old people’s home?‎ B: If I do that, I’ll bring the old people some flowers.‎ 熟练掌握并能正确运用以下词汇: get advice, solution. plan 技能目标： 在阅读过程中，训练快读和精读两种策略。在写作过程中，学习正反对比两种写作方法，并恰当使用连接词。‎ 情感态度：就对待某一事的看法上鼓励学生畅所欲言，帮助学生形成健康向上的人生观。‎ 课前准备：I. 解决问题的方法 一、确认问题：确认问题是否是问题，还是本身就是如此。 二、描述问题：问题现象是什么 三、分析问题：分析可能导致问题的原因 四、排除问题：根据可能导致问题的原因进行排除 五、解决问题：确认导致问题的原因，根据实际情况解决问题 每天都有不同的事情出现，有点事情出现了，你是怎样解决的？请喝你的同伴交流！‎ 写出三个你认为最大的担忧，你打算怎么解决？‎ problems solutions A：What problems do you have ? B: ‎ A: What do you solution? B: ‎ 学习过程 Warming up ‎1. Brainstorm: 结合课前准备II，与同伴交流：What kind of things do you worry about? ‎ ‎ Who do you usually go to for help?‎ ‎2. 结合课前准备III，与同伴进行交流。并全班展示。‎ While reading ‎1. 小组内完成2e.然后全班展示。‎ ‎2.Fill in the chart. 3a.‎ problems Possible solutions ‎3. 3b. Write about your friend’s first problem and the possible solutions. Use the structures below to help you plan your writing.‎ ‎4. 仿照3b, 写出其余的两个问题。先小组内先改正，然后全班展示 187‎ After reading pariwork:‎ ‎ A: What will you do if you visit an old people’s home?[来源:学科网]‎ B: If I do that, I’ll bring the old people some flowers.‎ ‎2. 完成4. 班级内展示。‎ ‎3. 小组合作完成下面句子 ‎1. If I get up late tomorrow, .‎ ‎2. If I don’t finish my homework, .‎ ‎3. If I eat too much lunch, .[来源:学科网ZXXK]‎ ‎4. If I don’t get enough exercise, .‎ ‎5. If I am a good cook, .‎ ‎6. If I watch too much TV, .‎ ‎7. If I don’t help others ‎4. 完成self check的1. 2.3小题，并核对答案。然后朗读5分钟记忆。‎ 观察与思考：‎ Ⅰ.仔细观察下列例句，然后总结归纳关于if 引导的条件状语从句的用法。‎ ‎1.If it rains next Sunday, we won’t go for a picnic. 如果下周日下雨，我们就不去野餐了。‎ ‎2.If you go to the party, you will meet Uncle Zhang. 如果你去参加聚会，就会遇到张叔叔。‎ ‎3.I’ll ask the teacher for help if I don’t understand. 如果我有不懂的知识，就会向老师求助。‎ ‎4.We’ll plant trees in the mountains if it is fine tomorrow.‎ 如果明天天气睛朗，我们就要去山上植树。‎ ‎5.Put up your hand if you have any questions to ask. 如果你有问题，请举手。‎ ‎6.If I get there early, I can see the doctor soon. 如果我早到这儿，我就能很快看病。‎ ‎「结论」‎ ‎1.从以上例句，可知if是_______词，它连接了一个条件状语从句，表示假如有从句的动作发生，就会有主句的动作发生。‎ ‎2.通常情况下，主句用一般将来时，if引导的条件状语从句要用_________时态；‎ ‎3.由if 引导的条件状语从句既可以放在主句之______，如例句1、2、6；也可以放在主句之_______，如例句3、4、5‎ ‎4.从句如果位于主句之前时，常用_________将其与主句隔开，如例句1、2、6‎ ‎5.若主句是祈使句，if引导的条件状语从句仍用____________时态。如例句_______; ‎ ‎6.主句不一定总是一般将来时，有时也会出现“_________动词+动词原形”的情况，如例句_________, 从句总是___________时态。‎ 知识巩固：用词的适当形式填空 ‎1.      If you wear jeans, we ____________ (not let) you in.‎ ‎2.      Yao Ming is one of the most famous basketball ___________(play) in the world.‎ ‎3.      Mr Black enjoys __________ (go)to many places of interest.‎ ‎4.      If you go to the party, you ______________ (have) a great time.‎ ‎5.      Wang Lin did very ____________ (bad) in 100-meter race.‎ ‎6.      Tom says he _______________ (play) football at ten yesterday morning.‎ ‎7.     If he ___________ (come) tomorrow, I ______________(call) you .‎ ‎2. 用方框中所给单词或短语的适当形式填空，有两个多余单词，补全短文。‎ make a living; have a difficult time; compare; all the time ; ‎ 187‎ about; around the world ; complain Many movie stars1 ___________ that they are not happy. They say people watch them 2___________, And they 3____________ knowing who their real friends are. But I don’t think so. The movie stars all ‎ ‎4_____________ doing something they love. And they have lots of money. People 5__________ know them. They have many chances to help others. Oh, they can travel all over the world, too. When I grow up, I’m going to become a movie star.‎ ‎【总结反思】‎ 条件状语从句你学会了哪些？ _______________________________________________‎ 通过本节课的学习，你还有哪些没有掌握？请做出标记 ‎ ‎ 187‎